1. shopping
2. auctions

Project Manual
for
B.F. Yancey Elementary School
Wastewater Treatment Improvements
IFB# 2015-06113-06
Bid Document
May 15, 2014
Prepared by:
WW Associates, Inc.
3040 Avemore Square Place
Charlottesville, VA 22911
WWA Project No. 213003.05
For:
County School Board of
Albemarle County
Building Services Department
2751 Hydraulic Road
Charlottesville, Virginia 22901
INVITATION FOR BIDS for
B.F. YANCEY ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
WASTEWATER TREATMENT IMPROVEMENTS
IFB# 2015-06113-06
PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
BIDDING INFORMATION
Invitation for Bids
Instructions to Bidders
Prebid Question Form
Bid Form
Certification of Crimes Against Children
Page No.
IFB-1
ITB-1 to ITB-8
GENERAL CONDITIONS & FORMS
Construction Contract General Conditions
Supplemental General Conditions
Special Conditions
Pages 1 thru
1-57
1-7
1-3
BF-1 to BF-3
AC Form #
Contract Between Owner and Contractor
AC-9
Post-Bid Modification
AC-9b
Standard Performance Bond for Construction Contracts
AC-10
Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond
AC-10.1
Construction Change Order
AC-11
Change Order Estimate (General Contractor)
GC-1
Change Order Estimate (Subcontractor)
SC-1
Change Order Estimate (Sub-subcontractor)
SS-1
Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment
AC-12
Affidavit of Payment of Claims
AC-13
Architect/Engineer’s Certificate of Substantial Completion AC-13.1a
Architect/Engineer’s Certificate of Completion
AC-13.1
Contractor’s Certificate of Substantial Completion
AC-13.2a
Contractor’s Certificate of Completion
AC-13.2
Adverse Weather Day Rectification Form
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01400
General Requirements
Section
DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK
02010
02050
02200
02500
02660
Erosion & Sediment Control
Demolition
Earthwork
Surfacing and Incidental Construction
Water Distribution System
Pages 1 thru
01400-12
Pages 1 thru
Page 1 of 2
02010-2
02050-5
02200-12
02500-3
02660-9
02720
02730
02735
02831
02936
Storm Sewer System
Wastewater Piping Systems
Pipe Supports and Anchor
Chain Link Fences and Gates
Seeding
Section
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
03300
03450
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Precast Concrete Tanks
Section
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
11400
11600
11700
Package Wastewater Treatment Plant
Chemical Feed Equipment
Drip Irrigation System
Section
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTON
13100
Precast Concrete Building System
Section
DIVISION 15 – FLOOR DRAIN EQUIPMENT,
PIPING AND FITTINGS
15000
Floor Drain Equipment, Piping and Fittings
Section
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL
16010
16040
16110
16120
16130
16140
16150
16190
16420
16450
16470
16475
16510
Electrical General Provisions
Testing and Placing in Service
Raceways
Wire, Cable and Wiring
Switch and Outlet Boxes
Wiring Devices
Motors
Supporting Devices
Electric Service
Grounding
Panelboards
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Lighting
02720-2
02730-16
02735-3
02831-4
02936-5
03300-7
03450-12
Page 2 of 2
11400-13
11600-7
11700-18
13100-5
15000-2
16010-2
16040-2
16110-2
16120-2
16130-1
16140-1
16150-1
16190-3
16420-1
16450-1
16470-1
16475-1
16510-1
NOTICE OF
INVITATION FOR BIDS
# 2015-06113-06
Sealed bids are invited for the construction of the B.F. Yancey Elementary School Wastewater Treatment
Improvements. The project is generally described as construction of package type wastewater treatment facilities
consisting of flow equalization, secondary treatment with nitrification/denitrification, effluent pumping station,
drip irrigation system, related yard piping, electrical systems, necessary appurtenances, and an access road. The
project includes storm water management. Erosion and sediment controls will be required for all improvements.
Sealed bids will be received at the Albemarle County Purchasing Office, Room 248, Albemarle County Office
Building, 401 McIntire Road, Charlottesville, Virginia 22902. The deadline for submitting bids is 3:00 P.M., as
determined by the Purchasing Agent, on Wednesday, June 11, 2014. The bids will be opened publicly and read
aloud immediately following the receipt of bids.
The estimated construction cost range for this project is $400,000 to $600,000. The “Time for Completion” will
be as detailed in the Bid Form.
Bids to be considered shall be received in a sealed envelope marked as follows: County of Albemarle, Purchasing
Office, Room 248, Albemarle County Office Building, 401 McIntire Road, Charlottesville, VA 22902 /
Contract: B.F. Yancey Elementary School Wastewater Treatment Improvements / IFB No. 2015-06113-06.
Procedures for submitting a bid, claiming an error, withdrawal of bids, and other pertinent information are
contained in the Instructions to Bidders, which is part of the Invitation for Bids. Withdrawal due to error in bid
shall be permitted in accord with Section 9 of the Instructions to Bidders and §2.2-4330A (i), Code of Virginia.
The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids.
A pre-bid conference will be held at the school site, 7625 Porters Road, Esmont, Virginia 22937, at 10:00
a.m. on Wednesday, May 28, 2014. Attendance is mandatory for those submitting a bid.
The contract shall be awarded on a lump sum basis.
Contractor registration in accordance with Title 54.1, Chapter 11, of the Code of Virginia, is required. See the
Instructions to Bidders for additional qualification requirements.
The Invitation for Bids for the above project, including the drawings and the specifications prepared by WW
Associates, Inc and containing the information necessary for bidding, may be downloaded online from the
Albemarle County Purchasing web site at www.albemarle.org/purchasing. Please note that Bidders are
responsible to check the Purchasing web site and download any Addenda issued for this Bid. The Invitation for
Bid documents may also be inspected at the County of Albemarle, Purchasing Office, Room 248, Albemarle
County Office Building, 401 McIntire Road, Charlottesville, VA 22902, Telephone 434-296-5854 or email to
[email protected].
The Invitation for Bid documents will also be available for inspection at WW Associates, Inc., 3040 Avemore
Square Place, Charlottesville, VA 22911.
The County of Albemarle does not discriminate on the basis of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age or
disability, or against faith-based organizations as defined under the Virginia Public Procurement Act on the basis
of such organization’s religious or charitable character.
End of Notice of Invitation for Bids
IFB Format (September 2013)
IFB-1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
The Invitation For Bids (IFB) consists of the Notice, this Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, the Pre-Bid
Question Form, the Construction Contract General Conditions, the Supplemental General Conditions (if any), the
Special Conditions (if any), the Forms to be used, and the Scope of Work as described by the Plans and
Specifications, other documents listed in the Specifications, and any addenda which may be issued, all of which
request qualified bidders to submit competitive prices or bids for providing the described work on the project.
1.
CONDITIONS AT SITE OR STRUCTURE: Bidders shall be responsible for ascertaining pertinent
local conditions such as location, accessibility, general character of the site or building, and the
character and extent of existing work within or adjacent to the site. Claims, as a result of failure to have
done so, will not be considered by the Owner. See Section 7 of the General Conditions entitled
“Conditions at Site.”
2.
EXPLANATIONS TO BIDDERS: Bidders may not rely on any oral explanation in regard to the
meaning of drawings and specifications or oral instructions given before the award of the contract.
Discrepancies, omissions or doubts as to the meaning of drawings and specifications shall be
communicated in writing to the Architect/Engineer for interpretation. Bidders should use the “Prebid
Question Form” provided in the bid documents. Bidders must so act to assure that questions reach the
Architect/Engineer at least seven (7) days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids to allow a sufficient
time for an addendum to reach them before the submission of their bids. If an addendum is required for
clarification or interpretation of the Bid Documents, the addendum will be issued not later than five (5)
days prior to the date set for the receipt of bids except an addendum withdrawing the invitation for bid or
one which includes postponement of the date set for the receipt of bids. Any interpretation made will be in
the form of an addendum to the Invitation For Bids, which will be made available to all bidders, and its
receipt shall be acknowledged, in writing, by the bidder on the Bid Form.
3.
TIME FOR COMPLETION:
(a)
“Time for Completion” shall be designated by the Owner on the Invitation for Bids or other prebid documents and shall mean the number of consecutive calendar days following the issuance of
the Notice to Proceed which the Contractor has to substantially complete all Work required by the
Contract. In some instances, the Time for Completion may be stated in the form of a Contract
Completion Date based on a stipulated date of Notice to Proceed.
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall achieve Final Completion within thirty (30) days
after the date of Substantial Completion.
(b)
When the Notice to Proceed is issued, it will state a Contract Completion Date, which has been
set by the Owner based on date of the Notice to Proceed and the Time for Completion.
(c)
The Contractor, in preparing and submitting his bid, is required to take into consideration normal
weather conditions. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor because of adverse
weather conditions; however, an extension of time for abnormal weather will be considered by
the Owner as indicated in the General Conditions.
ITB-1
County of Albemarle
Instructions to Bidders (Rev. February 2013)
4.
PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF BIDS:
(a)
Bids shall be submitted on the forms furnished, or copies thereof, and shall be signed in ink.
Erasures or other changes in a bid must be explained or noted over the signature of the bidder.
Bids containing any conditions, omissions, unexplained erasures, alterations or items not called for
in the proposal, or irregularities of any kind, may be rejected by the Owner as being incomplete or
nonresponsive.
(b)
Each bid must give the complete legal name and full business address of the bidder and be signed
by the bidder, or the bidder's authorized representative, with his usual signature. Bids by
partnerships must be signed in the partnership name by one of the general partners of the
partnership or an authorized representative, followed by the designation/title of the person signing.
Bids by corporations must be signed with the legal name of the corporation followed by the name
of the state in which it is incorporated and by the signature and title of the person authorized to
bind it in this matter. The name of each person signing shall be typed or printed below the
signature. A signature on a bid by a person who identifies his title as “President,” “Secretary,”
“Agent” or other designation without disclosing the principal firm, shall be held to be the bid of
the individual signing. When requested by the Owner, satisfactory evidence of the authority of the
officer signing on behalf of the corporation shall be furnished. Trade or fictitious names may be
referenced by using “t/a ___” but bids shall be in the legal name of the person or entity submitting
the bid.
(c)
Bids with the bid guarantee shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope which shall be marked and
addressed as indicated by the advertisement. If a contract is for one hundred twenty thousand
dollars ($120,000) or more, or if the total value of all construction, removal, repair or
improvements undertaken by the bidder within any twelve-month period is seven hundred fifty
thousand dollars ($750,000) or more, the bidder is required under Title 54.1, Chapter 11, Section
1100, Code of Virginia, as amended, to be licensed in Virginia as a "Class A Contractor." If a
contract is for seven thousand five hundred dollars ($7,500) or more, but less than one hundred
twenty thousand dollars ($120,000), the bidder is required to be licensed in Virginia as a "Class B
Contractor." The bidder shall place on the outside of the envelope containing the bid and shall
place in the bid over his signature whichever of the following notations is appropriate and insert
his Contractor license/registration number:
Licensed Class A Virginia Contractor No.
or
Licensed Class B Virginia Contractor No.
If the bidder is not properly licensed in Virginia at the time the bid is submitted, or if the bidder
fails to provide this information on his bid or on the envelope containing the bid and fails to
promptly provide said Contractor license number to the Owner in writing when requested to do so
before or after the opening of bids, he shall be deemed to be in violation of Section 54.1-1115 of
the Code of Virginia, as amended, and his bid will not be considered.
(d)
The Board for Contractors has interpreted its regulations to mean “a licensed Contractor can bid on
a contract which contains work outside his license classification(s) as long as he subcontracts those
items for which he is not qualified to licensed contractors with the appropriate License
Classification and the work of the second party is incidental to the contract.” Therefore, the Owner
may, as a part of determining whether the bidder is “responsible,” require the apparent low
IT B-2
County of Albemarle
Instructions to Bidders (Rev. February 2013)
bidder to submit a listing of his subcontractors along with the license number and classification or
specialty of each.
(e)
5.
The bidder must also place its Employer Identification Number (SSN or FEIN) in the space
provided on the Bid Form.
BID GUARANTEE:
(a)
Any bid (including the Total Base Bid plus all Additive Bid Items) which exceeds one hundred
thousand dollars ($100,000) shall be accompanied by a Bid Bond payable to the Owner as
obligee in an amount equal to five percent (5%) of the amount of the bid. A Bid Bond may be
required for projects having bids of less than one hundred thousand dollars ($100,000) if such
requirement is stated in the Notice of Invitation for Bids. The Bid Bond must be issued by a
surety company which is legally authorized by the Virginia State Corporation Commission to do
fidelity and surety business in the Commonwealth of Virginia. The bid bond shall identify the
name and address of an attorney-in-fact who is appointed to act on behalf of the surety
within the Commonwealth of Virginia. The address of the attorney-in-fact shall be within
the Commonwealth of Virginia. The attorney -in-fact shall affix to the bond a certified and
current copy of the power of attorney. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the bidder will not
withdraw his bid during the period of sixty (60) days following the opening of bids; that if his bid
is accepted, he will enter into a formal contract with the Owner in accordance with the Contract
Between Owner and Contractor included as a part of the IFB Documents; that he will submit a
properly executed and authorized Standard Performance Bond and Standard Labor and Material
Payment Bond on the forms included in the IFB documents; and that in the event of the
withdrawal of said bid within said period, or failure to enter into said contract and give said
bonds within ten (10) days after he has received notice of acceptance of his bid, or other
forfeiture under the Bid Bond, the bidder shall be liable to the Owner for the difference between
the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Owner may contract with
another party to perform the work covered by said bid, up to the amount of the bid guarantee.
This amount represents the damage to the Owner on account of the default of the bidder in any
particular hereof. See §2.2-4336 of the Code of Virginia.
(b)
See §2.2-4338 of the Code of Virginia for provisions allowing alternative forms of bid security in
lieu of a Bid Bond.
(c)
The Bid Bonds or other bid security will be returned to all except the three lowest bidders after the
formal opening of bids. The remaining Bid Bonds or bid security will be returned to the bidders
after the Owner and the accepted bidder have executed the Contract and the Performance Bond
and the Payment Bond have been approved by the Owner.
(d)
If the required Contract and bonds have not been executed within sixty (60) days after the date of
the opening of the bids, then the bond or other bid security of any bidder will be returned upon his
request, provided he has not been notified of the acceptance of his bid prior to the date of such
request.
6. WITHDRAWAL OR MODIFICATION OF BIDS:
(a) WITHDRAWAL: Bids may be withdrawn by written or telefaxed notice received from bidders
prior to the deadline fixed for bid receipt. The bidder has sole responsibility to ensure that such
ITB-3
County of Albemarle
Instructions to Bidders (Rev. February 2013)
notice is received by the Owner in the appropriate office designated in the Instructions to Bidders,
and the Owner shall not be responsible for ensuring accurate or prompt delivery. A withdrawal
must be signed by the person signing the sealed bid or by other individual(s) who is authorized to
act on behalf of the bidder. Such authorization must be provided in writing at the time of
withdrawal, and stated on the face of the withdrawal notice. Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted
by the bidder up to the deadline fixed for bid receipt.
(b)
7.
8.
MODIFICATION: Bids may be modified only in the following manner. E-mail modifications
are not acceptable. All modifications must be made by withdrawing the bid and including all
modifications, including but not limited to price, inside the sealed bid envelope. All modifications
must be signed by the person signing the sealed bid or by other individual(s) who is authorized to
act on behalf of the bidder. Such authorization must be provided in writing with the modification,
and stated on the face of the modification notice, to be placed inside the sealed bid. No
modifications will be accepted unless they are submitted inside a sealed bid envelope. Unless
otherwise specified by the bidder, price modifications will be applied to the Total Base Bid
amount shown on the Bid Form. Faxes, notations on the outside of envelopes, envelope "cuts" or
other external writings will not be accepted. Delivery of modifications to the appropriate office
designated in the Instructions to Bidders shall be the sole responsibility of the bidder, and the
Owner shall not be responsible for ensuring accurate or prompt delivery.
RECEIPT OF BIDS:
(a)
Bids will be received at or before the date and the hour and at the place stipulated in the Invitation
for Bids as may be modified by subsequent Addenda.
(b)
It is the responsibility of the bidder to assure that his bid and any bid modifications are delivered
to the place designated for receipt of bids by the date and hour (deadline) set for receipt of bids.
Therefore, it is the bidder’s responsibility to take into account all factors which may impact on its
bid deliverer/courier’s ability to deliver the bid and to implement whatever actions are necessary
to have the bid delivered to the proper bid receipt location prior to the bid receipt deadline. No
bids or bid modifications submitted or offered after the date and hour designated for receipt of
bids will be accepted or considered.
(c)
The Purchasing Agent is the Owner's representative designated to receive bids at the time and
place noted in the IFB and to open the bids received at the appointed time.
(d)
The official time used for the receipt of responses is determined by reference to the clock
designated by the Purchasing Agent. The Purchasing Agent shall determine when the Bid Receipt
Deadline has arrived and shall announce that the Deadline has arrived and that no further bids or
bid modifications will be accepted. All bids and bid modifications in the possession of the
Purchasing Agent and his assistants at the time the announcement is completed are deemed to be
timely, whether or not the bid envelope has been physically date/time stamped or otherwise
marked by the time the Purchasing Agent makes the deadline announcement.
OPENING OF BIDS:
(a)
Bids will be opened at the time and place stated in the Invitation for Bids or as modified by
subsequent Addenda, and their contents publicly announced. The Purchasing Agent shall decide
IT B-4
County of Albemarle
Instructions to Bidders (Rev. February 2013)
when the specified time for bid opening has arrived. No responsibility will be attached to any
officer or agent for the premature opening of a bid not properly addressed and identified.
(b)
9.
The provisions of §2.2-4342 of the Code of Virginia shall be applicable to the inspections of bids
received.
ERRORS IN BIDS: A bidder may withdraw his bid from consideration if the price bid was substantially
lower than the other bids due solely to a mistake therein, provided the bid was submitted in good faith,
and the mistake was a clerical mistake as opposed to a judgment mistake, and was actually due to an
unintentional arithmetic error or an unintentional omission of a quantity of work, labor or material made
directly in the compilation of a bid, which unintentional arithmetic error or unintentional omission can be
clearly shown by objective evidence drawn from inspection of original work papers, documents and
materials used in the preparation of the bid sought to be withdrawn. The bidder shall give notice of a
claim to withdraw a bid, in writing, and submit his original work papers, documents and materials used
in the preparation of his bid, to the Purchasing Agent within two business days after the conclusion of the
opening of bids. §2.2-4330(B)(1) of the Code of Virginia.
Failure of a bidder to give notice and submit his original work papers, documents and materials used in
the preparation of his bid on or before the time, date and place required shall constitute a waiver by that
bidder of his right to withdraw his bid due to a mistake.
No bid may be withdrawn under this section when the result would be the awarding of the Contract on
another bid of the same bidder or of another bidder in which the ownership of the withdrawing bidder is
more than five percent (5%).
No bidder who is permitted to withdraw a bid shall, for compensation, supply any material or labor to or
perform any subcontract or other work agreement for the person or firm to whom the Contract is
awarded or otherwise benefit, directly or indirectly, from the performance of the project for which the
withdrawn bid was submitted. The person or firm to whom the Contract was awarded and the
withdrawing bidder are jointly liable to the Owner in an amount equal to any compensation paid to or for
the benefit of the withdrawing bidder without such approval.
If a bid is withdrawn under authority of this section, the lowest remaining bid shall be deemed to be the
low bidder on the project.
10.
REJECTION OF BIDS: The Owner reserves the right to cancel the Invitation for Bids, to reject any
and all bids at its sole discretion when such rejection is in the interest of the Owner, or to reject the bid
of any bidder who is determined to be not responsive or not responsible. See §2.2-4319, Code of
Virginia.
11.
DETERMINATION OF RESPONSIBILITY:
Each bidder shall be prepared, if so requested by the Owner, to present evidence of his experience,
qualifications and financial ability to carry out the terms of the Contract.
Prior to award of the Contract, an evaluation will be made to determine if the low bidder has the
capability, in all respects, to perform fully the contract requirements and the moral and business integrity
and reliability which will assure good faith performance, and who has been prequalified, if required.
Factors to be evaluated may include, but are not limited to:
ITB-5
County of Albemarle
Instructions to Bidders (Rev. February 2013)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
sufficient financial ability to perform the contract as evidenced by the bidder's ability to obtain
payment and performance bonds from an acceptable surety;
appropriate experience to perform the Work described in the bid documents;
any judgments entered against the bidder, or any officers, directors, partners or owners for breach
of a contract for construction;
any substantial noncompliance with the terms and conditions of prior construction contracts with
a public body without good cause where the substantial noncompliance is documented; or
a conviction of the bidder or any officer, director, partner, project manager, procurement
manager, chief financial officer, or owner in the last five years of a crime relating to
governmental or nongovernmental construction or contracting;
any current debarment of the contractor, any officer, director or owner, from bidding or
contracting by any public body of any state, any state agency, or any agency of the federal
government.
The Owner reserves the right to disqualify or refuse to accept the bid of any bidder who has been
convicted, or entered a plea of guilty or nolo contendere, in any federal or state court to any charge
involving any unlawful, corrupt or collusive practice involving a public contract whether federal, state,
or local, or who has been determined in any judicial proceeding to have violated any antitrust, bidrigging or collusive practice statute in connection with any public contract, or against whom such formal
criminal prosecution or other judicial proceeding has been initiated.
A bidder who, despite being the apparent low bidder, is determined not to be a responsible bidder shall
be notified in writing in conformance with the procedures in §2.2-4359 of the Code of Virginia.
12.
AWARD OF CONTRACT:
(a)
Basis for Contract Award: The Contract, if awarded, will be awarded to the lowest responsive
and responsible bidder, if any, provided his bid is reasonable and it is in the best interest of the
Owner to accept it and subject to the Owner's right to reject any and all bids and to waive
informality in the bids and in the bidding. The Bid Form may contain a multi-part Base Bid and
may contain Additive Bid Items. Determination of the lowest responsible bidder, if any, will be
based on the Total Base Bid amount entered on the Bid Form including any properly submitted
bid modifications plus as many Additive Bid Items taken in sequence as the Owner in its
discretion chooses to Award. Where the sum of the values entered in the multiple parts do not
agree with the Total Base Bid amount, the Total Base Bid amount entered on the Bid Form,
including any properly submitted bid modifications, shall take precedence. In the event that the
Total Base Bid from the lowest responsible bidder exceeds available funds, the Owner may
negotiate the Total Base Bid amount with the apparent low bidder to obtain a contract price
within available funds, pursuant to §2.2-4318 of the Code of Virginia and Section 12(c) herein.
(b)
Informalities: The Owner reserves the right to waive any informality in the bids.
(c)
Negotiation With Lowest Responsible Bidder: If award of a contract to the lowest responsive
and responsible bidder is precluded because of limitations on available funds, under the
provisions of §2.2-4318 of the Code of Virginia (the Public Procurement Act), the Owner
reserves the right to negotiate the Total Base Bid amount with the lowest responsive, responsible
bidder to obtain a contract price within the available funds. This may involve changes in either
the features or scope of the work included in the Base Bid. Such negotiations with the apparent
IT B-6
County of Albemarle
Instructions to Bidders (Rev. February 2013)
low bidder may include reducing the quantity, quality, or other cost saving mechanisms involving
items in the Total Base Bid. The Owner shall notify the lowest responsive and responsible bidder
that such a situation exists and the Owner and bidder shall then conduct their negotiations in
person, by mail, by telephone or by any means they find convenient. If an acceptable contract can
be negotiated, the changes to the Invitation for Bid documents agreed upon in the negotiations shall
be summarized in a “Post Bid Modification” and included in the contract. If an acceptable contract
cannot be negotiated, the Owner shall terminate negotiations and reject all bids.
13.
CONTRACT SECURITY: For contracts of more than $100,000, the Standard Performance Bond
(Form AC-10) and the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond (Form AC-10.1) shall be required,
as specified in the Invitation for Bids documents. See the General Conditions and §2.2-4337 and §2.24338 of the Code of Virginia. The Owner reserves the right to require such bonds for contracts less than
$100,000. If the Owner so elects, the requirement shall be set forth in the Invitation for Bids. The bonds
shall identify the name and address of an attorney-in-fact who is appointed to act on behalf of the
surety within the Commonwealth of Virginia. The address of the attorney-in-fact shall be within
the Commonwealth of Virginia. The attorney-in-fact shall affix to the bond a certified and current
copy of the power of attorney.
14.
CERTIFICATION: The bidder, by his signature on the Bid Form, certifies that neither his organization
nor any of its officers, directors, partners or owners is currently barred from bidding on contracts by the
Commonwealth of Virginia, or any public body or agency of another state, or any agency of the federal
government. See the statement “Disqualification of Contractors” in the Bid Form.
15.
ETHICS IN PUBLIC CONTRACTING: The provisions, requirements and prohibitions as contained
in Chapter 43, Article 6, §2.2-4367 et seq, Code of Virginia, pertaining to bidders, offerers, contractors,
and subcontractors are applicable to this project.
16.
BUILDING PERMITS: The Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code shall apply to the Work and
shall be administered by the local Building Official. The Building Permit will be paid and obtained for
by the Owner. All other permits, local license fees, business fees, taxes, or similar assessments shall be
obtained and paid for by the Contractor. See Section 25 of the General Conditions for utility connection
fees and services.
17.
MINORITY UTILIZATION: The County of Albemarle, Virginia, encourages the participation of
minority businesses in public procurement activities. Towards that end, the Owner encourages firms to
provide for the participation of minority owned businesses through partnerships, joint ventures,
subcontracts, and other contractual opportunities.
18.
BID DOCUMENTS: Bid Documents are the property of the Owner and are available electronically
through the Purchasing Department’s file transfer protocol (FTP) site. Bidders are responsible to check
the Purchasing FTP site and download any Addenda issued for the bid. A deposit is not required for
downloading of electronic documents through the FTP site. The bidder is responsible for the cost of
printing any contract documents necessary for bidding. If awarded a contract, the Owner will provide
the contractor with two sets of contract documents (i.e. full sized drawings and specifications) for use in
the field and the contractor will be responsible for the cost of printing any additional contract documents
that may be needed.
19.
GENERAL CONDITIONS: The County of Albemarle Construction Contract General Conditions are
incorporated in the bid documents. The bidder may obtain a copy of the current edition of the
ITB-7
County of Albemarle
Instructions to Bidders (Rev. February 2013)
Construction Contract General Conditions at no cost by request to the County of Albemarle, Office of
Facilities Development, 401 McIntire Road, Room 228, Charlottesville, Virginia 22902 (434-8724501).
20.
PREBID CONFERENCE: See the Invitation for Bids for requirements for a prebid conference and
whether such conference is mandatory or optional.
21.
INSPECTION OF BID DOCUMENTS: Copies of the Invitation for Bids documents including Plans
and Specifications and the Construction Contract General Conditions will be available for inspection at
the Albemarle County Purchasing Department, the A/E’s office, and at the locations listed in the Notice
of the Invitation for Bids.
22.
DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE REQUIRED: Bidders are reminded that §2.2-4312 of the Code of
Virginia requires that during the performance of the contract resulting from this solicitation, the
contractor agrees to (i) provide a drug-free workplace for the contractor’s employees; (ii) post in
conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, a statement notifying
employees that the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of a
controlled substance or marijuana is prohibited in the contractor’s workplace and specifying the actions
that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition; (iii) state in all solicitations or
advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor that the contractor maintains a
drug-free workplace; and (iv) include the provisions of the foregoing clauses in every subcontract or
purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or
vendor.
For the purposes of this section, "drug-free workplace" means a site for the performance of work done
in connection with a specific contract awarded to a contractor in accordance with this solicitation, the
employees of whom are prohibited from engaging in the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution,
dispensation, possession or use of any controlled substance or marijuana during the performance of the
contract.
23.
CERTIFICATION OF CRIMES AGAINST CHILDREN: Pursuant to Virginia Code §22.1296.1(C),
as a condition of awarding a contract for the provision of services that require the contractor or his
employees to have direct contact with students on school property during regular school hours or during
school-sponsored activities, the School Board requires the contractor to provide certification that all
persons who will provide such services have not been convicted of a felony or any offense involving the
sexual molestation or physical or sexual abuse or rape of a child. Any person making a materially false
statement regarding any such offense shall be guilty of a Class 1 misdemeanor and, upon conviction, the
fact of such conviction shall be grounds for the revocation of the contract to provide such services and,
when relevant, the revocation of any license required to provide such services. This requirement does not
apply to a contractor or his employees providing services to the School Board in an emergency or
exceptional situation, such as when student health or safety is endangered or when repairs are needed on
an urgent basis to ensure that school facilities are safe and habitable, when it is reasonably anticipated
that the contractor or his employees will have no direct contact with students.
ITB-8
County of Albemarle
Instructions to Bidders (Rev. February 2013)
PREBID QUESTION FORM
(Use separate form for each question submitted.)
DATE:
PROJECT: B.F. Yancey Elementary School Wastewater Treatment Improvements
The following question concerns Drawing Sheet (number) ________________:
The following question concerns Specifications Section (number) _______________ , page
paragraph _______________ :
All responses to questions will be made by Addendum.
Questions submitted by: ______________________________
Name
Organization
Email Form To: County of Albemarle Purchasing Agent – [email protected]
County of Albemarle Project Manager – [email protected].
WW Associates, Inc., Herbert F. White, P.E. – [email protected]
Or
Mail/Fax Form to: County of Albemarle
Purchasing Department
401 McIntire Road, Room 248
Charlottesville, VA 22902-4596
FAX: (434) 972-4006
WW Associates, Inc.
Attn: Herbert F. White, III, P.E.
3040 Avemore Square Place
Charlottesville, VA 22911
[email protected]
County of Albemarle
Prebid Question Form (September 2013)
,
BID FORM
DATE: May 15, 2014
PROJECT TITLE: B.F. Yancey Elementary School Wastewater Treatment Improvements
IFB No. 2015-06113-06
TO:
The County School Board of Albemarle County, Virginia
Purchasing Office – Room 248
Albemarle County Office Building
401 McIntire Road
Charlottesville, VA 22902
In compliance with and subject to your Invitation for Bids and the documents therein specified,
all of which are incorporated herein by reference, the undersigned bidder proposes to furnish all
labor, equipment, and materials and perform all work necessary for construction of this project,
in accordance with the Plans and Specifications and the Addenda noted below, as prepared by
WW Associates, Inc., 3040 Avemore Square Place, Charlottesville, Virgina 22911 for the
consideration of the following amount:
Base Bid Item No. 1 is defined as the Lump Sum price for construction of all improvements in
accordance with plans and specifications: ___________________________________________
______________________________________________________ Dollars ($ _______ ).
(Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in
words shall govern.)
Base Bid Item No. 2 is defined as the Owners Contingency: $15,000.
Total Base Bid is defined as all work in Bid Item Nos. 1 and 2 for the sum of ______________
Dollars
($_______________).
NOTES:
1.
Owners contingency of $15,000 is an allowance in the Bid for potential change orders.
Contractor shall include this in the Bid. Actual change order amounts will be negotiated
using this contingency fund for that purpose.
2.
B.F. Yancey Elementary School Wastewater Treatment Improvements consist of the
following contract documents:
. Project Manual entitled B.F. Yancey Elementary School Wastewater Treatment
Improvements dated May 9, 2014
. Plans entitled B.F. Yancey Elementary School Wastewater Treatment Improvements
dated March 21, 2014
. Plans entitled B.F. Yancey Elementary School Wastewater Treatment Improvements
Erosion and Sediment Control Plan dated March 13, 2014
BF-1
Bid Form (Sept. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
Contract award will be based on the TOTAL LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shown above
(including any properly submitted bid modifications).
The County reserves the right to reject any and all bids.
The undersigned understands that time is of the essence and agrees that the time for Substantial
Completion of the entire project shall be one hundred fifty (150) consecutive calendar days from
the date of commencement of the Work as specified in the Notice to Proceed, and Final
Completion shall be achieved within 30 consecutive calendar days after the date of Substantial
Completion as determined by the A/E. All work on the existing school site, excluding the
demolition of the existing septic tank, shall be completed by August 8, 2014.
Acknowledgment is made of receipt of the following Addenda:
ADDENDUM #
DATE
If notice of acceptance of this bid is given to the undersigned within 60 days after the date of
opening of bids, or any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned will execute
and deliver a contract in the prescribed form (County of Albemarle Contract Between Owner and
Contractor, Form AC-9) within 10 days after the contract has been presented to him for signature.
The required payment and performance bonds, on the forms prescribed, shall be delivered to the
owner along with the signed Contract.
Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986: The undersigned certifies that it does not and will
not during the performance of the Contract for this project violate the provisions of the Federal
Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986, which prohibits employment of illegal aliens.
DISQUALIFICATION OF CONTRACTORS: By signing this bid or proposal, the undersigned
certifies that this Bidder or any officer, director, partner or owner is not currently barred from
bidding on contracts by any Agency of the Commonwealth of Virginia, or any public body or
agency of another state, or any agency of the federal government, nor is this Bidder a subsidiary
or affiliate of any firm/corporation that is currently barred from bidding on contracts by any of
the same. We have attached an explanation of any previous disbarment(s) and copies of notice(s)
of reinstatement(s).
CERTIFICATION OF NO COLLUSION: The undersigned does hereby certify in connection
with the procurement and bid to which this Certification of No Collusion is incorporated that:
This bid is not the result of, or affected by, any act of collusion with another
person engaged in the same line of business or commerce; nor is this bid the result
of, or affected by, any act of fraud punishable under Article 1.1 of Chapter 12 of
Title 18.2 of the Code of Virginia, 1950, as amended (18.2-498.1 et seq.).
BF-2
Bid Form (Sept. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
The undersigned declares that they are fully authorized to sign the proposal on behalf of the firm
listed and to all conditions and provisions thereof. The firm name given below is the true and
complete name of the bidder and the bidder is legally qualified and licensed by the
Commonwealth of Virginia, Department of Commerce, State Board for Contractors, to perform
all Work included in the scope of the Contract.
Virginia License No. _______________________ Bidder _____________________________
(Name of Firm)
Contractor Class __________________________ By _________________________
(Signature)
Valid Until _______________________
(Typed Name)
FEIN/SSN: _______________________________ Title: ______________________________
If Partnership (List Partner’s Names)
If Corporation, affix Corporate Seal & list
State of Incorporation
State: ______________________________
(Affix Seal)
Business Address:
Telephone No.:
Fax No.:
Email:
BF-3
Bid Form (Sept. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
CERTIFICATION OF CRIMES AGAINST CHILDREN
Contractor acknowledges that the implementation of this contract requires Contractor,
Contractor’s employees and subcontractors to have direct contact with Albemarle County
Public Schools’ students. Therefore, Contractor hereby certifies that neither Contractor
nor, to the best of Contractor’s knowledge, its employees and subcontractors have been
convicted of a felony or any offense involving the sexual molestation or physical or
sexual abuse or rape of a child.
For the purposes of this certification, "direct contact with students" means being in the
presence of students during regular school hours or during school sponsored activities.
Contractor understands that, pursuant to Code of Virginia §22.1-296.1(C), making a
materially false statement regarding offenses which are required to be included in the
certification referenced above is a Class 1 misdemeanor and, upon conviction, the fact of
such conviction shall be grounds for the revocation of the contract to provide such
services and, when relevant, the revocation of any license required to provide such
services. Albemarle County Public Schools shall not be liable for materially false
statements regarding the certifications required under this Contract.
Contractor
By:
Title:
5_Certification of Crimes Against Children - For School Projects.docx
Date
COUNTY OF ALBEMARLE
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.
DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................................. 3
2.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .......................................................................................................... 7
3.
LAWS AND REGULATIONS ........................................................................................................ 8
4.
NONDISCRIMINATION ................................................................................................................ 9
5.
PROHIBITION OF ALCOHOL AND OTHER DRUGS .............................................................. 10
6.
TIME FOR COMPLETION........................................................................................................... 10
7.
CONDITIONS AT SITE ................................................................................................................ 12
8.
CONTRACT SECURITY .............................................................................................................. 12
9.
SUBCONTRACTS ........................................................................................................................ 13
10. SEPARATE CONTRACTS ........................................................................................................... 14
11. CONTRACTOR’S AND SUBCONTRACTOR’S INSURANCE ................................................ 14
12. “ALL RISK” BUILDER’S RISK INSURANCE ........................................................................... 15
13. TAXES, FEES AND ASSESSMENTS ......................................................................................... 16
14. PATENTS ...................................................................................................................................... 16
15. ARCHITECT/ENGINEER’S STATUS ......................................................................................... 17
16. INSPECTION................................................................................................................................. 18
17. SUPERINTENDENCE BY CONTRACTOR ............................................................................... 20
18. CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION, METHODS AND PROCEDURES .................................... 21
19. SCHEDULE OF THE WORK ....................................................................................................... 21
20. SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT ........................................... 25
21. ACCESS TO WORK ..................................................................................................................... 26
22. SURVEYS AND LAYOUT........................................................................................................... 26
-1County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
23. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................. 27
24. SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................... 28
25. FEES, SERVICES AND FACILITIES .......................................................................................... 30
26. EQUALS ........................................................................................................................................ 31
27. AVAILABILITY OF MATERIALS .............................................................................................. 32
28. CONTRACTOR’S TITLE TO MATERIALS ............................................................................... 32
29. STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS INSTALLATION & WORKMANSHIP .............................. 32
30. WARRANTY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP .......................................................... 33
31. USE OF SITE AND REMOVAL OF DEBRIS ............................................................................. 34
32. TEMPORARY ROADS ................................................................................................................. 35
33. SIGNS ............................................................................................................................................ 35
34. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY ....................................................................... 35
35. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS ........................................................................................................... 36
36. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR ................................................................................................ 36
37. PAYMENTS BY CONTRACTOR (§2.2-4354, Code of Virginia) ............................................... 40
38. CHANGES IN THE WORK .......................................................................................................... 41
39. CONTRACTOR’S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT ................ 46
40. OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT FOR CAUSE ..... 47
41. TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE ................................................................ 48
42. DAMAGES FOR DELAYS; EXTENSION OF TIME ................................................................. 48
43. INSPECTION FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION & FINAL COMPLETION ..................... 51
44. GUARANTEE OF WORK ............................................................................................................ 52
45. ASSIGNMENTS OF CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS ........................................................... 54
46. CONTRACTUAL DISPUTES (§2.2-4363, Code of Virginia) ..................................................... 54
47. ASBESTOS .................................................................................................................................... 54
48. TRAINING, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT ...................................... 55
49. PROJECT MEETINGS .................................................................................................................. 55
-2County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
1. DE FI NI T IO NS
Whenever used in these Construction Contract General Conditions (“General Conditions”) or in the
Contract Documents, the following terms have the meanings indicated, which are applicable to both the
singular and plural and the male and female gender thereof:
Architect, Engineer, Architect/Engineer or A/E: The term used to designate the Architect and/or the
Engineer that contracts with the Owner to provide the Architectural and Engineering services for the
Project. The A/E is a separate contractor and not an agent of the Owner. The term includes any associates
or consultants employed by the A/E to assist in providing the A/E services.
Beneficial Occupancy: The condition after Substantial Completion but prior to Final Completion of the
Project at which time the Project, or portion thereof, is sufficiently complete and systems operational
such that the Owner could, after obtaining necessary approvals and certificates, occupy and utilize the
space for its intended use. Guarantees and warranties applicable to that portion of the Work begin on the
date the Owner accepts the Project, or a portion thereof, for such Beneficial Occupancy, unless otherwise
specified in the Supplemental General Conditions or by separate agreement.
Building Permit: The term building permit as used herein shall mean any and all permits required to
comply with local and state building codes.
Change Order: A document (Form AC-11) issued on or after the effective date of the Contract Between
Owner and Contractor (Form AC-9) which is agreed to by the Contractor and approved by the Owner,
and which authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, including any adjustment in the
Contract Price and/or the Contract Completion Date. A Change Order once signed by all parties, with the
exception of a Unilateral Change Order that is only signed by the Owner, is incorporated into and
becomes a part of the Contract.
Claim: A demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or
interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the
terms of the Contract. The term “claim” also includes other disputes and matters in question between the
Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice.
The responsibility to substantiate claims shall rest with the party making the claim.
Code of Virginia: 1950 Code of Virginia as amended. Sections of the Code referred to herein are noted
by (§xx-xx).
Construction: The term used to include new construction, reconstruction, renovation, restoration, major
repair, demolition and all similar work upon buildings and ancillary facilities, including any draining,
dredging, excavation, grading or similar work upon real property.
Contract: The Contract Between Owner and Contractor, Form AC-9, hereinafter referred to as the
Contract.
Contract Completion Date: The date by which the Work must be substantially complete. The Contract
Completion Date is customarily established in the Notice To Proceed, based on the Time for
-3County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
Completion. In some instances, however, the Contract contains a mandatory Contract Completion Date,
which shall be stated in the Invitation for Bid.
Contract Documents: The Contract Between Owner and Contractor (Form AC-9) signed by the Owner
and the Contractor and any documents expressly incorporated therein. Such incorporated documents
customarily include the bid submitted by the Contractor, these General Conditions, any Supplemental
General Conditions, any Special Conditions, the plans and the specifications, and all modifications,
including addenda and subsequent Change Orders.
Contract Price: The total compensation payable to the Contractor for performing the Work, subject to
modification by Change Order.
Contractor: The person with whom the Owner has entered into a contractual agreement to do the
Work.
Day(s): Calendar day(s) unless otherwise noted.
Defective: An adjective which, when modifying the word Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty, deficient, does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of
inspections, standards, tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents, or Work that has been
damaged prior to the A/E’s recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection
thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion or Beneficial Occupancy).
Drawing: A page or sheet of the Plans which presents a graphic representation, usually drawn to scale,
showing the technical information, design, location, and dimensions of various elements of the Work.
The graphic representations include, but are not limited to, plan views, elevations, transverse and
longitudinal sections, large and small scale sections and details, isometrics, diagrams, schedules, tables
and/or pictures.
Emergency: Any unforeseen situation, combination of circumstances, or a resulting state that poses
imminent danger to health, life or property.
Final Completion Date: The date of the Owner’s acceptance of the Work from the Contractor upon
confirmation from the Architect/Engineer and the Contractor that the Work is totally complete in
accordance with Section 43(b).
Field Order: A written order issued by the A/E which clarifies or explains the plans or specifications, or
any portion or detail thereof, without changing the design, the Contract Price, the Time for Completion
or the Contract Completion Date.
Float: The excess time included in a construction schedule to accommodate such items as inclement
weather and associated delays, equipment failures, and other such unscheduled events. It is the
contingency time associated with a path or chain of activities and represents the amount of time by
which the early finish date of an activity may be delayed without impacting the critical path and
delaying the overall completion of the Project. Any difference in time between the Contractor’s
approved early completion date and the Contract Completion Date shall be considered a part of the
Project float.
-4County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
Float, Free: The time (in days) by which an activity may be delayed or lengthened without impacting
upon the start day of any activity following in the chain.
Float, Total: The difference (in days) between the maximum time available within which to perform an
activity and the duration of an activity. It represents the time by which an activity may be delayed or
lengthened without impacting the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date.
Notice: All written notices, including demands, instructions, claims, approvals and disapprovals,
required or authorized under the Contract Documents. Any written notice by either party to the Contract
shall be sufficiently given by any one or combination of the following, whichever shall first occur: (1)
delivered by hand to the last known business address of the person to whom the notice is due; (2)
delivered by hand to the person’s authorized agent, representative or officer wherever they may be
found; or (3) enclosed in a postage prepaid envelope addressed to such last known business address and
delivered to a United States Postal Service official or mailbox. Notice is effective upon such delivery. All
notices to the Owner should be directed to the Project Manager.
Notices transmitted by Facsimile (Fax) are acceptable for the Project. Notices shall be transmitted to the
Fax number listed in the Contract and shall have a designated space for the Fax Notice recipient to
acknowledge his receipt by authorized signature and date. The Fax Notice with authorized signature
acknowledging receipt shall be Faxed back to the sender. The Faxed Notice shall be effective on the date
it is acknowledged by authorized signature. All Faxed Notices shall also be sent by hard copy, which
shall be effective upon delivery, as provided herein. Notice shall be effective upon the date of
acknowledgment of the Faxed Notice or the date of delivery, whichever occurs first.
Notice to Proceed: A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor (with a copy to A/E) fixing
the date on which the Contract time will commence for the Contractor to begin the prosecution of the
Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Notice to Proceed will
customarily identify a Contract Completion Date.
Owner: County of Albemarle, Virginia and/or The County School Board of Albemarle County,
Virginia.
Person: This term includes any individual, corporation, partnership, association, company, business,
trust, joint venture, or other legal entity.
Plans: The term used to describe the group or set of project-specific drawings which are included in the
Contract Documents.
Project: The term used instead of the specific or proper assigned title of the entire undertaking which
includes, but is not limited to, the “Work” described by the Contract Documents.
Project Inspector: One or more persons and/or firms employed by the Owner to inspect the Work for
the Owner and/or to document and maintain records of activities at the Site to the extent required by the
Owner. The scope of the Project Inspector’s authority with respect to the Contractor is limited to that
indicated in Section 16(e) and (f).
-5County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
Project Manager: The Project Manager as used herein shall be the Owner’s designated representative
on the Project. The Project Manager shall be the person through whom the Owner generally conveys
written decisions and notices. All notices due the Owner and all information required to be conveyed to
the Owner shall be conveyed to the Project Manager. The Owner may change the Project Manager from
time to time and may, in the event that the Project Manager is absent, disabled or otherwise temporarily
unable to fulfill his duties, appoint an interim Project Manager.
Provide: Shall mean furnish and install ready for its intended use.
Site: Shall mean the location at which the Work is performed or is to be performed.
Specifications: That part of the Contract Documents containing the written administrative requirements
and the technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards, and
workmanship which describe the proposed Work in sufficient detail and provide sufficient information
for the Building Official to determine code compliance and for the Contractor to perform the Work.
(The General Conditions, any Supplemental General Conditions, various bidding information and
instructions, and blank copies of various forms to be used during the execution of the Work are usually
bound with the Specifications.)
Subcontractor: A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for
the performance of the Work. Subcontractor includes any person who provides on-site labor but does
not include any person who only furnishes or supplies materials for the Project.
Submittals: All shop, fabrication, setting and installation drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules,
samples, and other data required by the Contract Documents which are specifically prepared by or for
the Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules,
performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a Supplier and submitted
by the Contractor to illustrate material or equipment conformance of some portion of the Work with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Substantial Completion: The condition when the Owner agrees that the Work, or a specific portion
thereof, is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that it can be utilized
by the Owner for the purposes for which it was intended. The Owner at its sole discretion may, after
obtaining the necessary approvals and certificates, take Beneficial Occupancy at this time or choose to
wait to occupy until after Final Completion is achieved.
Supplemental General Conditions: That part of the Contract Documents which amends or
supplements the General Conditions.
Supplier: A manufacturer, fabricator, distributor, materialman or vendor who provides material for the
Project but does not provide on-site labor.
Time for Completion: The number of consecutive calendar days following the issuance of the Notice
to Proceed which the Contractor has to substantially complete all Work required by the Contract. When
the Notice to Proceed is issued, it states a Contract Completion Date, which has been set by the Owner
based on the Time for Completion.
-6County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
Underground Facilities: All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or
other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which are or have
been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam,
liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage
removal, traffic or other control systems or water.
Unilateral Change Order: A Change Order from the Owner directing the Contractor to proceed with
work within the scope of the contract which may be undefined or for which there is no agreement on the
cost or time associated with the work.
Work: The services performed under this Contract including, but not limited to, furnishing labor, and
furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction. The Work also includes the
entire completed construction, or the various separately identifiable parts thereof, required to be
furnished under the Contract Documents.
2.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
(a) The Contract Between Owner and Contractor (AC-9), the Standard Performance Bond (AC-10), the
Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond (AC-10.1), the Schedule of Values and Certificate for
Payment (AC-12), the Affidavit of Payments of Claims (AC-13), the Contractor’s Certificate of
Substantial Completion (AC-13.2a), and the Contractor’s Certificate of Completion (AC-13.2)
issued by the County of Albemarle are forms incorporated in these General Conditions by reference
and are made a part hereof to the same extent as though fully set forth herein. They must be used by
the Contractor for their respective purposes.
(b) All time limits stated in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the Time for
Completion of the Work, are of the essence of the Contract.
(c) The Contract Between Owner and Contractor shall be signed by the Owner and the Contractor in as
many original counterparts as may be mutually agreed upon, each of which shall be considered an
original.
(d) Anything called for by one of the Contract Documents and not called for by the others shall be of
like effect as if required or called for by all, except that a provision clearly designed to negate or
alter a provision contained in one or more of the other Contract Documents shall have the intended
effect. In the event of conflicts among the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall take
precedence in the following order: the Contract Between Owner and Contractor; the Supplemental
General Conditions; the General Conditions; the specifications with attachments; and the plans.
(e) If any provision of this Contract shall be held invalid by any court of competent jurisdiction, such
holding shall not invalidate any other provision.
(f) All correspondence, invoices, memoranda, submittals and other documents related to this Project
whether generated by the Owner, the A/E, the Contractor or others should be identified at the
-7County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
beginning of the document with the Project Title shown in the Contract. Additional identification
such as a job number, purchase order number or such may also be shown at the generator’s option.
3.
LAWS AND REGULATIONS
(a) The Contractor shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any
public authority bearing on the performance of the Work and shall give all notices required
thereby. The Contractor shall assure that all Subcontractors and tradesmen who perform Work on
the project are properly licensed by the Department of Professional and Occupational Regulation
as required by Title 54.1, Chapter 11, Articles 1 and 3, Code of Virginia, and by applicable
regulations.
(b) This Contract and all other contracts and subcontracts are subject to the provisions of Articles 3 and
5, Chapter 4, Title 40.1, Code of Virginia, relating to labor unions and the “right to work.” The
Contractor and its Subcontractors, whether residents or nonresidents of the Commonwealth, who
perform any Work related to the Project shall comply with all of the said provisions.
(c) IMMIGRATION REFORM AND CONTROL ACT OF 1986: By signing this Contract, the
Contractor certifies that it does not and will not during the performance of this Contract violate the
provisions of the Federal Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986, which prohibits
employment of illegal aliens.
(d) The provisions of all rules and regulations governing safety as adopted by the
Commission of the Commonwealth of Virginia and as issued by the Department
Industry under Title 40.1 of the Code of Virginia shall apply to all Work under
Inspectors from the Department of Labor and Industry shall be granted access to
inspection without first obtaining a search or administrative warrant.
Safety Codes
of Labor and
this Contract.
the Work for
(e) Building Permit: The Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code applies to the Work and is
administered by the local Building Official. The Building Permit will be obtained by the Contractor
and paid for by the Owner. All other permits, local license fees, business fees, taxes, or similar
assessments shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. See Section 25 for utility connection
fees and services.
(f) The Contractor shall include in each of its subcontracts a provision requiring each Subcontractor to
include or otherwise be subject to the same payment and interest requirements in Subsections (a),
(b), and (c) of Section 37 of these General Conditions with respect to each lower-tier Subcontractor
and Supplier.
(g) The Contractor, if not licensed as an asbestos abatement contractor in accordance with §54.1-514,
Code of Virginia, shall have all asbestos-related Work performed by subcontractors who are duly
licensed as asbestos contractors for the Work required.
(h) Lead-Based Paint Activities: If the Contract Documents indicate that lead-based paint is present on
existing materials, components, or surfaces, the Contractor shall conform to the following:
-8County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(1) The requirements set forth in 59 Federal Register 45,872 (September 2, 1994) Proposed Rule Lead; Requirements for Lead-based Paint Activities (Proposed Rules) in selecting and
performing the means, methods and procedures for performing the Work. This includes, but is
not limited to, training of personnel, lead abatement, encapsulation of lead containing
materials, removal and handling of lead containing materials, and methods of disposal. When
the Final Rule, to be codified at 40 CFR 745, supersedes the Proposed Rule, the Contractor
shall be responsible for conforming to the Final Rule, as of tile effective date set forth therein.
(2) The requirements for employee protection contained in 29 CFR Part 1926, Subpart D, and the
requirements for record-keeping contained in 29 CFR Part 1910.
(3) The Virginia Department of Labor and Industry’s (DLI) Emergency Regulation published in
the May 27, 1996 Virginia Register, requiring, among other things, that a permit be issued to
the lead abatement contractor, or any subsequent regulation issued by DLI.
(i) If the Contractor violates laws or regulations that govern the Project, the Contractor shall indemnify
and hold the Owner harmless against any fines and/or penalties that result from such violation. To
the extent that such violation is the result of negligence or other actionable conduct of the
Contractor, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless against any third party
claims, suits, awards, actions, causes of action or judgments, including but not limited to attorney’s
fees and costs incurred thereunder, that result from such violation.
4. NONDISCRIMINATION
(a) §2.2-4311 of the Code of Virginia shall be applicable. It provides as follows:
“1.
During the performance of this Contract the Contractor agrees as follows:
(a)
The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for
employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age, disability, or
other basis prohibited by state law relating to discrimination in employment, except
where there is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the
normal operation of the Contractor. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous
places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth
the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.
(b)
The Contractor, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on
behalf of the Contractor, will state that such Contractor is an equal opportunity
employer.
(c)
Notices, advertisements and solicitations placed in accordance with federal law, rule
or regulation shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of meeting the requirements
of this section.
-9County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
2.
The Contractor will include the provisions of the foregoing paragraphs (a), (b) and c) in
every subcontract or purchase order of over ten thousand dollars ($10,000), so that the
provisions will be binding upon each Subcontractor or vendor.”
(b) Where applicable, the Virginians with Disabilities Act and the federal Americans with Disabilities
Act shall apply to the Contractor and all Subcontractors.
5.
PROHIBITION OF ALCOHOL AND OTHER DRUGS
(a) §2.2-4312 of the Code of Virginia shall be applicable. It provides as follows:
“During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees to (i) provide a drug-free
workplace for the contractor’s employees; (ii) post in conspicuous places, available to employees
and applicants for employment, a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture,
sale, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of a controlled substance or marijuana is
prohibited in the contractor’s workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against
employees for violations of such prohibition; (iii) state in all solicitations or advertisements for
employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor that the contractor maintains a drug-free
workplace; and (iv) include the provisions of the foregoing clauses in every subcontract or
purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or
vendor. For the purposes of this section, “drug-free workplace” means a site for the performance
of work done in connection with a specific contract awarded to a contractor in accordance with
this chapter, the employees of whom are prohibited from engaging in the unlawful manufacture,
sale, distribution, dispensation, possession or use of any controlled substance or marijuana during
the performance of the contract.”
(b) The Contractor shall also establish, maintain and enforce policies which prohibit the following acts
by all Contractor, Subcontractor and Supplier personnel at the Site:
(1) the manufacture, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of alcohol or other drugs,
except possession and medically prescribed use of prescription drugs; and
(2) the impairment of judgment or physical abilities due to the use of alcohol or other drugs,
including impairment from prescription drugs.
6.
TIME FOR COMPLETION
(a) The Time for Completion shall be designated by the Owner on the Invitation for Bids or other
prebid documents. In some instances, the Time for Completion may be stated on the Invitation for
Bids or other prebid document in the form of a Contract Completion Date. The Work must be
substantially completed by the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. Unless
otherwise specified, the Contractor shall achieve Final Completion within thirty (30) days after the
date of Substantial Completion.
(b) The Time for Completion shall be stated in the Contract Between Owner and Contractor and shall
become a binding part of the Contract upon which the Owner may rely in planning the use of
-10County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
thefacilities to be constructed and for all other purposes. If the Contractor fails to substantially
complete the Work within the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, as set forth in the
Contract, he shall be subject to payment of actual damages incurred by the Owner or liquidated
damages, if provided for in the Contract.
(c) The Contractor, in submitting his bid, acknowledges that he has taken into consideration normal
weather conditions. The listing below defines the monthly anticipated days of adverse weather for
each month and is based upon NOAA climatological data for Charlottesville, Virginia, last revised
January 1995. Adverse weather days shall be days of actual precipitation of 0.10 inch or greater.
Jan Feb Mar Apr May June July Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
6
6
7
6
8
6
8
8
6
5
5
6
The anticipated days provided above will constitute the base line for adverse weather time
evaluations. Throughout the portion of the contract from the date of Notice to Proceed until the
building is “dried in”, actual adverse weather days are to be recorded by the Contractor and verified
by the Architect each month. In addition to the anticipated days of adverse weather noted above, the
Contractor must anticipate one day of adverse weather impact (snow, ice, mud) for each day of
actual adverse weather during the months of January, February, March, and December.
The building shall be considered “dried in” when the exterior block walls or stud and sheathing
walls are in place, and a temporary (or permanent) roof is in place.
The total anticipated adverse weather days for the project shall be the sum of all the monthly days
for each month from the date of Notice to Proceed until the date the building is to be “dried in”,
according to the Contractor’s schedule.
If the total number of actual adverse weather days plus adverse weather impact days exceeds the
anticipated adverse weather days determined above, the excess days may be used as a basis to
determine whether a Contractor is entitled to a time extension. The adverse weather must have
prevented work for 50 percent (50%) or more of the Contractor’s work day and delayed work
critical to the timely completion of the project.
The Contractor’s schedule must indicate the critical (path) work and must reflect the above
anticipated adverse weather days for all weather dependent activities.
(1) The extension requested must be supported by a delay in completion of the entire Project
shown on the critical path of the accepted CPM Schedule or the approved bar graph schedule
required for the Project. Extensions will be granted only for delays in completion of the
Project, not for that portion of any delay which consumes only “float” time.
(2) A request for extension of time based on abnormal weather must be made in writing within
five (5) calendar days of the completion of the calendar month during which abnormal
weather is claimed at the Site.
(3) All of the evidence and data supporting the request (including both historical data and the
recordings at the Site during the time of delay) must be furnished to the Owner before any
-11County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
consideration will be given to the request. That supporting data shall be submitted by the end
of the calendar month following the month for which the request is made.
(d) The Contractor represents and agrees that he has taken into account in his bid the requirements of the
bid documents, local conditions, availability of materials, equipment, and labor, and any other factors
which may affect the performance of the Work. The Contractor agrees and warrants that he will
achieve Substantial Completion of the Work to allow the Owner to have Beneficial Occupancy not
later than the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date. The Contractor agrees and warrants
that he will achieve Final Completion of the Work (the entire completion of all Work, including
“punch list” items), not later than thirty (30) days after achieving Substantial Completion.
7.
CONDITIONS AT SITE
(a) The Contractor is totally responsible for having ascertained pertinent local conditions such as
location, accessibility and general character of the Site, and the character and extent of existing
improvements and work within or adjacent to the Site.
(b) If, in the performance of the Contract, hidden physical conditions of a building being modified are
exposed revealing unusual or materially different conditions from those ordinarily encountered or
inherent in work of this nature, or if subsurface or latent conditions at the Site are found which are
materially different from those frequently present in the locality or from those indicated in the
Contract Documents, the Contractor must report such conditions to the Owner and to the
Architect/Engineer before the conditions are disturbed. Upon such notice, or upon his own
observation of such conditions, the Architect/Engineer shall promptly propose such changes in the
Contract Documents as he finds necessary to conform to the different conditions. Any change in
the cost of the Work or additional time needed for completion must be requested pursuant to
Sections 38 and/or 42 of these General Conditions.
(c) If the Contractor, during the course of the Work, observes the existence of any material which he
knows, should know, or has reason to believe is hazardous to human health, the Contractor shall
promptly notify the Owner. The Owner will provide the Contractor with instructions regarding the
disposition of the material. The Contractor shall not perform any Work involving the material or
any Work causing the material to be less accessible prior to receipt of special instructions from the
Owner.
8.
CONTRACT SECURITY
(a) For Contracts with a value exceeding one hundred thousand dollars ($100,000), the Contractor shall
deliver to the Owner or its designated representative, a Standard Performance Bond and a Standard
Labor and Material Payment Bond, each fully executed by the Contractor and one or more surety
companies legally licensed to do business in Virginia and each in an amount equal to one hundred
percent (100%) of the accepted bid. If more than one Surety executes a bond, each shall be jointly
and severally liable to the Owner for the entire amount of the bond. Sureties shall
-12County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
be selected by the Contractor, subject to approval by the Owner. No payment on the Contract shall
be due and payable to the Contractor until the bonds have been approved by the Owner.
(b) For the purposes of all Standard Labor and Material Payment Bonds entered into, the term
“subcontractors” as used in §2.2-4337(A.2) of the Code of Virginia is interpreted to mean any
contractors who participated in the prosecution of the Work undertaken by the Contractor (referred
to in §2.2-4337(A.2) of the Code of Virginia as the “prime contractor”), whether such contractor
had a direct contract with the Contractor (prime contractor) or whether there were one or more
other intervening Subcontractors contractually positioned between it and the Contractor (prime
contractor).
(c) See §2.2-4338 of the Code of Virginia, for alternative forms of security for payment and/or
performance bonds.
(d) For contracts with a value of less than one hundred thousand dollars ($100,000), the Contractor
will not be required to provide a Standard Performance Bond and a Standard Labor and Material
Payment Bond as described above unless the Invitation for Bid states that such bonds will be
required.
9. S UB CO NT RACTS
(a) The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the signing of the Contract, notify the Owner and
Architect/Engineer in writing of the names of all Subcontractors proposed for the principal parts of
the Work and of such others as the Architect/Engineer may direct. Where the specifications
establish qualifications or criteria for Subcontractors, manufacturers, or individuals performing
Work on the Project, the Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining that those proposed meet
the criteria or qualifications. The Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor that the Owner
may, within a reasonable time, object to as unsuitable. Neither the Owner nor the
Architect/Engineer shall direct the Contractor to contract with any particular Subcontractor unless
provided in the specifications or Invitation for Bids.
(b) The Owner may select a particular Subcontractor for a certain part of the Work and designate on the
Invitation for Bids that the Subcontractor shall be used for the part of the Work indicated and that
the Subcontractor has agreed to perform the Work for the subcontract amount stipulated on the bid
form. The Contractor shall include the stipulated amount plus his Contractor markups in the bid. In
such case, the Contractor shall be responsible for that Subcontractor and its work and the
Subcontractor shall be responsible to the Contractor for its work just as if the Contractor had
selected the Subcontractor.
(c) The Owner shall, on request, furnish to any Subcontractor, if practicable, the amounts of payments
made to the Contractor, the Schedule of Values and Requests for Payment submitted by the
Contractor and any other documentation submitted by the Contractor which would tend to show
what amounts are due and payable by the Contractor to the Subcontractor.
-13County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(d) The Contractor shall be fully responsible to the Owner for all acts and omissions of his agents and
employees and all succeeding tiers of Subcontractors and Suppliers performing or furnishing any of
the Work. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between
Owner or Architect/Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization,
nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Architect/Engineer to pay for or to see to
the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization,
except as may otherwise be required by law.
(e) The Contractor shall be fully responsible for his invitees at the Site and for those of his
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and their employees, including any acts or omissions of such invitee.
(f) The Contractor agrees that he alone is responsible for all dealings with his Subcontractors and
Suppliers, and their subcontractors, employees and invitee, including, but not limited to, the
Subcontractors’ or Suppliers’ claims, demands, actions, disputes and similar matters unless
specifically provided otherwise by the Contract or by statute.
10.
SEPARATE CONTRACTS
(a) The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with the Project, the Work under
which may proceed simultaneously with the execution of this Contract. The Contractor shall afford
other separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials
and the execution of their work. The Contractor shall cooperate with them and shall take all
reasonable action to coordinate his Work with theirs. If the Owner has listed other separate contracts
in the Invitation for Bids which it expects to proceed simultaneously with the Work of the
Contractor, and has included the estimated timing of such other Contracts in the Invitation for Bids,
the Contractor shall integrate the schedule of those separate contracts into his scheduling. The
Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to assist the Owner in maintaining the schedule for all
separate contracts. If the work performed by the separate contractor is defective or performed so as
to prevent or threaten to prevent the Contractor from carrying out his Work according to the
Contract, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer upon
discovering such conditions.
(b) If a dispute arises between the Contractor and any separate contractor(s) as to their responsibility
for cleaning up as required by Sections 31(c) and 31(d) of these General Conditions, the Owner
may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the respective contractors in proportion to their
responsibility. If a Contractor disputes the Owner’s apportionment of clean-up costs, it shall be that
contractor’s burden to demonstrate and prove the correct apportionment.
11.
CONTRACTOR’S AND SUBCONTRACTOR’S INSURANCE
(a) Prior to execution of the Contract by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide written evidence
(certificates of insurance) that he has obtained all the insurance required hereunder from an insurer
authorized to do business in Virginia and such insurance has been approved by the Owner.
Insurance providers must have an agent located in Virginia. The Contractor shall not allow any
-14County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
Subcontractor to commence Work on his subcontract until the same types of insurance in an
appropriate amount have been obtained by the Subcontractor and approved by the Contractor.
Approval of insurance by the Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of the Contractor
hereunder. In the event of cancellation of this insurance, not less than thirty (30) days prior written
notice must be sent to the Owner.
(b) The Contractor shall take out and shall maintain at all times during the performance of the Work
Workers’ Compensation and Employers’ Liability Insurance for all of his employees engaged in
the Work in an amount not less than the minimum required by §2.2-4332 and §65.2-100 et seq. of
the Code of Virginia, and, in case any of the Work is sublet, the Contractor shall require each
Subcontractor similarly to provide Workers’ Compensation and Employers’ Liability Insurance for
all of the latter’s employees to be engaged in the Work.
(c) During the performance of the Work under this Contract, the Contractor shall maintain commercial
general liability insurance to include Premises / Operations Liability, Products and Completed
Operations Coverage, Independent Contractor’s Liability, Owner’s and Contractor’s Protective
Liability, and Personal Injury Liability, which shall insure him against claims of personal injury,
including death, as well as against claims for property damage, which may arise from operations
under this Contract whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor, or by anyone
directly or indirectly employed by either of them. The amounts of general liability insurance shall
be not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate combined limit for projects
with a construction cost of $200,000 or greater. The amounts of general liability insurance shall be
not less than $250,000 per occurrence and $1,000,000 aggregate combined limit for projects with a
construction cost of less than $200,000. The Owner, its officers, employees and agents, shall be
named as an additional insured with respect to the Work being procured. The Supplemental
General Conditions may require the Contractor to provide an Umbrella insurance policy in a
specified amount for the Project.
(d) During the performance of the Work under this Contract, the Contractor shall maintain automobile
liability insurance which shall insure him against claims of personal injury, including death, as well
as against claims for property damage, which may arise from operations under this Contract,
whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly
employed by either of them. The amounts of automobile insurance shall be not less than
$1,000,000 combined limit for bodily injury and property damage per occurrence.
(e) The Asbestos Contractor or Subcontractor, as the case may be, shall provide occurrence-based
liability insurance with asbestos coverages in an amount not less than $1,000,000 and shall name
the following as additional insured: The Owner, its officers, its employees and its agents; the
Architect/Engineer (if not the Asbestos Project Designer); and the Contractor (where the asbestos
work is being performed by the Asbestos Subcontractor).
12.
“ALL RISK” BUILDER’S RISK INSURANCE
(a) The Contractor, at his cost, shall obtain and maintain in the names of the Owner and the Contractor
“all-risk” builder’s risk insurance (or fire, extended coverage, vandalism and malicious mischief
-15County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
insurance, if approved by the Owner) upon the entire structure or structures on which the Work of
this Contract is to be done, and upon all material in or adjacent thereto which is intended for use
thereon, to one hundred percent (100%) of the insurable value thereof. Such insurance may include
a deductible provision if the Owner so provides in the Supplemental General Conditions, in which
case the Contractor will be liable for such deductions, whenever a claim arises. The loss, if any, is
to be made adjustable with and payable to the Owner, in accordance with its interests, as they may
appear. The Owner, its officers, employees and its agents, shall be named as an additional insured
in any policy of insurance issued. Written evidence of the insurance shall be filed with the Owner
prior to execution of the Contract by the Owner. Insurance providers must be authorized to do
business in Virginia and have an agent located in Virginia. In the event of cancellation of this
insurance, not less than thirty (30) days prior written notice must be sent to the Owner. A copy of
the policy of insurance shall be given to the Owner upon demand.
(b) The value of the builder’s risk insurance shall exclude the costs of excavations, backfills,
foundations, underground utilities and Site work.
(c) Certain projects, such as renovations and interior modifications of existing buildings, may be
covered by the Owner’s insurance and may not require the “all risk” insurance required by this
section. In those instances, the Supplemental General Conditions for the project shall expressly
exclude the project from the requirements of Subsection 12(a).
(d) Any insurance provided through the County of Albemarle, Virginia, for construction, additions or
renovations will not extend to Contractor’s nor Subcontractors’ buildings, equipment, materials,
tools or supplies unless these items are to become property of the Owner upon completion of the
Project and the Owner has assumed responsibility for such items at the time of the loss.
13.
TAXES, FEES AND ASSESSMENTS
The Contractor shall, without additional expense to the Owner, pay all applicable federal, state, and
local taxes, fees, and assessments except the taxes, fees and assessments on the real property comprising
the Site of the project. The Owner shall pay inspection fees to the local building official except for
reinspection fees resulting from incomplete or defective work.
14.
PATENTS
The Contractor shall obtain all licenses necessary to use any invention, article, appliance, process or
technique of whatever kind and shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall hold the
Owner, its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any loss or liability for or on account of the
infringement of any patent rights in connection with any invention, process, technique, article or
appliance manufactured or used in the performance of the Contract, including its use by the Owner,
unless such invention, process, technique, article or appliance is specifically named in the specifications
or plans as acceptable for use in carrying out the Work. If, before using any invention, process, technique,
article or appliance specifically named in the specifications or plans as acceptable for use in carrying out
the Work, the Contractor has or acquires information that the same is covered by letters of
-16County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
patent making it necessary to secure the permission of the patentee, or other, for the use of the same, he
shall promptly advise the Owner and the Architect/Engineer. The Owner may direct that some other
invention, process, technique, article or appliance be used. Should the Contractor have reason to believe
that the invention, process, technique, article or appliance so specified is an infringement of a patent,
and fail to inform the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, he shall be responsible for any loss or liability
due to the infringement.
15.
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER’S STATUS
(a) The Architect/Engineer shall have authority to endeavor to secure the faithful performance by
Owner and Contractor of the Work under the Contract. He shall review the Contractor’s
Submittals for conformance to the requirements of the Contract Documents and return copies to
the Contractor with appropriate notations. He shall interpret the requirements of the plans and
specifications and issue Field Orders to the Contractor as may be required. He shall recommend to
the Owner suspension of the Work (in whole or in part) whenever such suspension may be
necessary to ensure the proper execution of the Contract. He shall have authority to reject, in
writing, Work, including material, installation or workmanship, which does not conform to the
requirements of the plans and specifications. He shall determine the progress and quality of the
Work, subject to the right of the Owner to make an overriding decision to the contrary. Upon
request by the Contractor, the Architect/Engineer shall confirm, in writing within ten (10) days,
any oral order or determination made by him.
(b) The Architect/Engineer shall have no authority to approve or order changes in the Work which
alter the design concept or which call for an extension of time or a change in the Contract Price.
(c) The Owner shall have the right, but not the duty, to countermand any decision of the
Architect/Engineer and to follow or reject the advice of the Architect/Engineer, including but not
limited to acceptance of the Work.
(d) All orders from the Owner to the Contractor shall either be transmitted through the
Architect/Engineer or communicated directly to the Contractor and the Architect/Engineer by the
Owner.
(e) Should the Owner choose to employ another or different Architect/Engineer, the status of the
Architect/Engineer so employed shall be the same as that of the former Architect/Engineer.
(f) The Architect/Engineer will provide to the Owner and the Contractor after each visit to the Site, a
written report indicating the date, time of day, weather conditions and the names of the persons
representing the Architect/Engineer who participated in the visit. The report will advise the Owner
of any problems that were noted and shall compare the Architect/Engineer’s observations of the
actual progress of the Work with that reported by the Contractor. On the basis of his on-Site
observations as Architect/Engineer, he will make every reasonable effort to guard the Owner
against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the Contractor. He shall have the authority to
inspect the Work, to note and report Defective Work and deviations from the Contract Documents
-17County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
to the Owner, to reject same, and to recommend to the Owner the suspension of the Work when
necessary to prevent Defective Work from proceeding or being covered.
(g) The Architect/Engineer shall not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures (other than those expressly specified in Contract Documents), or for safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work, and he shall not be responsible for the
Contractor’s failure to carry out the Contractor’s own responsibilities.
(h) The provisions of this section are included as information only to describe the relationship between
the Owner, A/E, and Contractor. No failure of the A/E to act in accordance with this section shall
relieve the Contractor from his obligations under the Contract or create any rights in favor of the
Contractor.
16. INS PECTIO N
(a) All material and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination and testing by the
Owner, the Architect/Engineer, the Project Inspector, authorized inspectors and authorized
independent testing entities at any and all times during manufacture and/or construction. The
Architect/Engineer and the Owner shall have authority to reject defective material and
workmanship and require its correction. Rejected workmanship shall be satisfactorily corrected
and rejected material shall be satisfactorily replaced with proper material without charge therefor,
and the Contractor shall promptly segregate and remove the rejected material from the Site. If the
Contractor fails to proceed at once with replacement of rejected material and/or the correction of
defective workmanship, the Owner may, by contract or otherwise, replace such material and/or
correct such workmanship and charge the cost to the Contractor, or may terminate the right of the
Contractor to proceed as provided in Section 40 of these General Conditions, the Contractor and
surety being liable for any damage to the same extent as provided in Section 40 for termination
thereunder.
(b) Site inspections, tests conducted on Site or tests of materials gathered on Site, which the Contract
requires to be performed by independent testing entities, shall be contracted and paid for by the
Owner. Examples of such tests are the testing of cast-in-place concrete, foundation materials, soil
compaction, pile installations, caisson bearings and steel framing connections. The Contractor
shall promptly furnish, without additional charge, all reasonable facilities, labor and materials
necessary and convenient for making such tests. Except as provided in (d) below, whenever such
examination and testing finds defective materials, equipment or workmanship, the Contractor
shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of reexamination and retesting. Although conducted by
independent testing entities, the Owner will not contract and pay for tests or certifications of
materials, manufactured products or assemblies which the Contract, codes, standards, etc.,
require to be tested and/or certified for compliance with industry standards such as Underwriters
Laboratories, Factory Mutual or ASTM. If fees are charged for such tests and certifications, they
shall be paid by the Contractor. The Contractor shall also pay for all inspections, tests, and
certifications which the Contract specifically requires him to perform or to pay, together with any
inspections and tests which he chooses to perform for his own purposes, but are not required by
the Contract.
-18County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(c) Where Work is related to or dependent on the Defective Work, the Contractor shall stop such
related or dependent Work until the Defective Work or deficiency is corrected or an alternative
solution is presented that is satisfactory to the Owner. Where Work is rejected because of defective
material or workmanship, the Contractor shall stop like Work in other areas or locations on the
Project until the matter is resolved and the Owner has approved corrective measures.
(d) Should it be considered necessary or advisable by Owner or the Architect/Engineer at any time
before final acceptance of the entire Work to make an examination of any part of the Work already
completed, by removing or tearing out portions of the Work, the Contractor shall on request
promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor and material to expose the Work to be tested to the
extent required. If such Work is found to be defective in any respect, due to the fault of the
Contractor or his Subcontractors, the Contractor shall defray all the expenses of uncovering the
Work, of examination and testing, and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such Work is
found to meet the requirements of the Contract, the actual cost of the Contractor’s labor and
material necessarily involved in uncovering the Work, the cost of examination and testing, and
Contractor’s cost of material and labor necessary for replacement including a markup of fifteen
percent (15%) for overhead and profit shall be paid to the Contractor and he shall, in addition, if
completion of the Work has been delayed thereby, be granted a suitable extension of time.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs and expenses in
removing and replacing the Work if the Contractor had covered the Work prior to any inspection or
test contrary to the instructions of the A/E, Owner or Project Inspector.
(e) The Project Inspector has the right and the authority to:
(1) Inspect all construction materials, equipment, and supplies for quality and for compliance
with the Contract Documents and/or approved shop drawings and Submittals;
(2) Inspect workmanship for compliance with the standards described in the Contract
Documents;
(3) Observe and report on all tests and inspections performed by the Contractor;
(4) Recommend rejection of Work which does not conform to requirements of the Contract
Documents;
(5) Keep a record of construction activities, tests, inspections, and reports;
(6) Attend all joint Site construction meetings and inspections held by the Owner and/or the A/E
with the Contractor;
(7) Check materials and equipment, together with documentation related thereto, delivered for
conformance with approved Submittals and the Contract;
(8) Check installations for proper workmanship and conformance with shop drawing and
installation instructions;
-19County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(9) Assist in the review and verification of the Schedule of Values & Certificate for Payment,
submitted by the Contractor each month;
(10)
Do all things for or on behalf of the Owner as the Owner may subsequently direct in
writing.
(f) The Project Inspector has no authority to:
(1) Authorize deviations from the Contract Documents;
(2) Enter into the area of responsibility of the Contractor’s superintendent;
(3) Issue directions relative to any aspect of construction means, methods, techniques, sequences
or procedures, or in regard to safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work;
(4) Authorize or suggest that the Owner occupy the Project, in whole or in part; or
(5) Issue a certificate for payment.
(g) The duties of the Project Inspector are for the benefit of the Owner only and not for the Contractor.
The Contractor may not rely upon any act, statement, or failure to act on the part of the Project
Inspector, nor shall the failure of the Project Inspector to properly perform his duties in any way
excuse Defective Work or otherwise improper performance of the Contract by the Contractor.
17.
SUPERINTENDENCE BY CONTRACTOR
(a) The Contractor shall have a competent foreman or superintendent, satisfactory to the
Architect/Engineer and the Owner, on the Site at all times during the progress of the Work. The
superintendent or foreman shall be familiar with and be able to read and understand the plans and
specifications, and be capable of communicating orally and in writing with the Owner’s inspectors
and the Contractor’s workers. The Contractor shall be responsible for all construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, for coordinating all portions of the Work under the
Contract except where otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, and for all safety and worker
health programs and practices. The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing, of any proposed
change in superintendent, including the reason therefor, prior to making such change.
(b) The Contractor shall, at all times, enforce strict discipline and good order among the workers on
the Project, and shall not employ on the Work, or contract with, any unfit person, anyone not
skilled in the Work assigned to him, or anyone who will not work in harmony with those employed
by the Contractor, the Subcontractors, the Owner or the Owner’s separate contractors and their
subcontractors.
(c) The Owner may, in writing, require the Contractor to remove from the Site any employee or
Subcontractor’s employee the Owner deems to be incompetent, careless, not working in harmony
with others on the Site, or otherwise objectionable, but the Owner shall have no obligation to do so.
-20County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
18.
CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION, METHODS AND PROCEDURES
(a) The Contractor shall be solely responsible for supervising and directing the Work competently and
efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be
necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall be solely
responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and for
coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, except where otherwise specified in the
Contract Documents. However, the Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others
in the design or selection of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction which is indicated in and required by the Contract. The Contractor is solely
responsible to the Owner that the finished Work complies with the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for health and safety precautions and programs for
workers and others in connection with the Work. No inspection by, knowledge on the part of, or
acquiescence by the Architect or Engineer, the Project Inspector, the Owner, the Owner’s
employees and agents, or any other entity whatever shall relieve the Contractor from its sole
responsibility for compliance with the requirements of the Contract or its sole responsibility for
health and safety programs and precautions.
(b) If a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is indicated in or
required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means,
method, sequence, technique or procedure of construction acceptable to Architect/Engineer, subject
to the Owner’s right to disapprove. The Contractor must submit its written request for the
substitution to the Architect/Engineer with sufficient information to allow the Architect/Engineer to
determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that indicated or required by the Contract.
(c) The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identification of any drawings shall not
control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the
Work to be performed by any specific trade.
19.
SCHEDULE OF THE WORK
(a) General: The Contractor is responsible for the scheduling and sequencing of the Work, for
coordinating the Work, for monitoring the progress of the Work, and for taking appropriate action
to keep the Work on schedule. The Contractor may attempt to achieve Substantial Completion on
or before the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date established by the Contract
and receive payment in accordance with Section 36 for the Work completed each period. However,
the date established by the Contract Documents as the deadline for achieving Substantial
Completion must be used in all schedules as the date on which Substantial Completion will be
achieved. The time (in days) between the Contractor’s planned early completion and the contracted
Time for Completion is part of the Project “Total Float” time and will be used as such. Extensions
of time pursuant to Sections 38 and 42, damages for delay, and all other matters between the
Owner and the Contractor will be determined using the contractually required Substantial
Completion date, not an early Substantial Completion date planned by the Contractor.
-21County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
Within two (2) weeks after the Contractor signs the Contract Between Owner and Contractor, unless
otherwise extended by the Owner at the time of the signing, the Contractor shall prepare and submit
to the Owner, with a copy to the Architect/Engineer, a preliminary bar graph schedule for
accomplishing the Work based upon the Time for Completion stated in the Contract. The
preliminary bar graph schedule shall be in sufficient detail to show the sequencing of the various
trades for each floor level, wing or work area. The Owner will notify the Contractor of its
acceptance of or objections to the preliminary schedule within fifteen (15) days of receipt by the
Owner. A fully complete Project schedule for accomplishing the Work must be submitted in like
manner no later than sixty (60) days after the Contract is signed by the Owner.
The Owner’s failure to reject or its acceptance of any schedule, graph, chart, recovery schedule,
updated schedule, plan of action, etc. shall not constitute a representation or warranty by the Owner,
including but not limited to a representation or warranty that the schedule is feasible or practical nor
shall any such acceptance or failure to reject relieve the Contractor from sole responsibility for
completing the Work within the time allowed.
No progress payments will be payable to the Contractor until after it has submitted a preliminary
schedule which is acceptable to the Owner. Neither the second progress payment nor any
subsequent payment shall be payable to the Contractor until it has submitted a fully complete
Project schedule accepted by the Owner. Nor shall subsequent progress payments be payable to the
Contractor unless and until he maintains the monthly bar graphs or status reports required by
Section 19(d) herein or unless and until he provides any recovery schedule pursuant to Section
19(e) herein.
Failure to provide a satisfactory preliminary or fully complete Project schedule within the time
limits stated above shall be a breach of contract for which the Owner may terminate the Contract in
the manner provided in Section 40 of these General Conditions.
The fully complete Project schedule for accomplishing the Work shall be of the type set forth in
subparagraph (1) or (2) below, as appropriate:
(1) For Contracts with a price of $10,000,000 or less, a bar graph schedule will satisfy the above
requirement. The schedule shall indicate the estimated starting and completion dates for each
major element of the work. See (b) below.
(2) For Contracts with a price over $10,000,000, a Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule shall
be utilized to control the planning and scheduling of the Work. The CPM schedule shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be paid for by the Contractor. See (c) below.
(b) Bar Graph Schedule: Where a bar graph schedule is required, it shall be time-scaled in weekly
increments, shall indicate the estimated starting and completion dates for each major element of the
Work by trade and by area, level, or zone, and shall schedule dates for all salient features, including
but not limited to the placing of orders for materials, submission of shop drawings and other
Submittals for approval, approval of shop drawings by Architect/Engineer, the manufacture and
delivery of material, the testing and the installation of materials, supplies and equipment, and all
Work activities to be performed by the Contractor.
-22County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
The Contractor shall allow sufficient time in his schedule for adverse weather anticipated in
Section 6 and for the A/E to conduct whatever associated reviews or inspections as may be
required under the A/E’s contract with the Owner. If the A/E and the Contractor are unable to agree
as to what constitutes sufficient time, the Owner shall determine the appropriate duration for such
Architect/Engineer activities. Each Work activity will be assigned a time estimate by the
Contractor. One day shall be the smallest time unit used.
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to submit a schedule that shows Substantial Completion of the
Work by the Contract Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date and any interim
deadlines established by the Contract.
(c) CPM Schedule: Where a CPM schedule is required, it shall be in the time-scaled precedence format
using the Contractor’s logic and time estimates. The CPM schedule shall be drawn or plotted with
activities grouped or zoned by Work area or subcontract as opposed to a random (or scattered)
format.
The CPM schedule shall be time-scaled on a weekly basis and shall be drawn or plotted at a level
of detail and logic which will schedule all salient features of the Work, including not only the
actual construction Work for each trade, but also the submission of shop drawings and other
Submittals for approval, approval of shop drawings by Architect/Engineer, placing of orders for
materials, the manufacture and delivery of materials, the testing and installation of materials and
equipment, and all Work activities to be performed by the Contractor. Failure to include any
element of Work required for the performance of this Contract shall not excuse the Contractor from
completing all Work required within the Time for Completion, Contract Completion Date and any
interim deadlines established by the Contract.
The Contractor shall allow sufficient time in his schedule for adverse weather anticipated in
Section 6 and for the A/E to conduct whatever associated reviews or inspections as may be
required under the A/E’s contract with the Owner. If the A/E and the Contractor are unable to agree
as to what constitutes sufficient time, the Owner shall determine the appropriate duration for such
Architect/Engineer activities. Each Work activity will be assigned a time estimate by the
Contractor. One day shall be the smallest time unit used.
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to submit a schedule that shows Substantial Completion of the
Work by the Contract Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date and any interim
deadlines established by the Contract.
When completed, the CPM schedule shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner for
review. The CPM schedule will identify and describe each activity, state the duration of each
activity, the calendar dates for the early and late start and the early and late finish of each activity,
and clearly highlight all activities on the critical path. “Total float” and “free float” shall be indicated
for all activities. Float time, whether “free float” or “total float” as defined in Section 1, shall not be
considered for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Owner or the Contractor, but must be
allocated in the best interest of completing the Work within the Time for Completion or the Contract
Completion Date. Extensions to the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date, when
granted by Change Order, will be granted only when equitable time adjustment exceeds the Total
Float in the activity or path of activities affected by the change. The CPM schedule shall
-23County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
also show what part of the Contract Price (expressed in U.S. dollars) is attributable to each activity
on the schedule, the sum of which for all activities shall equal the total Contract Price. The CPM
schedule shall also show the planned workforce (crew size and number of crews) and the major
pieces of equipment required for each activity on the schedule. When acceptable to the Owner and
Architect/Engineer as to compliance with the requirements of this Section, but not as to logic, the
schedule shall become the CPM schedule for the Project. Acceptance of the schedule by the Owner
does not indicate agreement with nor responsibility for the proposed or actual duration of any
activity shown on the accepted schedule.
(d) Monthly Project Reports: The Contractor shall review progress not less than each month, but as
often as necessary to properly manage the Project and stay on schedule. The Contractor shall
collect and preserve information on Change Orders, including extensions of time. The Contractor
shall evaluate this information and update the latest accepted schedule as often as necessary to
finish within the Contract Time for Completion or before the Contract Completion Date. The
Contractor shall submit to the A/E along with his monthly request for payment a copy of the bar
graph schedule annotated to show the current progress. For projects requiring a CPM schedule,
the Contractor shall submit a monthly report of the status of all activities. The bar graph schedule
or monthly status report submitted with each periodic request for payment shall show the Work
completed to date in comparison with the Work scheduled for completion, including but not
limited to the dates for the beginning and completion of the placing of orders; the manufacture,
testing and installation of materials, supplies and equipment. The form shall be approved by the
A/E and the Owner; however, a bar graph or a CPM schedule marked, colored or annotated to
reflect the above will usually satisfy this requirement. If any elements of the Work are behind
schedule, regardless of whether they may prevent the Work from being completed on time, the
Contractor must indicate in writing in the report what measures he is taking and plans to take to
bring each such element back on schedule and to ensure that the Time for Completion or Contract
Completion Date is not exceeded.
(e) Progress Delay: Should any of the following conditions exist, the Owner may require the
Contractor to prepare, at no extra cost to the Owner, a plan of action and a recovery schedule for
completing the Work by the Contract Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date:
(1) The Contractor’ monthly progress report indicates delays that are, in the opinion of the A/E
or the Owner, of sufficient magnitude that the Contractor’s ability to complete the Work by
the scheduled Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date is brought into
question;
(2) The CPM schedule sorted by early finish shows the Contractor to be thirty (30) or more days
behind the critical path schedule at any time during construction up to thirty (30) days prior
to scheduled Substantial Completion date;
(3) The Contractor desires to make changes in the logic (sequencing of Work) or the planned
duration of future activities of the CPM schedule which, in the opinion of the
Architect/Engineer or the Owner, are of a major nature.
-24County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
The plan of action and recovery schedule, when required, shall explain and display how the
Contractor intends to regain compliance with the current accepted, fully completed, Project CPM
schedule, as updated by approved change orders.
The plan of action, when required, shall be submitted to the Owner for review within two (2)
business days of the Contractor receiving the Owner’s written demand. The recovery schedule,
when required, shall be submitted to the Owner within five (5) calendar days of the Contractor’s
receiving the Owner’s written demand.
(f) Early Completion of Project: The Contractor may attempt to achieve Substantial Completion on
or before the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. However, such planned early
completion shall be for the Contractor’s convenience only and shall not create any additional rights
of the Contractor or obligations of the Owner under this Contract, nor shall it change the Time for
Completion or the Contract Completion Date. The Contractor shall not be required to pay damages
to the Owner because of its failure to achieve Substantial Completion by its planned earlier date.
Likewise, the Owner shall not pay the Contractor any additional compensation for achieving
Substantial Completion early nor will the Owner owe the Contractor any compensation should the
Owner, its officers, employees, or agents cause the Contractor not to achieve Substantial
Completion earlier than the date required by the Contract Documents.
If the Contractor seeks to change the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date to
reflect an earlier completion date, he may request or propose such a change. The Owner may, but
is not required to, accept such proposal. However, a change in the Time for Completion or the
Contract Completion Date shall be accomplished only by Change Order. If the Contractor’s
proposal to change the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date is accepted, a
Change Order will be issued stating that all references in the Contract, including these General
Conditions, to the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date shall thereafter refer to
the date as modified, and all rights and obligations, including the Contractor’s liability for actual
damages, delay damages and/or liquidated damages, shall be determined in relation to the date, as
modified.
20.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
(a) Before submittal of the first partial payment request under the Contract, the Contractor shall prepare
for review and approval of the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, a schedule of the estimated
values listed by trades or by specification sections of the Work, totaling the Contract Price. Where
the total project has multiple parts or phases, the Contractor shall prepare appropriate schedules of
values to facilitate reviews and justifications for payments.
All requests for payment shall be made on the Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment
(Form AC-12) pages 1 and 2. Succeeding pages may be on the Form AC-12 continuation sheets or
a computerized spreadsheet which is in the same format and which contains the same information.
Where a computerized spreadsheet is used, one copy of the entire Schedule of Values shall be
provided to the Owner on diskette in a spreadsheet format (e.g. LOTUS, EXCEL, or QUATTRO
PRO) with the initial request for payment if requested.
-25County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(b) If the Contractor requests, or intends to request, payment for materials stored in an approved and
secure manner, the Schedule of Values must indicate the amount for labor and the amount for
materials, and in a supplement thereto must include an itemized list of materials for that trade or
Work section. The material breakdown shall be in sufficient detail to allow verification of the
quantities required for the Project, the quantities delivered, the Work completed, and the quantities
stored on or off Site.
(c) The “Value of Work Completed” portion of the Form AC-12 shall be completed, the Contractor’s
certification completed and signed, and the appropriate substantiating material attached to each
Certificate for Payment (AC-12). Such substantiating material includes, but is not limited to,
invoices for materials, delivery tickets, time sheets, payroll records, daily job logs/records, and
similar materials which, in the opinion of the Owner and the A/E, are necessary or sufficient to
justify payment of the amount requested.
(d) The labor progress for any task or activity shall be calculated based upon the percentage of Work
complete up to fifty percent (50%) of the completion of the task or activity. Thereafter, the
evaluation of labor progress will be based upon the effort required to complete that task or activity.
The material progress shall be calculated as the invoiced dollar cost of materials used in
relationship to the amount estimated as necessary to complete a particular element of Work. When
calculating material progress, credit shall be given for installed material as well as that stored on
the Site and any material stored off Site which has been certified by the Architect/Engineer in
accordance with Section 36 of these General Conditions.
(e) Should Work included in previous Form AC-12 submittals, and for which payment has been made,
subsequently be identified, by tests, inspection, or other means, as not acceptable or not conforming
to Contract requirements, the “Value of Work Completed” portion of the first Form AC-12
submitted after such identification shall be modified to reduce the “completed” value of that Work
by deleting the value of that which has been identified as not acceptable or nonconforming.
21.
ACCESS TO WORK
The Architect/Engineer, the Owner, the Project Manager, the Owner’s inspectors and other testing
personnel, inspectors from the Department of Labor and Industry, and others authorized by the Owner,
shall have access to the Work at all times. The Contractor shall provide proper facilities for access and
inspection.
22.
SURVEYS AND LAYOUT
(a) The Owner shall furnish the Contractor all necessary documents showing property lines and the
location of existing buildings and improvements. The Contractor shall provide competent
surveying and engineering services to execute the Work in accordance with the Contract and shall
be responsible for the accuracy of these surveying and engineering services.
-26County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(b) Such general reference points and benchmarks on the Site as will enable the Contractor to proceed
with the Work will be established in the plans and specifications. If the Contractor finds that any
previously established reference points have been lost or destroyed, he shall promptly notify the
Architect/Engineer.
(c) The Contractor shall protect and preserve the established benchmarks and monuments and shall
make no changes in locations without written notice to the Architect/Engineer and the written
approval from the Owner. Any of these which may be lost or destroyed or which require shifting
because of necessary changes in grades or locations shall, subject to prior written approval of the
Owner, be replaced and accurately located by the Contractor.
23.
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
(a) The general character and scope of the Work are illustrated by the plans and the specifications. If
the Contractor deems additional detail or information to be needed, he may request the same in
writing from the Architect/Engineer. His request shall precisely state the detail or information
needed and shall explain why it is needed. The Contractor shall also indicate a date when the
requested information is required. The Architect/Engineer shall provide by Field Order such further
detail and information as is necessary by the date required so long as the date indicated is
reasonable. Any additional drawings and instructions supplied to the Contractor shall be consistent
with the Contract Documents, shall be true developments thereof, and shall be so prepared that they
can be reasonably interpreted as a part thereof. The Contractor shall carry out the Work in
accordance with the additional detail drawings and instructions.
(b) If the Contractor finds a contract error, or other discrepancy in the plans or specifications, he shall
notify the Architect/Engineer in writing as soon as possible, but before proceeding with the
affected Work. The Architect/Engineer shall issue a clarification by Field Order to the Contractor
stating the correct requirements. If the Contractor deems the Field Order requires additional Work,
he shall notify the A/E of such prior to proceeding with that Work and he shall submit a request for
Change Order along with a detailed substantiating cost proposal thru the A/E to the Owner within
ten (10) calendar days.
(c) In case of differences between small and large scale drawings, the large scale drawings shall
govern. Where on any of the drawings a portion of the Work is drawn out and the remainder is
indicated in outline, the parts drawn out shall apply also to all other like portions of the Work.
(d) Where the word “similar” appears on the drawings, it shall be interpreted in its general sense and
not as meaning identical, and all details shall be worked out in relation to their location and their
connection with other parts of the Work.
(e) The specifications may be divided into several parts, or sections, for convenience only, since the
entire specifications must be considered as a whole. The divisions of the specifications are not
intended to control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or to limit the Work
performed by any trade. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the coordination of the
trades, Subcontractors and vendors engaged in the Work.
-27County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(f) Measurements or dimensions shown on the drawings for Site features, utilities and structures shall
be verified at the Site by the Contractor. The Contractor shall not scale measurements or
dimensions from the drawings. If there are discrepancies, the Architect/Engineer shall be
consulted. If new Work is to connect to, match with or be provided in existing Work, the
Contractor shall verify the actual existing conditions and necessary dimensions prior to ordering
or fabrication.
(g) As-Built Drawings: The Contractor shall maintain at the Site for the Owner one copy of all
drawings, specifications, addenda, approved shop or setting drawings, Change Orders and other
modifications (collectively referred to herein as “As-Built Drawings”) in good order and marked to
record all changes as they occur during construction. These shall be available to the
Architect/Engineer, the Owner, the Project Inspector, the Owner’s other inspectors and to the
Owner’s testing personnel. The drawings shall be neatly and clearly marked in color during
construction to record all variations made during construction. The representation of such
variations shall include such supplementary notes, symbols, legends, and details as may be
necessary to clearly show the as-built construction.
(h) Record Drawings: Upon completion of the Work and prior to the final inspection, the Contractor
shall deliver to the Architect/Engineer, for preparation of the Record Drawings, one complete set of
“As-Built Drawings” referred to in the preceding subsection.
24. SUBMITT ALS
(a) The Contractor shall submit a listing of all Submittals required by the Architect/Engineer or which
the Contractor identifies as necessary, fixing the dates for the submission of shop or setting
drawings, samples and product data. The listing shall be in a format acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall identify all Submittals with the Owner’s Project Title as
required by Section 2(f).
(b) Submittals shall be forwarded to the Architect/Engineer for approval if required by the
specifications or if requested by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner. No part of the Work dealt
with by a Submittal shall be fabricated by the Contractor, save at his own risk, until such approval
has been given.
(c) The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer for approval the name of the manufacturer,
the model number, and other identifying data and information respecting the performance,
capacity, nature and rating of the machinery and mechanical and other equipment which the
Contractor contemplates incorporating in the Work. When Submittals are required by this
Contract for materials, the Contractor shall furnish full information concerning the material or
articles which he contemplates incorporating in the Work. When required, samples shall be
submitted for approval at the Contractor’s expense, with all shipping charges prepaid. Machinery,
equipment, material and articles installed or used without required approval shall be at the risk of
subsequent rejection.
-28County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(d) Unless otherwise indicated or required elsewhere in the specifications, shop drawings shall be
submitted in the form of six (6) blue line or black line prints. Catalog cuts, product data and other
non-reproducible literature, except certificates, shall be submitted in six (6) copies minimum, of
which three (3) will be retained by the Architect/Engineer and the remainder will be returned to the
Contractor.
(e) Submittals shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal which shall list the Project Title, the
Submittals included, the specification section number applicable to each, and the date shown on
each Submittal. Submittals shall be complete in every respect and bound in sets. Each Submittal
shall be clearly marked to show each item, component and/or optional feature proposed to be
incorporated into the Project. Cross reference to the plans or specifications as needed to identify the
use for which the item or component is intended.
(f) The Contractor shall check the Submittals for compliance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall clearly note in writing any and all items which deviate from the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Reasons for deviation shall be included with the
Submittal. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for checking all dimensions and coordinating
all materials and trades to ensure that the components or products proposed, individually or in
combination, will fit in the space available and that they will be compatible with other components
or products provided.
(g) After checking each submittal, the Contractor shall stamp each sheet of the Submittal with the
Contractor’s review stamp. Data submitted in a bound volume or on one sheet printed on two sides,
may be stamped on the front of the first sheet only. The Contractor’s review stamp shall be worded
as follows:
The equipment and material shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be
incorporated into this Project, is in compliance with the Contract drawings and
specifications unless otherwise shown in bold face type or lettering and listed on a page
or pages headed “DEPARTURES FROM DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS”, and
can be installed in the allocated spaces.
Reviewed by __________________ Date
The person signing the review stamp shall be the person designated in writing by the Contractor as
having that authority. (A copy of such designation shall be forwarded to the A/E prior to or with
the first Submittal.) The signature on the stamped review statement shall be handwritten in ink.
Stamped signatures are not acceptable.
(h) The Contractor shall forward all Submittals sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to
allow reasonable time for checking, correcting, resubmitting and rechecking.
(i)
If a Submittal indicates a departure from the Contract requirements, the Architect/Engineer may
reject the Submittal or, if he deems it to have merit, may recommend it to the Owner, who shall
approve or reject it as the Owner, in its sole discretion, sees fit. The departure from the Contract
-29County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
requirements shall be further authorized by a Change Order, if a reduction or increase in the
Contract Price is appropriate.
(j)
The Architect/Engineer is responsible to the Owner, but not to the Contractor, to verify that the
Submittals conform to the design concept and functional requirements of the plans and
specifications, that the detailed design portrayed in shop drawings and proposed equipment and
materials shown in Submittals are of the quality specified and will function properly, and that the
Submittals comply with the Contract Documents.
(k) The Work shall be in accordance with approved Submittals. Approval of the Contractor’s
Submittals by the A/E does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility of complying with the
Contract and all drawings and specifications, except as changed by Change Order.
(l)
The plans and/or specifications may indicate that the Architect/Engineer designed or detailed a
portion of the plans around a particular product (most commonly a piece of equipment). Should a
different product be proposed by the Contractor and accepted, all modifications, rerouting,
relocations and variations required for proper installation and coordination to comply with the
design concept and requirements of the Contract Documents shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and shall be made at no extra cost to the Owner. If the plans were noted as designed or
detailed around a particular product and/or if a product is named when a “brand name or equal”
specification has been used, this is not intended to favor or preclude the use of other products
pursuant to Section 26 of these General Conditions. Rather such design merely acknowledges the
reality that in many instances the Architect/Engineer must have a basis to design and detail around
for dimensions and characteristics of a product or system.
(m) Additional Submittal requirements are shown in the specifications.
25.
FEES, SERVICES AND FACILITIES
(a) The Contractor shall obtain all permits and pay for all fees and charges necessary for temporary
access and public right-of-way blockage or use, for temporary connections to utilities and for the
use of property (other than the Site) for storage of materials and other purposes unless otherwise
specifically stated in the Contract Documents.
(b) Certain projects such as renovations and interior modifications of existing buildings will usually
have water and electric service to the building. In those instances, water and electric power, if
required for the Work under the Contract, will be furnished by the Owner subject to reasonable use
by the Contractor, only to the extent and capacity of present services. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing required connections, temporary wiring, piping, etc. to these services in a
safe manner and in accordance with applicable codes. All temporary wire, pipe, etc. shall be
removed before the Substantial Completion inspection. Acceptance by the Contractor of the use of
Owner’s water and electricity constitutes a release to the Owner of all claims and of all liability to
the Contractor for whatever damages which may result from power and water outages or voltage
variations.
-30County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(c) The Owner shall pay any connection charges for permanent utility connections directly to the
utility Supplier. The Contractor shall coordinate such connections with the utility Supplier.
(d) It is understood that, except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the
Contractor, either directly or through his Subcontractors, shall provide and pay for all material,
labor, tools, equipment, water, light, power, telephone and other services or facilities of every
nature whatsoever necessary to execute completely and deliver the Work within the Contract Time
for Completion or before the Contract Completion Date.
26. EQUALS
(a) Brand names: Unless otherwise stated in the specifications, the name of a certain brand, make or
manufacturer denotes the characteristics, quality, workmanship, economy of operation and
suitability for the intended purpose of the article desired, but does not restrict the Contractor to the
specific brand, make, or manufacturer; it is set forth to convey to the Contractor the general style,
type, character and quality of the article specified.
(b) Equal materials, equipment or assemblies: Whenever in these Contract Documents, a particular
brand, make of material, device or equipment is shown or specified, such brand, make of material,
device or equipment shall be regarded merely as a standard. Any other brand, make or
manufacturer of a product, assembly or equipment which in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer
is the equal of that specified, considering quality, capabilities, workmanship, configuration,
economy of operation, useful life, compatibility with design of the Work, and suitability for the
intended purpose, will be accepted unless rejected by the Owner as not being equal.
(c) Substitute materials, equipment or assemblies: The Contractor may propose to substitute a
material, product, equipment, or assembly which deviates from the requirements of the Contract
Documents but which the Contractor deems will perform the same function and have equal
capabilities, service life, economy of operations, and suitability for the intended purpose. The
proposal must include any cost differentials proposed. The Owner will have the A/E provide an
initial evaluation of such proposed substitutes and provide a recommendation on acceptability and
indicate the A/E’s redesign fee to incorporate the substitution in the design. If the proposed
substitute is acceptable to the Owner, a Change Order will be proposed to the Contractor to accept
the substitute and to deduct the cost of the A/E redesign fee and the proposed cost savings from the
Contract Price. The Owner shall have the right to limit or reject substitutions at its sole discretion.
(d) The Contractor shall be responsible for making all changes in the Work necessary to adapt and
accommodate any equal or substitute product which it uses. The necessary changes shall be made
at the Contractor’s expense.
-31County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
27.
AVAILABILITY OF MATERIALS
If a brand name, product, or model number included in the Contract Documents is not available on the
present market, alternate equal products or model numbers may be proposed by the Contractor through
the Architect/Engineer for approval by the Owner.
28.
CONTRACTOR’S TITLE TO MATERIALS
No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by the Contractor, or by any Subcontractor or
Supplier, subject to any security interest, installment or sales contract or any other agreement or lien by
which an interest is retained by the seller or is given to a secured party. The Contractor warrants that he
has clear and good title to all materials and supplies which he uses in the Work or for which be accepts
payment in whole or in part.
29.
STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS INSTALLATION & WORKMANSHIP
(a) Unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract, all equipment, material, and accessories
incorporated in the Work are to be new and in first class condition.
(b) Unless specifically approved by the Owner or required by the Contract, the Contractor shall not
incorporate into the Work any materials known by the industry to be hazardous to the health of
building construction workers, maintenance workers, or occupants (for example asbestos or lead
paint). If the Contractor becomes aware that a material required by the Contract contains asbestos
or other hazardous materials, he shall notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer immediately
and shall take no further steps to acquire or install any such material without first obtaining Owner
approval.
(c) All workmanship shall be of the highest quality found in the building industry in every respect. All
items of Work shall be done by craftsmen or tradesmen skilled in the particular task or activity to
which they are assigned. In the acceptance or rejection of Work, no allowance will be made for
lack of skill on the part of workmen. Poor or inferior workmanship (as determined by the
Architect/Engineer, the Owner or other inspecting authorities) shall be removed and replaced at
Contractor’s expense such that the Work conforms to the highest quality standards of the trades
concerned, or otherwise corrected to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer, the Owner, or other
inspecting authority, as applicable.
(d) Under the various sections of the plans or specifications, where specified items are supplied with
the manufacturer’s printed instructions, recommendations, or directions for installation, or where
such instructions, recommendations, or directions are available, installation of the specified items
shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions unless those instructions
contradict the plans or specifications, in which case the Architect/Engineer will be notified for an
interpretation and decision.
-32County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(e) Under the various sections of the plans or specifications, where reference is made to specific
codes or standards governing the installation of specified items, installation shall in all cases be in
strict accordance with the referenced codes and standards. Where no reference is made to specific
codes or standards, installation shall conform to the generally recognized applicable standards for
first-class installation of the specific item to be installed. Contractors are expected to be proficient
and skilled in their respective trades and knowledgeable of the Codes and Standards of the
National Fire Protection Association (NFiPA), National Electric Code (NEC), Occupational
Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and other codes and standards applicable to installations and
associated work by his trade.
(f) Where the manufacturer’s printed instructions are not available for installation of specific items,
where specific codes or standards are not referenced to govern the installation or specific items, or
where there is uncertainty on the part of the Contractor concerning the installation procedures to be
followed or the quality of workmanship to be maintained in the installation of specific items, the
Contractor shall consult the Architect/Engineer for approval of the installation procedures or the
specific standards governing the quality of workmanship the Contractor proposes to follow or
maintain during the installation of the items in question.
(g) During and/or at the completion of installation of any items, the tests designated in the plans or
specifications necessary to assure proper and satisfactory functioning for its intended purpose shall
be performed by the Contractor or by its Subcontractor responsible for the completed installation.
All costs for such testing are to be included in the Contract Price. If required by the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall furnish prior to final inspection the manufacturers’ certificates
evidencing that products meet or exceed applicable performance, warranty and other requirements,
and certificates that products have been properly installed and tested.
30.
WARRANTY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
(a) The Contractor warrants that, unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment incorporated
in the Work under the Contract shall be new, in first class condition, and in accordance with the
Contract Documents. The Contractor further warrants that all workmanship shall be of the highest
quality and in accordance with the Contract Documents and shall be performed by persons
qualified at their respective trades.
(b) Work not conforming to these warranties shall be considered defective.
(c) This warranty of materials and workmanship is separate and independent from and in addition to
any of the Contractor’s other guarantees or obligations in the Contract or under Virginia law.
-33County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
31.
USE OF SITE AND REMOVAL OF DEBRIS
(a) The Contractor shall:
(1) Perform the Work in such a manner as not to interrupt or interfere with the operation of any
existing activity on, or in proximity to, the Site or with the Work of any other separate
contractor;
(2) Store his apparatus, materials, supplies and equipment in such orderly fashion at the Site of
the Work as will not unduly interfere with the progress of his Work or the work of any other
separate contractor; and
(3) Place upon the Work or any part thereof only such loads as are consistent with the safety of
that portion of the Work.
(b) The Contractor expressly undertakes, either directly or through his Subcontractor(s), to effect all
cutting, filling or patching of the Work required to make the same conform to the plans and
specifications, and, except with the consent of the Architect/Engineer, not to cut or otherwise alter
the Work of any other separate contractor. The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any portion
of the Work or Site, including existing improvements, unless called for by the Contract.
(c) The Contractor expressly undertakes, either directly or through his Subcontractor(s), to clean up
frequently all refuse, rubbish, scrap materials and debris caused by his operations, to the end that at
all times the Site shall present a neat, orderly and workmanlike appearance. No such refuse, rubbish,
scrap material and debris shall be left within the completed Work nor buried on the building Site,
but shall be removed from the Site and properly disposed of in a licensed landfill or otherwise as
required by law.
(d) The Contractor expressly undertakes, either directly or through his Subcontractor(s), before final
payment or such prior time as the Owner may require, to remove all surplus material, false Work,
temporary structures, including foundations thereof, plants of any description and debris of every
nature resulting from his operations and to put the Site in a neat, orderly condition; to thoroughly
clean and leave reasonably dust free all finished surfaces including all equipment, piping, etc., on
the interior of all buildings included in the Contract; and to clean thoroughly all glass installed
under the Contract, including the removal of all paint and mortar splatters and other defacements.
If the Contractor fails to clean up at the time required herein, the Owner may do so and charge the
costs incurred thereby to the Contractor in accordance with Section 10(b) of these General
Conditions.
(e) The Contractor shall prevent Site soil erosion, the runoff of silt and/or debris carrying water from the
Site, and the blowing of debris off the Site in accordance with the applicable requirements and
standards of the Contract and the County of Albemarle’s Water Protection Ordinance.
-34County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
32.
TEMPORARY ROADS
Temporary roads, if required, shall be established and maintained until permanent roads are accepted,
then removed and the area restored to the conditions required by the Contract Documents. Crushed rock,
paving and other road materials from temporary roads shall not be left on the Site unless permission is
received from the Owner to bury the same at a location and depth approved by the Owner.
33.
SIGNS
The Contractor may, at his option and without cost to the Owner, erect signs acceptable to the Owner on
the Site for the purpose of identifying and giving directions to the job. No signs shall be erected without
prior approval of the Owner as to design and location. The Contractor shall pay all fees required by
Albemarle County.
34.
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
(a) The Contractor expressly undertakes, both directly and through his Subcontractors, to take every
reasonable precaution at all times for the protection of all persons and property which may come on
the Site or be affected by the Contractor’s Work.
(b) The Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work.
(c) The provisions of all rules and regulations governing health and safety as adopted by the Safety
Codes Commission of the Commonwealth of Virginia, issued by the Department of Labor and
Industry under Title 40.1 of the Code of Virginia, shall apply to all Work under this Contract.
(d) The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection of all his Work from damage and
shall protect the Owner’s property from injury or loss arising in connection with this Contract. He
shall make good any such damage, injury or loss, except as may be directly and solely due to errors
in the Contract Documents or caused by agents or employees of the Owner. The Contractor shall
adequately protect adjacent property to prevent any damage to it or loss of use and enjoyment by its
owners. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all passageways, guard fences, lights and other
facilities for protection as required by public authority, local conditions, or the Contract.
(e) In an emergency affecting the health, safety or life of persons or of the Work, or of the adjoining
property, the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the Architect/Engineer
or the Owner, shall act, at his discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury. Also, should he,
to prevent threatened loss or injury, be instructed or authorized to act by the Architect/Engineer or
the Owner, he shall so act immediately, without appeal. Any additional compensation or extension
of time claimed by the Contractor on account of any emergency work shall be determined as
provided by Section 38 of these General Conditions.
-35County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(f) When necessary for the proper protection of the Work, temporary heating of a type approved by the
Architect/Engineer must be provided by the Contractor, at the Contractor’s expense, unless
otherwise specified.
35.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall suspend activity on and protect any portion of the Work that may be subject to
damage by climatic conditions.
36.
PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR
(a) Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the Owner will make partial payments to the Contractor
on the basis of a duly certified and approved Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment, Form
AC-12, showing the estimate of the Work performed during the preceding calendar month or work
period, as recommended by the Architect/Engineer. When evaluating the Contractor’s Form AC12, the Architect/Engineer will consider the value of the Work in place, the value of approved and
properly stored materials, the status of the Work on the critical path with regard to the Time for
Completion, and the estimated value of the Work necessary to achieve Final Completion. The
Architect/Engineer will schedule a monthly pay meeting. The Contractor will submit his monthly
estimate of Work completed on Form AC-12 so that it is received by the Architect/Engineer and
the Owner’s Project Manager at least one work day prior to the date scheduled by the
Architect/Engineer for the monthly pay meeting. The Owner will review the estimate with the
Architect/Engineer and the Contractor at the monthly pay meeting, which shall be considered the
receipt date, and may approve any or all of the estimate of Work for payment. In preparing
estimates, the material delivered to the Site and preparatory Work done shall be taken into
consideration, if properly documented as required by Section 20 of these General Conditions, or as
may be required by the Architect/Engineer so that quantities may be verified. In addition to
material delivered to the Site, material such as large pieces of equipment and items purchased
specifically for the Project, but stored off the Site within the Commonwealth of Virginia, may be
considered for payment, provided all of the following are accomplished prior to the submission of
the monthly payment request in which payment for such materials is requested:
(1) The Contractor must notify the Owner in writing, at least ten (10) days prior to the
submission of the payment request, through the Architect/Engineer, that specific items will
be stored off Site in a designated, secured place within the Commonwealth of Virginia. The
Schedule of Values must be detailed to indicate separately both the value of the material and
the labor/installation for trades requesting payment for stored materials. By giving such
notification and by requesting payment for material stored off Site, the Contractor warrants
that the storage location is safe and suitable for the type of material stored and that the
materials are identified as being the property of the Contractor, and agrees that loss of
materials stored off the Site shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to timely
furnish these types and quantities of materials for the Project and meet the Time for
Completion or Contract Completion Date, subject to Section 42(b) of these General
Conditions. If the storage location is more than 20 miles from the Site, the Contractor may
-36County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
be required to reimburse the Owner for the cost incurred for travel to the storage location to
verify the Contractor’s request for payment for materials stored off Site.
(2) Such notification, as well as the payment request, shall:
(a) itemize the quantity of such materials and document with invoices showing the cost of
said materials;
(b) indicate the identification markings used on the materials, which shall clearly reference
the materials to the particular project;
(c) identify the specific location of the materials, which must be within reasonable
proximity to the Site and within the Commonwealth of Virginia;
(d) include a letter from the Contractor’s Surety which confirms that the Surety on the
Performance Bond and the Labor and Material Payment Bond has been notified of the
request for payment of materials stored off the Site and agrees that the materials are
covered by the bond; and
(e) include a certificate of all-risk builder’s risk insurance in an amount not less than the fair
market value of the materials, which shall name the Owner and the Contractor as coinsured.
(3) The Architect/Engineer shall indicate, in writing, to the Owner that Submittals for such
materials have been reviewed and meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, that the
stored materials meet the requirement of the plans and specifications, and that such materials
conform to the approved Submittals. Should the A/E deem it necessary to visit the storage
site to make such review, the Contractor shall bear the costs incurred therewith.
(4) The Owner, through the Architect/Engineer, shall notify the Contractor in writing of its
agreement to prepayment for materials.
(5) The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing, through the Architect/Engineer, when the
materials are to be transferred to the Site and when the materials are received at the Site.
(b) Payment will not be made for materials or equipment stored on or off the Site which are not
scheduled for incorporation into the Work within the six months following submission of the
request for payment, unless the Contractor has the prior consent of the Owner, which consent may
be granted or withheld by the Owner in its discretion if, in the opinion of the Owner, it is not
necessary to procure the materials more than six months in advance of use to assure their
availability when needed.
(c) In making such partial payments, five percent (5%) of each payment to the Contractor shall be
retained until Final Completion and acceptance of all Work covered by the Contract, unless
otherwise provided by any law, regulation or program of the federal government. Such retainage
shall be held to assure faithful performance of the Contract and may also be used as a fund to
deduct amounts due to or claimed by the Owner, including, but not limited to, payment to the
-37County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
Owner of all monies due for deductive change orders, credits, uncorrected Defective Work,
interest, damages, and the like. (§2.2-4333 of the Code of Virginia)
(d) All material and Work for which partial payments are made shall thereupon become the sole
property of the Owner, but this provision shall not relieve the Contractor from the sole responsibility
for all materials and Work, including those for which payment has been made, or for the restoration
of any damaged materials or Work. Nor shall this provision serve as a waiver of the right of the
Owner to require the fulfillment of all of the terms and conditions of the Contract.
(e) The final payment, which shall include the retainage, less any amounts due to or claimed by the
Owner, shall not become due until the Architect/Engineer and the Owner agree that Final
Completion has been achieved and until the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner through the
Architect/Engineer a Certificate of Completion by the Contractor (Form AC-13.2) and an Affidavit
of Payment of Claims (Form AC-13), stating that all Subcontractors and Suppliers of either labor
or materials have been paid all sums claimed by them for Work performed or materials furnished in
connection with this Project less retainage. Amounts due the Owner which may be withheld from
the final payment may include, but are not limited to, amounts due pursuant to Section 3(i), Section
16(a)-(d), Section 31(d), costs incurred to repair or replace Defective Work, costs incurred as a
result of the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions or omissions of those for whom the
Contractor is responsible, delay damages under Section 42(h), and any liquidated or actual
damages. If all Subcontractors and Suppliers of labor and materials have not been paid the full
amount claimed by them, the Contractor shall list each to which an agreed amount of money is due
or which has a claim in dispute. With respect to all such Subcontractors and Suppliers, the
Contractor shall provide to the Owner, along with the Affidavit of Payment of Claims (Form AC13), an affidavit from each such Subcontractor and Supplier stating the amount of their subcontract
or supply contract, the percentage of completion, the amounts paid to them by the Contractor and
the dates of payment, the amount of money still due if any, any interest due the Subcontractor or
Supplier pursuant to Section 37(b) below, and whether satisfactory arrangements have been made
for the payment of said amounts. If no agreement can be reached between the Contractor and one
or more Subcontractors or Suppliers as to the amounts owed to the Subcontractors or Suppliers, the
Owner may, in its discretion, pay such portion of the monies due to the Contractor which is
claimed by the Subcontractor or Supplier into a Virginia Court or Federal Court sitting in Virginia,
in the manner provided by law. Said payment into court shall be deemed a payment to the
Contractor. Nothing in this Section shall be construed as creating any obligation or contractor
relationship between the Owner and any Subcontractor or Supplier, and the Owner shall not be
liable to any Subcontractor or Supplier on account of any failure or delay of the Owner in
complying with the terms hereof.
(f) Upon successful completion of the final inspection and all Work required by the Contract,
including but not limited to the delivery of As-Built drawings, equipment manuals, written
warranties, acceptance of the Work by the Owner and the delivery of the affidavits required in
Section 36(e) of these General Conditions, the Architect/Engineer shall deliver the written
Certificate of Completion by the Architect/Engineer (Form AC-13.1) to the Owner, with a copy to
the Contractor, stating the entire amount of Work performed and compensation earned by the
Contractor, including extra work and compensation therefor. The Owner may accept the Work for
occupancy or use while asserting claims against the Contractor; disputing the amount of
-38County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
compensation due to the Contractor; disputing the quality of the Work, its completion, or its
compliance with the Contract Documents; or any other reason.
(g) Unless there is a dispute about the compensation due to the Contractor, Defective Work, quality of
the Work, compliance with the Contract Documents, completion itself, claims by the Owner, other
matters in contention between the parties, or unless monies are withheld pursuant to Albemarle
County’s Debt Setoff Program, within thirty (30) days after receipt and acceptance of the Schedule
of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form AC-12) in proper form by the Architect/Engineer at the
monthly pay meeting, which shall be considered the receipt date, the Owner shall pay to the
Contractor the amount approved by the Architect/Engineer, less all prior payments and advances
whatsoever to or for the account of the Contractor. In the case of final payment, the completed
Affidavit of Payment of Claims (Form AC-13), the Certificate of Completion by the Contractor
(Form AC-13.2) and the Certificate of Completion by the Architect/Engineer (Form AC-13.1) shall
accompany the final Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form AC-12) which is
forwarded to the Owner for payment. The date on which payment is due shall be referred to as the
Payment Date. In the event of disputes, payment shall be mailed on or before the Payment Date for
amounts and Work not in dispute, subject to any set offs claimed by the Owner, provided however,
in instances where further appropriations are required by the County of Albemarle or where the
issuance of further bonds is required, in which case, payment shall be made within thirty (30) days
after the effective date of such appropriation or within thirty (30) days after the receipt of bond
proceeds by the Owner. All prior estimates and payments including those relating to extra Work
may be connected and adjusted in any payment and shall be corrected and adjusted in the final
payment. In the event that any request for payment by the Contractor contains a defect or
impropriety, the Owner shall notify the Contractor of any defect or impropriety which would
prevent payment by the Payment Date, within five (5) days after receipt of the Schedule of Values
and Certificate for Payment (Form AC-12) by the Owner from the Architect/Engineer.
(h) Interest shall accrue on all amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor which remain unpaid
seven (7) days following the Payment Date. Said interest shall accrue at the discounted ninety-day
U.S. Treasury bill rate as established by the Weekly Auction and as reported in the publication
entitled The Wall Street Journal on the weekday following each such Weekly Auction. During the
period of time when the amounts due to the Contractor remain unpaid following the seventh (7th)
day after the Payment Date, the interest accruing shall fluctuate on a weekly basis and shall be that
established by the immediately prior Weekly Auction. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
to gather and substantiate the applicable weekly interest rates to the satisfaction of the Owner and to
calculate to the satisfaction of the Owner the interest due. In no event shall the rate of interest charge
exceed the rate of interest charged pursuant to §58.1-1812 of the Code of Virginia. No interest shall
accrue on retainage or when payment is delayed because of disagreement between the Owner and
the Contractor regarding the quantity, quality or timeliness of the Work, including, but not limited
to, compliance with Contract Documents or the accuracy of any Request for Payment received. This
exception to the accrual of interest stated in the preceding sentence shall apply only to that portion of
a delayed payment which is actually the subject of such a disagreement and shall apply only for the
duration of such disagreement. Nothing contained herein shall be interpreted, however, to prevent
the withholding of retainage to assure faithful performance of the Contract. These same provisions
relating to payment of interest to the Contractor shall apply also to the computation and accrual of
interest on any amounts due from the Contractor to the Owner for deductive change orders and to
amounts due on any claims by the
-39County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
Owner. The date of mailing of any payment by the U.S. Mail is deemed to be the date of payment to
the addressee.
37.
(i)
The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be and operate as a release to the
Owner of all claims by the Contractor, its Subcontractors and Suppliers, and of all liability to the
Contractor whatever, including liability for all things done or furnished in connection with this
Work, except for things done or furnished which are the subject of unresolved claims for which the
Contractor has filed a timely written notice of intent, provided a claim is submitted no later than
sixty (60) days after final payment. Acceptance of any interest payment by the Contractor shall be a
release of the Owner from claims by the Contractor for late payment.
(j)
No certificate for payment issued by the Architect/Engineer, and no payment, final or otherwise, no
certificate of completion, nor partial or entire use or occupancy of the Work by the Owner, shall be
an acceptance of any Work or materials not in accordance with the Contract, nor shall the same
relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or Defective Work or operate to release
the Contractor or his Surety from any obligation under the Contract, the Standard Performance
Bond and the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond.
PAYMENTS BY CONTRACTOR (§2.2-4354, Code of Virginia)
Under §2.2-4354, Code of Virginia, the Contractor is obligated to:
(a) Within seven (7) days after receipt of amounts paid to the Contractor by the Owner for Work
performed by the Subcontractor or Supplier under this Contract,
(1) Pay the Subcontractor or Supplier for the proportionate share of the total payment received
from the Owner attributable to the Work performed by the Subcontractor or the materials
furnished by the Supplier under this Contract; or
(2) Notify the Subcontractor or Supplier, in writing, of his intention to withhold all or a part of
the Subcontractor or Supplier’s payment with the reason for nonpayment;
(b) Pay interest to the Subcontractor or Supplier on all amounts owed by the Contractor that remain
unpaid after seven (7) days following receipt by the Contractor of payment from the Owner for
Work performed by the Subcontractor or materials furnished by the Supplier under this contract,
except for amounts withheld as allowed under subsection (a)(2) of this Section.
(c) Include in each of his subcontracts a provision requiring each Subcontractor to include in each of its
subcontracts a provision requiring each subcontractor to include or otherwise be subject to the same
payment and interest requirements with respect to each lower tier subcontractor. Each Subcontractor
shall include with its invoice to, or request for payment from, the Contractor, a certification that
Subcontractor has paid each of its suppliers and lower tier subcontractors their proportionate share
of previous payments received from the Contractor attributable to the Work performed or the
materials furnished by it under this Contract.
-40County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
The Contractor’s obligation to pay interest to the Subcontractor or Supplier pursuant to subsection (b) of
this Section is not an obligation of the Owner. A modification to this Contract shall not be made for the
purpose of providing reimbursement for such interest charge. A Contractor’s cost reimbursement claim
shall not include any amount for reimbursement of such interest charge.
38.
CHANGES IN THE WORK
(a) The Owner may at any time, by written order utilizing the County of Albemarle Change Order
Form AC-11 and without notice to the sureties, make changes in the Work which are within the
general scope of the contract except that no change will be made which will increase the total
Contract Price to an amount more than twenty-five percent (25%) in excess of the original
Contract Price without notice to sureties. At the time of the Preconstruction Meeting described in
Section 49(b), the Contractor and the Owner shall advise each other of their designees authorized
to accept and/or approve changes to the Contract Price and of any limits to each designee’s
authority. Should any designee or limits of authority change during the time this Contract is in
effect, the Contractor or Owner shall give written notice to the other within seven (7) calendar
days, utilizing the procedures set forth in these General Conditions. The Contractor agrees and
understands that the authority of the Owner’s designee is limited by Virginia Code §2.2-4309 and
any other applicable statute.
If the Contractor claims that any instructions given to him by the Architect/Engineer or by the
Owner, by drawings or otherwise, involve extra Work which increases the scope of the Contract,
then, except in emergencies endangering life or property, he shall give the Architect/Engineer and
the Owner written notice thereof before proceeding to execute the Work. Said notice shall be given
promptly enough to avoid delaying the Work and in no instance later than fourteen (14) days after
the receipt of such instructions. Should it not be immediately clear to the Contractor that the
change involves extra Work outside the scope of the Contract, written notice shall be sufficient if
given as soon as possible after such realization, but in no event later than fourteen (14) days after
the start of such Work. If the Owner agrees, a Change Order shall be issued as provided herein, and
any additional compensation shall be determined by one of the four (4) methods provided herein,
as selected by the Owner. Except as otherwise specifically provided, no claims for extra Work
shall be allowed unless timely notice, as required by this Section, is given by the Contractor and
unless such Work is performed pursuant to written Change Order. The Change Order shall
designate which of the four methods for computing charges and credits set forth herein shall be
used. In making any change, the charge or credit for the change shall be determined by one of the
following methods as selected by the Owner:
(1) By a mutually agreed fixed amount change to the Contract Price and/or time allowed for
completion of the Work. The Change Order shall be substantiated by documentation
itemizing the estimated quantities and costs of all labor, materials and equipment required as
well as any markup used. The price change shall include the Contractor’s overhead and
profit. See Subsections (d) and (e) below.
(2) By using unit prices and calculating the number of net units of Work in each part of the
Work which is changed, either as the Work progresses or before Work on the change
-41County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
commences, and by then multiplying the calculated number of units by the applicable unit
price set forth in the Contract or multiplying by a mutually agreed unit price if none was
provided in the Contract. No additional percentage markup for overhead or profit shall be
added to the unit prices.
(3) By ordering the Contractor, by Unilateral Change Order citing this subsection, to proceed
with the change to the Work for the cost and completion schedule set forth by the Unilateral
Change Order. The Contractor shall proceed with the work as directed, and shall notify the
Owner when eighty-five percent (85%) of the amount obligated by this Unilateral Change
Order has been expended.
(4) By keeping in a form acceptable to the Owner, an accurate, itemized account of the cost of
the change in the Work, including, but not limited to, the costs of labor, materials,
equipment, and supplies; and to annotate a copy of the Project schedule to accurately show
the status of the Work at the time this initial change order is issued, to show the start and
finish of the changed Work, and the status of the Work when the changed Work is
completed. A Change Order citing this subsection shall describe the parameters of the
change in the Work, describe the cost items to be itemized and verified for payment,
address the impact on the schedule for Substantial Completion, and state that a subsequent
Change Order will be issued to incorporate the cost of the changed Work into the Contract
Price and any change in the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date.
The Contractor shall sign the Change Order acknowledging he has been directed to proceed
with the changed Work.
Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by the Owner, such costs shall not exceed
those prevailing for the trades or crafts, materials, and equipment in the locality of the
Project, may include only those items listed as allowable in Subsection 38(e), and shall not
include any of the costs listed as not allowable in Subsection 38(f). The Owner shall be
permitted, on a daily basis, to verify such records and may require such additional records as
are necessary to determine the cost of the change to the Work.
Within fourteen (14) days of the conclusion of such ordered Work, the Contractor and the
Owner shall arrive at a cost for the Change Order, based on the records kept and the
Contractor’s allowance for overhead and profit as set forth in Subsections (d), (e) and (f)
below, and such costs shall be incorporated into a Change Order which references the
Change Order ordering the Work. If agreement on the cost of the changed Work cannot be
reached within the fourteen (14) days allotted, the Contractor may file a claim for the
disputed amount as provided for in Section 46.
(b) The Contractor shall review any Owner requested or directed change and shall respond in writing
within fourteen (14) calendar days after receipt of the proposed change (or such other reasonable
time as the Owner may direct), stating the effect of the proposed change upon his Work, including
any increase or decrease in the Contract time and Price. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner
an itemized breakdown of the quantities and prices used in computing the proposed change in
Contract Price.
-42County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
The Owner shall review the Contractor’s proposal and respond to the Contractor within thirty (30)
days of receipt. If a change to the Contract Price and time for performance are agreed upon, both
parties shall sign the Change Order. If the price and time are not agreed upon, the Owner may direct
the Contractor to proceed under Subsection 38(a)(3) or 38(a)(4). Changes to the Contract time
and/or Price shall be effective when signed by both parties, with the exception of a Unilateral
Change Order that is only signed by the Owner.
(c) In figuring changes, any instructions for measurement of quantities set forth in the Contract shall be
followed.
(d) The percentage for overhead and profit to be used in calculating both additive and deductive changes
in the Work (other than changes covered by unit prices) shall not exceed the percentages for each
category listed below. Said percentages for overhead and profit shall he applied only on the cost of
the changed Work (i.e. difference in cost between original and revised Work):
(1) If a Subcontractor does all or part of the changed Work, the Subcontractor’s markup for
overhead and profit on the Work it performs shall be a maximum of fifteen percent (15%).
The Contractor’s markup on the subcontractor’s price shall be a maximum of ten percent
(10%).
(2) If the Contractor does all or part of the changed Work, its markup for overhead and profit on
the changed Work it performs shall be a maximum of fifteen percent (15%).
(3) If a Sub-subcontractor at any tier does all or part of the changed Work, the Subsubcontractor’s markup on that Work shall be a maximum of fifteen percent (15%). The
markup of a sub-subcontractor’s Work by the Contractor and all intervening tiers of
Subcontractors shall not exceed a total of ten percent (10%).
(4) Where Work is deleted from the Contract prior to commencement of that Work without
substitution of other similar Work, one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price
attributable to that Work shall be deducted from the Contract Price including applicable
overhead costs and profit. However, in the event that material Submittals have been
approved and orders placed for said materials, a lesser amount, but in no case less than
eighty percent (80%) of the Contract Price attributable to that Work, shall be deducted from
the Contract Price. The credit to the Owner for reduced premiums on labor and material
bonds and performance bonds shall in all cases be one hundred percent (100%).
(e) Allowable costs for changes in the Work may include the following:
(1) Labor costs for employees directly employed in the change in the Work, including salaries
and wages plus the cost of payroll charges and fringe benefits and overtime premiums, if
such premiums are explicitly authorized by the Owner.
(2) Materials incorporated into the change to the Work, including costs of transportation and
storage, if applicable. If applicable, all cash discounts shall accrue to the Contractor, unless
the Owner deposits funds with the Contractor to make such payments, and all trade
-43County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from the sale of surplus materials shall accrue to the
Owner.
(3) Equipment incorporated in the changed Work or equipment used directly in accomplishing
the Work. If rented expressly for accomplishing the change in the Work, the cost shall be the
rental rate according to the terms of the rental agreement, which the Owner shall have the
right to approve. If owned by the Contractor, the costs shall be a reasonable price based upon
the life expectancy of the equipment and the purchase price of the equipment. If applicable,
transportation costs may be included.
(4) Costs of increases in premiums for the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond and the
Standard Performance Bond, provided coverage for the cost of the change in the Work
results in such increased costs. At the Owner’s request, the Contractor shall provide proof of
his notification to the Surety of the change in the Work and of the Surety’s agreement to
include such change in its coverage. The cost of the increase in premium shall be an
allowable cost but shall not be marked up.
(5) Contractor and Subcontractor overhead costs as set forth in Subsection (d) markups above.
(6) If the change in the Work also changes the Time for Completion or Contract Completion
Date by adding days to perform the Work, an itemized accounting of the following Site
direct overhead expenses for the change to the time may be considered as allowable costs for
compensation in addition to those shown above: The Site superintendent’s prorata salary,
temporary Site office trailer expense, and temporary Site utilities including basic telephone
service, electricity, heat, water, and sanitary/toilet facilities. All other direct and indirect
overhead expenses are considered covered by and included in the Subsection (d) markups
above.
(7) Any other costs directly attributable to the change in the Work with the exception of those
set forth below.
(f) Allowable costs for changes in the Work shall not include the following:
(1) Costs due to the negligence of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, their employees
or other persons for whom the Contractor is responsible, including, but not limited to, costs
for the correction of Defective Work, for improper disposal of material, for equipment
wrongly supplied, for delay in performing the Work, or for delay in obtaining materials or
equipment.
(2) Home office expenses including payroll costs for the Contractor’s officers, executives,
administrators, project managers, accountants, counsel, engineers, timekeepers, estimators,
clerks, and other similar administrative personnel employed by the Contractor, whether at
the Site or in the Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the
Work. These costs are deemed overhead included in the percentage markups allowable in
Subsection (d) above.
-44County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(3) Home and field office expenses not itemized in Subsection 38(e)(6) above. Such items
include, but are not limited to, expenses of Contractor’s home and branch offices,
Contractor’s capital expenses, interest on Contractor’s capital used for the Work, charges for
delinquent payments, small tools, incidental job costs, rent, utilities, telephone and office
equipment, and other general overhead expenses.
(g) All Change Orders, except the “initial” Change Orders authorizing work citing Subsection 38(a)(4)
procedures, must state that the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date is not
changed or is either increased or decreased by a specific number of days. The old Time for
Completion and, if changed, the new Time for Completion must be stated.
If the Contractor requests an extension to the Time for Completion or a later Contract Completion
Date, he must provide written justification for the extension to the Architect/Engineer and to the
Owner. The written justification must demonstrate an anticipated actual increase in the time
required to complete the Work beyond that allowed by the Contract as adjusted by prior change
orders or amendments to the Contract, not just an increase or decrease in the time needed to
complete some portion of the total Work. When a CPM schedule is required by the Contract, no
extension to the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date shall be allowed unless, and
then only to the extent that, the additional or changed Work increases the length of the critical
path beyond the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date. If approved, the increase in
time required to complete the Work shall be added to the Time for Completion or Contract
Completion Date.
The Owner may decrease, by Change Order, the Time for Completion or Contract Completion
Date when an Owner-requested deletion from the Work results in a decrease in the actual time
required to complete the Work as demonstrable on the Bar Graph Schedule or on the CPM
Schedule, whichever is appropriate. The Contractor may submit a request to decrease, by Change
Order, the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date under the procedures and subject to
the considerations set forth in Section 19(f). No request for such decrease shall be considered for
approval unless the proposed shorter schedule is otherwise acceptable under Sections 19(b) or (c),
whichever is applicable. The Change Order decreasing the Time for Completion or changing the
Contract Completion Date must be signed by both the Owner and the Contractor.
With the exception of Change Orders under Subsection 38(a)(4), which shall arrive at a change to
the Contract Price and any change to time using the procedures set forth therein, each Change
Order shall include all time and monetary impacts of the change, whether the Change Order is
considered alone or with all other changes during the course of the Project. Failure to include a
change to time and Contract Price in Section 38(a)(1) or (2) Change Orders shall waive any change
to the time and Contract Price unless the parties mutually agree in writing to postpone a
determination of the change to time and price resulting from the Change Order. Such a
determination may be postponed not more than forty-five (45) days to give the Contractor an
opportunity to demonstrate a change in the time and price needed to complete the Work. During
any such postponement, the Work shall proceed, unless the Owner agrees otherwise.
If at any time there is a delay in the critical path of the Work due to postponement, due to the
Contractor’s efforts to justify an extension of the time or an increase in the Contract Price, or due to
the Contractor’s refusal to proceed with any of the Work, pending agreement on a change in time
-45County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
or price, such delay and any Contractor costs resulting from it shall not serve as the basis for the
extension of the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date or for an increase in the
Contract Price.
(h) The acceptance by the Contractor of any payment made by the Owner under a Change Order shall
be and operate as a release to the Owner of all claims by the Contractor and of all liability owing to
the Contractor for all things done or furnished in connection with the Work described in the
Change Order. The execution of any Change Order by the Owner shall not be an acceptance of any
Work or materials not in accordance with the Contract Documents, nor shall it relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship or operate to release the
Contractor or his surety from any obligation arising under the Contract or the Standard
Performance Bond or Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond.
(i)
Payments will not be made for any Work, labor or materials on a fixed price, unit price or
Subsection 38(a)(4) basis until the Contractor has furnished the Owner documents, certified as true
and correct by an authorized officer or agent of the Contractor, evidencing the cost of such Work,
labor and materials. The Owner may require any or all of the following documentation to be
provided by the Contractor:
(1) certified payroll records showing the name, classification, date, daily hours, total hours, rate,
and extension for each laborer, foreman, supervisor or other worker;
(2) equipment type & model, dates, daily hours, total hours, rental rate or other specified rate,
and extension for each unit of equipment;
(3) invoices for materials showing quantities, prices, and extensions;
(4) daily records of waste materials removed from the Site and/or fill materials imported to the
Site;
(5) certified measurements of over excavations, piling installed and similar work; and/or
(6) transportation records for materials, including prices, loads, and extensions.
Requests for payment shall be accompanied and supported by invoices for all materials used and
for all transportation charges claimed. If materials come from the Contractor’s own stock, then an
affidavit may be furnished, in lieu of invoices, certifying quantifies, prices, etc. to support the
actual cost.
39.
CONTRACTOR’S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT
If the Work should be stopped under an order of any court or other public authority for a period of ninety
(90) days through no fault of the Contractor or anyone employed by him, or if the Owner should fail to
pay to the Contractor within sixty (60) days any sum certified by the Architect/Engineer when no dispute
exists as to the sum due or any provision of the Contract, then the Contractor may, upon ten (10)
-46County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
calendar days written notice to the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, stop Work or terminate the
contract and recover from the Owner payment for the cost of the Work actually performed, together
with overhead and profit thereon, but profit on the Work performed shall be recovered only to the
extent that the Contractor can demonstrate that he would have had profit on the entire Contract if he
had completed the Work. The Contractor may not receive profit or any other type of compensation for
parts of the Work not performed. The Contractor may recover the reasonable cost of physically closing
down the Site, but no other costs of termination. The Owner may offset any claims it may have against
the Contractor against the amounts due to the Contractor. In no event shall termination of the Contract
by the Contractor terminate the obligations of the Contractor’s surety on its payment and performance
bonds.
40.
OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT FOR CAUSE
(a) If the Contractor should be adjudged as bankrupt, or if he should make a general assignment for the
benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency, the Owner
may stop work or terminate the Contract. If the Contractor should refuse or should repeatedly fail,
except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen
or proper materials and equipment, or if he should fail to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or
Suppliers of material or labor, or if he should disregard laws, ordinances or the written instructions of
the Architect/Engineer or the Owner, or otherwise be in substantial violation of any provision of the
Contract, then the Owner may stop work or terminate the Contract.
(b) Prior to termination of the Contract, the Owner shall give the Contractor and his surety ten (10)
calendar days written notice pursuant to Section 1 (“Notice”) of these General Conditions, during
which the Contractor and/or his surety may rectify the basis for the notice. If rectified to the
satisfaction of the Owner within said ten (10) days, the Owner may rescind its notice of
termination. If not, the termination for cause shall become effective at the end of the ten (10) day
notice period. In the alternative, the Owner may, in writing, postpone the effective date of the
termination for cause, at its sole discretion, if it should receive reassurances from the Contractor
and/or its surety that the basis for the termination will be remedied in a time and manner which the
Owner finds acceptable. If at any time after such postponement, the Owner determines that
Contractor and/or its surety has not or is not likely to rectify the causes of termination in an
acceptable manner or within the time allowed, then the Owner may immediately terminate the
Contract for cause, without the necessity of further ten (10) day notice, by notifying the Contractor
and his surety in writing of the termination. In no event shall termination for cause terminate the
obligations of the Contractor’s surety on its payment and performance bonds.
(c) Upon termination of the Contract, the Owner shall take possession of the Site and of all materials,
tools and equipment thereon and finish the Work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In
such case the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment. If the expense of
finishing the Work, including compensation for additional managerial and administrative services,
shall exceed the unpaid balance of the Contract Price, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the
Owner, together with any other expenses of terminating the Contract and having it completed by
others.
-47County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
41.
(d)
If it should be judicially determined that the Owner improperly terminated this Contract for cause,
then the termination shall be deemed to be a termination for the convenience of the Owner.
(e)
Termination of the Contract under this Section is without prejudice to any other right or remedy of
the Owner.
TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
(a) Owner may terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, at any time without cause upon giving the
Contractor written notice of such termination pursuant to Section 1 (“Notice”) of these General
Conditions. Upon such termination, the Contractor shall immediately cease Work and remove from
the Site all of its labor forces and such of its materials as Owner elects not to purchase or to assume
in the manner hereinafter provided. Upon such termination, the Contractor shall take such steps as
Owner may require to assign to the Owner the Contractor’s interest in all Subcontracts and purchase
orders designated by Owner. After all such steps have been taken to Owner’s satisfaction, the
Contractor shall receive as full compensation for termination and assignment the following:
(1) All amounts then otherwise due under the terms of this Contract;
(2) Amounts due for Work performed in accordance with the Contract subsequent to the latest
approved Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form AC-12) through the date of
termination;
(3) Reasonable compensation for the actual cost of demobilization incurred by the Contractor as
a direct result of such termination. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any compensation
or damages for lost profits or for any other type of contractual compensation or damages
other than those provided by the preceding sentence. Upon payment of the foregoing, Owner
shall have no further obligations to Contractor of any nature.
(b) In no event shall termination for the convenience of the Owner terminate the obligations of the
Contractor’s surety on its payment and performance bonds.
42.
DAMAGES FOR DELAYS; EXTENSION OF TIME
(a) If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or omission of the
Owner, its agents or employees or any separate independent contractor of the Owner, and the act or
omission is the result of or is necessitated by causes outside the Owner’s control; or if the Contractor
is delayed by strikes, fires, unusual delays in transportation or unavoidable casualties, or other causes
outside the Owner’s or Contractor’s control, the Contractor shall give the Owner and
Architect/Engineer written notice within ten (10) days of the inception of the delay. The Owner shall
extend the time for Substantial Completion or Final Completion, as the case may be, for the length of
time that the Substantial Completion or Final Completion of the Work was actually delayed thereby,
and the Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated or actual damages for delay during the period
of such extension nor shall the Contractor be due compensation or damages
-48County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
of any kind, under any theory of law, as a result of such delay, the impact of such delay, or
acceleration of Work as a result of such delay. In the event a CPM schedule is required by the
Contract, no extension of the time allowed for Substantial Completion shall be granted unless the
Contractor demonstrates a delay in the critical path of the approved CPM schedule or approved bar
graph schedule.
(b) If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or omission of the
Owner, its agents or employees, due to causes within their control, or delayed by the Owner’s
separate, independent contractors, when such delay results from causes within the Owner’s control,
and the Contractor intends to seek additional compensation for damages, if any, caused by the delay,
the Contractor shall inform the Owner and the Architect/Engineer immediately at the time of the
occurrence giving rise to the delay by the fastest means available and shall give written notice no
later than two (2) working days after inception of the delay. The Contractor’s notice to the Owner
shall specify the nature of the delay claimed by the Contractor, the cause of the delay and the impact
of the delay on the Contractor’s Work schedule. The Owner shall then have three (3) working days
to respond to the Contractor’s notice with a resolution, remedy or direction to alleviate the delay or
with a notice rejecting the claim for delay alleged to be caused by the Owner or parties for whom the
Owner is responsible. If the issue is not then resolved, the Contractor may submit a request for
Change Order in accordance with Section 38 or submit a claim as provided for in Section 46. The
Contractor shall only be entitled to additional compensation if the delay was unreasonable and was
caused solely by acts or omissions of the Owner, its agents or employees, due to causes within their
control, or was caused by the Owner’s separate, independent contractor, when such delay resulted
solely from causes within the Owner’s control.
(c) The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of the Time for Completion or Contract
Completion Date or to any additional compensation for delays caused by acts or omissions of the
Contractor due to causes within his control, including, but not limited to, delays resulting from
Defective Work including workmanship and/or materials, from rejected work which must be
corrected before dependent work can proceed, from Defective Work or rejected work for which
corrective action must be determined before like work can proceed, or from incomplete, incorrect
or unacceptable submittals or samples.
(d) No extension of time or additional compensation, if applicable, will be granted for any delay unless
the claimed delay directly affects the critical path of the approved CPM schedule or the schedule
shown on the approved bar graph schedule, whichever is applicable, and any float has been
consumed. No extension of time or additional compensation shall be given for a delay if the
Contractor failed to give notice in the manner and within the time prescribed in Subsections (a) or
(b) above, whichever applies. Furthermore, no extension of time or additional compensation shall
be given for any delay unless a claim therefor is made in writing to the Owner, with a copy to the
Architect/Engineer, within twenty (20) days of the end of the delay. The claim shall state the cause
of the delay, the number of days of extension requested and any compensation requested by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall report the termination of the delay to the Owner and
Architect/Engineer not less than ten (10) days after such termination. Failure to give notice of
either the inception or the termination of the cause of delay or failure to present a claim for
extension of time and/or monetary compensation within the times prescribed shall constitute a
waiver of any claim for extension or additional compensation based upon that cause.
-49County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(e) Requests for compensation for delays pursuant to Subsection (b) above must be substantiated by
itemized data and records clearly showing that the Work delayed was on the critical path of the
approved CPM schedule or on the sequence of Work on the approved bar graph schedule, as
modified, and that the additional costs incurred by the Contractor are directly attributable to the
delay in the Work claimed. Furthermore, compensation for delay shall be calculated from the
contractual Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, as adjusted by Change Order, and
shall not be calculated based on any early completion planned or scheduled by the Contractor,
unless a Change Order has been executed pursuant to Section 19(f) changing the Time for
Completion or the Contract Completion Date to reflect such early completion. See Section 19 for
procedures for the Contractor to follow if he plans early completion of the Work and wishes to
request a Change Order reflecting the early completion date.
If there is an extension in the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date and if the
Contractor is entitled to compensation under Subsection 42(b), and where there is no change in the
Work, an itemized accounting of the following direct Site overhead expenses will be considered as
allowable costs to be used in determining the compensation due the Contractor:
Site superintendent prorata salary, temporary Site office expense, temporary Site
facilities, and temporary Site utilities including basic telephone service, electricity,
heat, water, and sanitary/toilets. A fifteen percent (15%) markup of these expenses
will be allowed to compensate the Contractor for home office and other direct or
indirect overhead expenses.
(f) If the Contractor submits a claim for delay damages pursuant to Subsection 42(b) above, the
Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for a percentage of all costs incurred by the Owner in
investigating, analyzing, negotiating and litigating the claim, which percentage shall be equal to the
percentage of the Contractor’s total delay claim that is determined through litigation to be false or
to have no basis in law or in fact. (§2.2-4335(C), Code of Virginia.)
(g) Any change in the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date shall be
accomplished only by issuance of a Change Order.
(h) If the Contractor fails to complete the Work within the Time for Completion or the Contract
Completion Date, the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner in the amounts set forth in the
Supplemental General Conditions, if any, not as a penalty, but as fixed, agreed and liquidated
damages for delay until the Work is substantially or finally completed as the case may be. If
liquidated damages are not so fixed in the Supplemental General Conditions, the Contractor shall
be liable for any and all actual damages sustained as a result of delay. In addition to damages for
delay, whether liquidated or actual, the Contractor shall also be liable for any and all actual
damages sustained by the Owner as a result of any other breach of the Contract, including, but not
limited to, Defective Work and abandonment of the Contract.
(i)
If liquidated damages are provided by the Supplemental General Conditions, the following
provisions apply:
i.
If the Work is not substantially complete by the Time for Completion or Contract
Completion Date, the Contractor shall owe to the Owner, not as a penalty but as Step One
-50County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
liquidated damages, the sum stated in the Supplemental General Conditions for Step One
liquidated damages for each and every partial or total calendar day of delay in Substantial
Completion.
43.
ii.
Once the Work is substantially complete, the accrual of Step One liquidated damages shall
cease and the Contractor shall have thirty (30) calendar days in which to achieve Final
Completion of the Work.
iii.
If Final Completion of the Work is not achieved on or before the thirtieth (30th) calendar
day after Substantial Completion, and if the Owner has not granted any extension of time,
the Contractor shall owe to the Owner, not as a penalty but as Step Two liquidated damages,
the sum stated in the Supplemental General Conditions as Step Two liquidated damages for
each and every partial or total calendar day of delay in Final Completion.
INSPECTION FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION & FINAL COMPLETION
(a) The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing on the Certificate of Partial or Substantial
Completion by the Contractor (Form AC-13.2a), of the date when the Work or designated portion
thereof, will be, in his opinion, substantially complete and ready for inspection and testing to
determine if it has reached Substantial Completion. The notice shall be given at least ten (10) days in
advance of said date and shall be forwarded through the Architect/Engineer, who will attach his
written endorsement as to whether or not he concurs with the Contractor’s statement that the Work
will be ready for inspection and testing on the date given. The Architect/Engineer’s endorsement is a
convenience to the Owner only and shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility in the matter
nor shall the Architect/Engineer’s endorsement be deemed to be evidence that the Work was
substantially complete and ready for inspection and testing. Inspection and testing shall take place at
a time(s) mutually agreeable to the Contractor, Owner and Architect/Engineer.
The inspection shall include a demonstration by the Contractor that all equipment, systems and
operable components of the project function properly and in accordance with the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall furnish access for the inspection and testing as provided in
Section 21 of these General Conditions. The inspection and testing shall determine whether
Substantial Completion has been accomplished and shall result in a written list of unfinished Work
and Defective Work, commonly referred to as a “punch list”, which must be finished and corrected
to obtain Final Completion.
After successful completion of the testing and the Architect/Engineer determines that, in its
opinion, the Work, either in whole or in part, is substantially complete, the Architect/Engineer shall
notify the Owner, in writing on the Certificate of Partial or Substantial Completion by the
Architect/Engineer (Form AC-13.1a), that the Work, or a specified portion thereof, is
recommended to be declared substantially complete. The Owner shall notify the Contractor, in
writing, of the date the Owner accepts the Work, or the specified portion thereof, as substantially
complete or the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the deficiencies to be corrected or completed
before such Work will be accepted as substantially complete.
-51County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(b) The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing on the Certificate of Completion by the
Contractor (Form AC-13.2), of the date when the Work has reached or will reach Final
Completion and will be ready for final inspection and testing. The notice shall be given at least
five (5) days in advance of said date and shall be forwarded through the Architect/Engineer, who
will attach his endorsement as to whether or not he concurs in the Contractor’s statement that the
Work will be ready for inspection and testing on the date given. That inspection and any necessary
testing shall be conducted in the same manner as the inspection for Substantial Completion. When
the Work is finally and totally complete, including the elimination of all defects, the Work shall
be finally accepted by the Owner and final payment shall be made in accordance with Section 36
of these General Conditions.
(c) The Architect/Engineer shall conduct the inspections. The Owner may elect to have other persons
of its choosing also participate in the inspections. If one or more Substantial or Final Completion
reinspections are required, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all costs of reinspection or,
at the Owner’s option, the costs may be deducted from payments due to the Contractor.
(d) A representative of the local Building Official will either be present at the Substantial and Final
Completion inspections or otherwise inspect the completed Work and advise the Owner whether
the Work meets the requirements of the applicable building code(s).
(e) Approval of Work at or as a result of any inspection required herein shall not release the Contractor
or his surety from responsibility for complying with the Contract.
44.
GUARANTEE OF WORK
(a) Except as otherwise specified, all Work shall be, and is hereby, guaranteed by the Contractor
against defects resulting from the use of materials, equipment or workmanship, which are
defective, inferior, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract, for one (1) year from the
date of Final Completion of the entire Project by the Owner. Equipment and facilities which have
seasonal limitations on their operation (e.g. heating or air conditioning units) shall be guaranteed
for one (1) full year from the date of seasonally appropriate tests and acceptance, in writing, by the
Owner. Where the Owner agrees to take Beneficial Occupancy of a portion or phase of the Work
which has been determined to be substantially complete before the entire Work is finally
completed, the guarantees for the materials, equipment and workmanship in that portion or phase
shall begin on the date that the Owner takes Beneficial Occupancy, unless otherwise specified in
the Supplemental General Conditions, Special Conditions, or by separate agreement.
(b) If, within any guarantee period, Work which is not in accordance with the Contract, Defective Work,
or inferior material, equipment or workmanship is noted by the Owner or Architect/Engineer which
requires or renders necessary repairs or changes in connection with the guaranteed Work, the
Contractor shall, promptly upon receipt of notice from the Owner, such notice being given not later
than two weeks after the guarantee period expires, and without expense to the Owner:
(1) Place in satisfactory condition in every particular all of such guaranteed Work and correct all
defects, inferior materials, equipment or workmanship therein;
-52County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(2) Make good all damage to the structure or Site or equipment or contents thereof, which, in the
opinion of the Owner or the Architect/Engineer, is the result of the use of materials,
equipment or workmanship which are inferior, defective or not in accordance with the terms
of the Contract; and
(3) Make good any Work or materials or the equipment and contents of structures and/or Site
disturbance that results from fulfilling the provisions of this Section.
(c) In any case, when in fulfilling the requirements of the Contract and this guarantee or any other
guaranty or warranty, the Contractor disturbs any work performed by a separate contractor, he shall
restore such work to a condition satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer and Owner and guarantee
such restored work to the same extent as if it was guaranteed under this Contract.
(d) If the Contractor, after notice, fails to proceed promptly to comply with the terms of the guarantee
as set forth in this Section, the Owner may have the defects or inferior materials, equipment or
workmanship corrected and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all expense incurred.
(e) All special warranties and guarantees applicable to definite parts of the Work that may be
stipulated in or required by the Contract Documents shall be subject to the terms of this Section
during the first year of the life of such special warranty or guarantee.
(f) The guarantee of this Section shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other warranties, express
or implied, applicable to or arising from this Contract or by law.
(g) Nothing contained in this Section shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect
to any other obligation which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents, including
liability for Detective Work under Section 30. This Section relates only to the specific obligation of
the Contractor as set forth in this Section to correct the Work and does not limit the time within
which his obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor the
time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with
respect to his other obligations under the Contract Documents.
(h) In the event the Work of the Contractor is to be modified by another contractor, either before or
after the Final Inspection provided by Section 43 of the General Conditions, the first Contractor
shall remain responsible in all respects under this Section’s Guarantee of Work and under any other
warranties or guarantees, express or implied, applicable to or arising from this Contract or by law.
However, the Contractor shall not be responsible for any defects in material or workmanship
introduced by the contractor modifying his Work. The first Contractor and the contractor making
the modifications shall each be solely responsible for his respective work. The contractor
modifying the earlier Work shall be responsible for any damage to or defect introduced into the
Work by his modification. If the first contractor claims that a subsequent contractor has introduced
defects of materials and/or workmanship into his Work, it shall be the burden of the contractor
making the claim to demonstrate clearly the nature and extent of such introduced defects and the
other contractor’s responsibility for those defects. Any contractor modifying the work of another
shall have the same burden if he asserts that defects in his work were caused by the contractor
whose work he is modifying.
-53County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
45.
ASSIGNMENTS OF CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS
Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract in whole or any part without the written consent of
the other, nor shall the Contractor assign any monies due or to become due to him hereunder, without the
prior written consent of the Owner. No assignment shall relieve any party from its obligations under the
Contract.
46.
CONTRACTUAL DISPUTES (§2.2-4363, Code of Virginia)
Contractual claims, whether for money or for other relief, shall be submitted, in writing, no later than
sixty (60) days after final payment; however, written notice of the Contractor’s intention to file such
claim must be given at the time of the occurrence or beginning of the Work upon which the claim is
based. The filing of a timely notice is a prerequisite to recovery under this Section. Although the
Contractor may be required to submit certain classes of claims prior to final payment, and the Contractor
is not prevented from filing claims during the pendency of the Work, the Owner shall not be obligated to
render a final written decision on any claim until after final payment. All claims shall be submitted along
with all practically available supporting evidence and documentation.
No written decision denying a claim or addressing issues related to the claim, if rendered prior to final
payment, shall be considered a denial pursuant to this Section unless the written decision makes express
reference to this Section and is signed by the Owner or his designee. The Contractor may not institute
legal action prior to receipt of the Owner’s final written decision on the claim unless the Owner fails to
render such a decision within ninety (90) days of submission of the claim or within ninety (90) days of
final payment, whichever is later.
The decision of the Owner shall be final and conclusive unless the Contractor within six (6) months of
the date of the final decision on a claim, initiates legal action as provided in §2.2-4364 of the Code of
Virginia. Failure of the Owner to render a decision within 90 days shall not result in the Contractor
being awarded the relief claimed nor shall it result in any other relief or penalty. The sole result of the
Owner’s failure to render a decision within 90 days shall be the Contractor’s right to immediately
institute legal action. No administrative appeals procedure pursuant to §2.2-4365 of the Code of
Virginia has been established for contractual claims under this Contract. Venue for any litigation
arising hereunder shall be in the Circuit Court for the County of Albemarle, Virginia.
47.
ASBESTOS
(a) This subsection applies to projects involving existing buildings where asbestos abatement is not a part
of the Work, when the scope of the project has been reviewed and a comprehensive survey
conducted by an individual licensed by the Virginia Department of Professional and Occupational
Regulation to conduct building inspections for asbestos containing materials in buildings, and where
the Owner has attempted to remove or encapsulate all asbestos containing material that may become
friable or damaged during this Project.
-54County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
Prior to commencement of Work, the results of the comprehensive survey or any other asbestos
survey shall be made available to the Contractor, who shall be responsible for performing his Work
so as not to disturb any remaining asbestos, encapsulated or otherwise, identified in such survey or
surveys.
If the Contractor discovers or inadvertently disturbs any material that he knows, should have
known or has reason to believe, may contain asbestos that has not been previously identified, was
overlooked during the removal, was deemed not to be friable or was encapsulated, the Contractor
shall stop Work in the area containing or suspected to contain the asbestos, secure the area, and
notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer immediately by telephone or in person with written
notice as soon as possible. The Owner will have the suspect material sampled.
If the sample is positive and must be disturbed in the course of the Work, the Owner shall have the
material repaired or removed and shall pay for the bulk sample analysis.
Except as provided in §11-4.1 of the Code of Virginia, if the material disturbed is not within the
Contractor’s authorized Work and/or Work area or under this Contract, the Contractor shall pay for
all associated sampling and abatement Costs.
(b) If asbestos abatement is included as a part of the Work, the Contractor shall assure that the asbestos
abatement work is accomplished by those duly licensed as described in Section 3 of these General
Conditions and in accordance with the specific requirements of the Contract and all applicable laws
and regulations.
(c) If asbestos abatement is included as part of the Work, the licensed asbestos Subcontractor shall
obtain the insurance required under Section 11(e) of these General Conditions.
48.
TRAINING, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT
(a) As a part of the Work, the Contractor in conjunction with his Subcontractors and Suppliers shall
provide the Owner’s operations and maintenance personnel with adequate instruction and training
in the proper operation and maintenance of any equipment, systems, and related controls provided
or altered in the Work. The training requirements may be further defined in the specifications.
(b) The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a minimum of two (2) copies of operating,
maintenance and parts manuals for all equipment and systems provided in the Work. Further
specific requirements may be indicated in the specifications.
49.
PROJECT MEETINGS
(a) The intention of this Section is that the Contractor, the Owner and the A/E have timely exchange of
information and cooperate to accomplish the Work as required by the Contract Documents. The
Contractor is responsible for managing the Work, obtaining approvals and requesting clarifications
on a timely, reasonable basis. The Owner and its A/E are responsible for making a reasonable
effort to provide timely responses to the Contractor.
-55County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(b) Preconstruction Meeting:
Prior to the start of construction and no later than 15 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, a
“Preconstruction” meeting shall be held with attendees to include the Owner’s Project Manager and
Project Inspector, the Architect/Engineer’s project manager and representatives of each design
discipline involved in the Project, the Contractor’s project manager and superintendent (and
scheduler, if Contractor desires), and representatives of the Contractor’s major Subcontractors. The
purpose of the meeting is to clarify and discuss the specifics related to, but not limited to, the
following:
(1) Persons involved from each entity and their chain of authority including the names of
persons authorized to sign Change Orders and any limits to their authority.
(2) Names, addresses, telephone numbers and FAX numbers to be used for Requests for
Information (RFI), Requests for Clarification (RFC), Requests for Proposals (RFP), shop
drawings, submittals, and notices.
(3) Contractor’s proposed construction schedule and Owner’s sequencing requirements, if any.
(4) Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form AC-12) requirements and procedures.
(5) Procedures for shop drawings, product data and Submittals.
(6) Procedures for handling Field Orders and Change Order Form AC-11.
(7) Procedures for Contractor’s request for time extension, if any.
(8) Construction Site requirements, procedures and clarifications to include:
- Manner of conducting the Work
- Site specialities such as dust and erosion control, stormwater management, project signs,
clean up and housekeeping, temporary facilities, utilities, security, and traffic
- Safety
- Layout of the Work
- Quality control, testing, inspections and notices required
- Site visits by the A/E and others
- Owner’s Project Inspector duties
- Running Punch List
- As-Built Drawings
(9) Procedures and documentation of differing or unforeseen Site conditions
(10)
Monthly Pay Meeting.
(11)
Project Close-Out requirements and procedures.
(12)
Project records.
-56County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
(d) Monthly Pay Meeting:
Section 36 establishes the requirement for a monthly pay meeting which will usually be held at or
near the Site. In addition to Owner, A/E and Contractor representatives, the following
representatives, at a minimum, should be available to attend portions of the meeting, as applicable
or necessary:
- Owner’s Project Inspector.
- Contractor’s project superintendent.
- A/E representative of each discipline where Work was performed for the current pay request or
where Work is projected to be performed in the coming month.
- A representative of each subcontractor who performed work included in the current pay request.
- A representative of each subcontractor who is projected to perform work in the coming month.
The following topics should be included, as a minimum, in the monthly pay meeting:
(1) Observations of status, quality and workmanship of Work in progress.
(2) Validation of the Schedule of Values and Certificate for payment.
(3) Conformance with proposed construction schedule.
(4) Outstanding Requests for Information, Requests for Clarification and Requests for Proposal.
(5) Submittals with action pending.
(6) Status of pending Change Orders.
(7) Status of Running Punch List items.
(8) Work proposed for coming pay period.
(9) Discussions of any problems or potential problems which need attention.
(e) Other Meetings:
Requirements for other meetings, such as progress meetings, coordination meetings, preinstallation
meetings and/or partnering meetings, may be included in the Contract Documents.
***** END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS *****
-57County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions
(Feb. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
THE COUNTY OF ALBEMARLE and/or THE COUNTY SCHOOL BOARD OF
ALBEMARLE COUNTY, VIRGINIA CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT GENERAL
CONDITIONS (February 1998, Revised October 2001) are modified and supplemented
as hereinafter described.
1.
Section 1 – DEFINITIONS, shall be supplemented by adding the
following: Replace Notice with the following:
Notice: All written notices, including demands, instructions, claims, approvals and
disapprovals, required or authorized under the Contract Documents. Any
written notice by either party to the Contract shall be sufficiently given by any
one or combination of the following, whichever shall first occur: (1) delivered
by hand to the last known business address of the person to whom the notice is
due; (2) delivered by hand to the person’s authorized agent, representative or
officer wherever they may be found; or (3) enclosed in a postage prepaid
envelope addressed to such last known business address and delivered to a
United States Postal Service official or mailbox. Notice is effective upon such
delivery. All notices to the Owner should be directed to the Project Manager.
Notices transmitted by Facsimile (Fax) or Email are acceptable for the
Project. Notices may be transmitted to the Fax number listed in the Contract
and shall have a designated space for the Fax Notice recipient to
acknowledge his receipt by authorized signature and date. The Fax Notice
with authorized signature acknowledging receipt shall be Faxed back to the
sender. Notices may be sent to the Email address(es) as provided by the A/E
and the Project Manager. The Email acknowledging receipt shall be emailed
back to the sender. The Faxed Notice and/or Email shall be effective on the
date it is acknowledged by authorized signature or Email acknowledgement.
All Faxed and Emailed Notices shall also be delivered by hard copy, which
shall be effective upon delivery, as provided herein. Notice shall be effective
upon the date of acknowledgment of the Faxed or Emailed Notice or the date
of delivery, whichever occurs first.
2.
Section 2 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, shall be supplemented by adding the
following:
Replace Paragraph (f) with the following:
(f)
All correspondence, invoices, memoranda, submittals and other documents
related to this Project whether generated by the Owner, the A/E, the Contractor
or others should be identified at the beginning of the document with the Project
Title shown in the Contract. Additional identification such as a job number,
purchase order number or such may also be shown at the Owner’s option.
Supplemental General Conditions
Page 1 of 7
3.
Section 6 – TIME FOR COMPLETION, shall be supplemented by adding the
following:
Replace Paragraph (3) with the following:
(3)
4.
All of the evidence and data supporting the request (including both historical
data and the recordings at the Site during the time of delay) must be
furnished to the Owner before any consideration will be given to the
request. That supporting data shall be submitted by the end of the calendar
month following the month for which the request is made. The submission
must be made on the Cover Sheet of the Certificate of Payment Form AC12. A Change Order prepared in accordance with Change Order
procedures specified in the Contract Documents must be submitted with a
Weather Delay Rectification Form and supporting documentation as
outlined in Section 6 – TIME FOR COMPLETION. Time extensions for
adverse weather-related days granted by the Owner will extend the
Contract Completion Date but will not include additional compensation to
the Contractor. In no manner of interpretation will an adverse weatherrelated time extension be construed to be a compensable delay.
Section 12 – “ALL RISK” BUILDER’S RISK INSURANCE
Delete Paragraphs (a) and (b).
(OR )
5.
Section 12 - “ALL RISK” BUILDER’S RISK INSURANCE Delete
Paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) as written and in its place add the following:
(a)
The requirements of this section of the General Conditions for "all-risk"
builders risk insurance on the full value of the entire building are waived for
this project. The Owner maintains insurance on the existing building (including
fire, vandalism and extended coverage). However, the Contractor shall
provide “all risk” builders risk insurance for the Work in an amount
equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price for the Work.
The loss, if any, is to be made adjustable with and payable to the Owner, in
accordance with its interests, as they may appear. The Owner, its officers,
employees and its agents, shall be named as an additional insured in any policy
of insurance issued. Written evidence of the insurance shall be filed with the
Owner no later than thirty (30) days following the award of the Contract. In the
event of cancellation of this insurance, not less than thirty (30) days prior
written notice must be sent to the Owner. A copy of the policy of insurance
shall be given to the Owner upon demand.
(b)
Not used
Supplemental General Conditions
Page 2 of 7
(c)
The Contractor is responsible for providing any desired coverage for
Contractor's or Subcontractors' buildings, equipment, materials, tools or
supplies that are on-site.
[No change to paragraph (d) as written in the General Conditions.]
6.
Section 16 - INSPECTION, shall be supplemented by adding the following:
Replace Paragraph (b) with the following:
(b) Site inspections, tests conducted on Site or tests of materials gathered on Site,
which the Contract requires to be performed by independent testing entities,
shall be contracted and paid for by the Owner. The Contractor shall schedule all
required tests, approvals and inspections of the Work or other work related to
the Project. The Contractor shall give proper notice to all required parties of
such tests, approvals and inspections, if feasible, the Owner and Others may
timely observe the tests at the normal place of testing. Unless otherwise
required by the Contract Documents, required certificates of testing, approval
or inspection shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the
Owner. Examples of such tests are the testing of cast-in-place concrete,
foundation materials, soil compaction, pile installations, caisson bearings and
steel framing connections. The Contractor shall promptly furnish, without
additional charge, all reasonable facilities, labor and materials necessary and
convenient for making such tests. Except as provided in (d) below, whenever
such examination and testing finds defective materials, equipment or
workmanship, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of
reexamination and retesting. Although conducted by independent testing
entities, the Owner will not contract and pay for tests or certifications of
materials, manufactured products or assemblies which the Contract, codes,
standards, etc., require to be tested and/or certified for compliance with industry
standards such as Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or ASTM. If fees
are charged for such tests and certifications, they shall be paid by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall also pay for all inspections, tests, and
certifications which the Contract specifically requires him to perform or to pay,
together with any inspections and tests which he chooses to perform for his
own purposes, but are not required by the Contract
7.
Section 17 – SUPERINTENDENCE BY CONTRACTOR, shall be supplemented
by adding the following:
Replace Paragraph (a) with the following:
(a)
The Contractor shall have a competent foreman or superintendent,
satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, on the Site at all times
during the Time for Completion of the Work. The superintendent or foreman
shall be familiar with and be able to read and understand the plans and
specifications, and be capable of communicating orally and in writing with the
Owner’s Project Manager and the Contractor’s workers. The Contractor shall
Supplemental General Conditions
Page 3 of 7
be responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and
procedures, for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract except
where otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, and for all safety and
worker health programs and practices. The Contractor shall notify the Owner,
in writing, of any proposed change in superintendent, including the reason
therefore, prior to making such change.
8.
Section 19 – SCHEDULE OF THE WORK, shall be supplemented by adding the
following:
Replace Paragraph (a) (1) & (2) with the following:
(1)
For Contracts with a price of $250,000 or less, a bar graph schedule will satisfy
the above requirement. The schedule shall indicate the estimated starting and
completion dates for each major element of the work. See (b) below.
(2)
For Contracts with a price over $250,000, a Critical Path Method (CPM)
schedule shall be utilized to control the planning and scheduling of the
Work. The CPM schedule shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and
shall be paid for by the Contractor. See (c) below.
9.
Section 20 – SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT,
shall be supplemented by adding the following:
Replace Paragraph (a) with the following:
(a)
Before submittal of the first partial payment request under the Contract, the Contractor
shall prepare for review and approval of the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, a
schedule of the estimated values using the Divisions of Construction as listed in the
Project Manual Specifications. The Divisions will be further broken down into the
following headings, which may result in divisions being used multiple times, as
required in each heading:
(1) SITEWORK
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Erosion and Sediment Control
Demolition
Earthwork
Surfacing and Incidental Construction
Water Distribution System
Storm Sewer System
Wastewater Piping Systems
Chain Link Fence and Gates
Seeding
(2)
DRIP IRRIGATION SYSTEM
(3)
PACKAGE WASTEWATER TREATMENT SYSTEM, including tanks.
(4)
CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS
Supplemental General Conditions
Page 4 of 7
(5)
PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDING SYSTEM
(6)
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
(7)
ELECTRICAL
(8)
MOBILIZATION
In addition to the divisions and headings in the abovementioned paragraph, the
estimated values will be further broken down into Labor and Materials, so that the
total of all the values equals the Contract Price. Where the total project has multiple
parts or phases, the Contractor shall prepare appropriate schedules of values to
facilitate reviews and justifications for payments. All requests for payment shall be
made on the Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form AC-12).
Succeeding pages may be on the Form AC-12 continuation sheets or a computerized
spreadsheet which is in the same format and which contains the same information.
10.
Section 23 – PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS, shall be supplemented by adding
the following paragraph:
(i) Close-out and Operations and Maintenance Documents: Upon completion of
the Work and prior to final payment, the Contractor shall deliver to the
Architect/Engineer, two complete hard copy sets of the Close-out and
Operations and Maintenance Documents as specified in the Project Manual
Specifications. Additionally, the Contractor will provide two CDs or other
acceptably formatted electronic copy of the abovementioned documents to
accompany the hard copy versions. The electronic version will be organized
with folders and appropriate hierarchy as to represent the hard copy
versions. The documentation found on the electronic version will be in PDF
format, or other acceptable format as directed by the Owner.
11.
Section 38 – CHANGES IN THE WORK, shall be supplemented by adding the
following paragraph:
(4) By using Estimate for Change Order Forms GC-1, SC-1 and SS-1, respectively,
the Contractor will present to the Owner, an accurate, itemized account of the
cost of the change in the Work, including, but not limited to, the costs of labor,
materials, equipment, and supplies; and to annotate a copy of the Project
schedule to accurately show the status of the Work at the time this initial
change order is issued, to show the start and finish of the changed Work, and
the status of the Work when the changed Work is completed. A Change Order
citing this subsection shall describe the parameters of the change in the Work,
describe the cost items to be itemized and verified for payment, address the
impact on the schedule for Substantial Completion, and state that a subsequent
Change Order will be issued to incorporate the cost of the changed Work into
the Contract Price and any change in the Contract Time for Completion or
Supplemental General Conditions
Page 5 of 7
Contract Completion Date. The Contractor shall sign the Change Order
acknowledging he has been directed to proceed with the changed Work.
Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by the Owner, such costs shall
not exceed those prevailing for the trades or crafts, materials, and equipment in
the locality of the Project, may include only those items listed as allowable in
Subsection 38(e), and shall not include any of the costs listed as not allowable
in Subsection 38(f). The Owner shall be permitted, on a daily basis, to verify
such records and may require such additional records as are necessary to
determine the cost of the change to the Work. Within fourteen (14) days of the
conclusion of such ordered Work, the Contractor and the Owner shall arrive at
a cost for the Change Order, based on the records kept and the Contractor’s
allowance for overhead and profit as set forth in Subsections (d), (e) and (f)
below, and such costs shall be incorporated into a Change Order which
references the Change Order ordering the Work. If agreement on the cost of
the changed Work cannot be reached within the fourteen (14) days allotted, the
Contractor may file a claim for the disputed amount as provided for in Section
46.
12. Section 42 - DAMAGES FOR DELAY, EXTENSION OF TIME, shall be
supplemented by adding the following paragraphs:
(i)
It is imperative that the Work in this contract be substantially completed not
later than
(date)
to give time for the Owner to furnish and equip
the facility and meet other contractual obligations. The Contractor represents
and agrees that he has taken into account in his bid the requirements of the
bid documents, the location, the time allowed for the Work, local conditions,
availability of materials, equipment, and labor, and any other factors which
may affect performance of the Work. The Contractor agrees and warrants
that he will achieve substantial completion of the Work not later than
(date) .
(1) Assuming timely execution of the Contract with applicable Bonds,
Notice to Proceed will be given to the Contractor no later than
(date)
.
(j)
Subject to the provisions of the General Conditions allowing for extension
of time allowed for completion of the Work, if the work is not substantially
completed by the specified date, the Contractor shall owe to the Owner, not
as a penalty but as liquidated damages, the sum of One Thousand Dollars
($1,000.00) per day for each and every calendar day for delay in substantial
completion of the Work beyond
(date)
. Likewise, if the Work is
not finally completed by the specified date, the Contractor shall owe to the
Owner, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages, the sum of
hundred dollars ($
) per day for each and every calendar day of
delay in final completion of the Work.
Supplemental General Conditions
Page 6 of 7
(k)
The Owner may withhold from the monthly Progress Payment, the current
value of the liquidated damages. Failure of the Owner to withhold
liquidated damages during ongoing operations that have exceeded the
Contract Completion Date is not a waiver of the Owner’s entitlement to
damages as set forth in the Contract Documents.
(l)
Final accounting of liquidated damages will be administered through a
deduction in the final amount owed the Contractor, as reflected in the
Cover Sheet of the Certificate of Payment Form AC-12.
Supplemental General Conditions
Page 7 of 7
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
ALBEMARLE COUNTY PUBLIC SCHOOLS
1.
Worker Standards of Conduct/Dress – Hard hats, safety shoes, appropriate shirts
and pants are required at all times. Smoking is prohibited on school property. There
is to be no contact or harassment of any kind between workers, teachers and
students. Only the project superintendent may contact the school staff if necessary.
Violence, Swearing, Drugs, Alcohol, Firearms and Weapons are prohibited on
school property. Any workers violating these standards of conduct shall be ordered
off the site and not allowed to return.
2.
Workers shall wear identification indicating the company that employs them while
working in an occupied school, even during summer months.
3.
Drawings and/or Specifications – Any Additional Instructions by Architect/Owner
to explain drawing and specifications shall be binding on Contractor.
4.
The Contractor (or his designated sub-contractor) shall obtain and pay the fees for
all permits necessary for the construction of the project, unless specifically stated
otherwise. The Owner will pay for the County Building Permit fees, and the
Contractor shall obtain the permits. The Owner will pay for water and sewer
connection fees, and the contractor shall obtain the permit. The Contractor shall pay
for the tapping fee whether done by himself or pay the Service Authority to make
tap. Fees for all bonds (excluding erosion control bonds) will be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to
determine which permits are necessary. The Owner will pay for the permanent
connection to franchised utility companies, electric service, and gas service. The
Contractor shall coordinate and schedule all permanent utility service work.
Virginia Stormwater Management Program (VSMP) General Permit: Contractor to
prepare stormwater pollution prevention plan, secure VSMP Phase 1 Land Clearing
General Permit and Pay Permit Application Fee to Department of Environmental
Quality (DEQ). Contact DEQ – Richmond for additional information. Telephone
Number: (804) 698-4000.
5.
Regarding asbestos work, the general contractor shall be responsible for submitting
any required notices to all appropriate regulatory agencies, and shall do so within
the required timeframe.
6.
Contractor’s staging area, protective barriers and safety fencing, employee parking,
loading access and stockpiling of soils shall be as shown on the plans or as
approved by Owner.
7.
Contractor’s staging area and general construction site shall be kept neat and clean
so that grass is cut and debris and trash is removed on a weekly basis if not more
frequently.
School Special Conditions-June 2007
Page 1 of 3
8.
Safe access to the designated areas adjacent to the construction area must be
maintained at all times for pedestrians and maintenance vehicles.
9. Liquidated Damages: Shall be in accordance with the Supplementary General
Conditions.
10. Section 01400 – General Requirements, Paragraph 1.8 Progress Meetings and County
of Albemarle Construction Contract General Conditions, Section 24 Submittals are
to include the following:
1)
Bi-Monthly Job-Site meetings
2)
The Contractor’s project superintendent shall provide the Architect and Owner
with copies of his daily report on a weekly basis including manpower per
trade, job progress, weather and activities.
11. Application for Payment and payments shall be delayed when project is not in
compliance with Erosion Control Plan, permits, or any related instructions given by
Owner. Lack of Project Cleanliness may also delay payment. Weekly broom
cleaning required for interior renovations.
12. The Contractor shall coordinate all construction operations and deliveries with the
school activity schedule. When school is in session, deliveries to the construction
site shall not be allowed between the hours 8:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m.
13. The Contractor shall allow for 5 days when work will be prohibited for student
special testing in the school. These dates will be confirmed at the Pre-Construction
meeting.
14. Contractors Work within the Existing and Functioning School Area shall be limited
to when school is not in session (i.e. during summertime and/or after hours).
Excessively noisy work or work producing noxious fumes adjacent to classrooms in
session may also be subject to work after regular hours.
15. Hours of work will be limited for projects with exterior work areas, noisy loading or
unloading, and work with close neighbors who could be adversely effected.
16. At the completion of the project and before the Final Application for Payment will
be approved, Contractor shall provide the Owner written statement certifying that
the work is asbestos free.
17. UL Labels are required on all electrical and mechanical equipment. If unlabeled
equipment is delivered to the job site, Contractors shall remove and replace with
properly labeled equipment or shall pay for UL field testing to properly label prior
to payment being made such equipment.
18. Testing/Special Inspections - Owner shall obtain and pay for testing and special
inspections services. The Contractor shall pay for any required re-testing due to
School Special Conditions-June 2007
Page 2 of 3
failed initial tests. Special Inspectors instructions shall be binding on the Contractor.
Contractor shall call the testing company designated by the Owner and coordinate
any special inspections. Contractor shall provide the Special Inspector with any
necessary equipment, such as ladders, scaffolding, etc. for inspection purposes. At the
completion of the project and before the Final Application for Payment will be
approved, all deficiencies on any special inspection reports, shall be remedied.
19.
Building Inspections Department – The Contractor shall call for inspections in
accordance with the local department’s procedures or by no later than 4 p.m. the
day prior the inspection is requested.
20.
Building security is the responsibility of the Contractor until final acceptance.
21.
The Contractor shall provide approved, framed, operating and maintenance
instruction, wiring diagrams and control diagrams as applicable:
Drip Irrigation System
Package Wastewater Treatment Plant
Any other items or systems required but not specifically listed.
22.
Constructor to provide comprehensive training and equipment demonstration for
the Owner’s designated representatives and the Contractor shall schedule at least 2
weeks in advance for Owner’s coordination review and approval.
23.
Cleaning during construction: Areas of work shall be cleaned broom clean at least
weekly to minimize tracking dirt; Owners existing equipment and facility shall be
protected from dust, splash or splatter and cleaned or replaced to return to preconstruction conditions.
24.
Final Cleaning to be performed to the Owner’s satisfaction. If unsatisfactory
cleaning is not remedied within 24 hour written notice to Contractor from Owner,
Owner shall complete and deduct from Contractor’s final payment.
*** END OF SPECIAL CONDITIONS ***
School Special Conditions-June 2007
Page 3 of 3
CONTRACT
BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
This Contract dated this ____ day of ___________ , 20__, is between ______________
(“Owner”), and _______________________ (“Contractor”), and is binding among and between
these parties as of the date of the Owner’s signature.
RECITALS
1. The legal address for the Owner and for the Contractor and the addresses for
delivery of Notices and other project documents are as follows:
Owner:
Attention:
Address:
City, State, Zip:
Telephone:
The County School Board of Albemarle County, Virginia
Purchasing Office, Room 248
401 McIntire Road
Charlottesville, Virginia 22902
(434) 296-5854
Contractor:
Attention:
Address:
City, State, Zip:
Telephone:
FAX:
Contractor’s Virginia License #: _______________ FEIN/SSN: __________
2. The Project is identified as:
Project Title: ___________________________________
IFB #
General Project Description: The project is generally described as:
The Project Title and Number indicated above are required to be shown for identification
purposes on all project-related material and documents including, but not limited to, Notices,
Change Orders, Submittals, Requests for Information, Requests for Quotes, Field Orders,
minutes of meetings, correspondence, Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment, test
reports and related material.
Form AC-9 (March 1998; Rev. Oct. 2001; Rev. Nov 2009)
3. After competitive sealed bidding pursuant to the Virginia Public Procurement Act,
Contractor is awarded this Contract to perform the Work described by the Contract Documents
for the above-described project (“the Project”).
THEREFORE, in consideration of the Recitals set forth above, and good and valuable
consideration as set forth below, the parties agree as follows:
1. STATEMENT OF WORK: The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and
materials and perform all Work for the Project, including all work described in the Bid Form as
Base Bid [and reference accepted alternates if applicable], in strict accordance with the Contract
Documents.
2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: This Contract shall consist of the following:
- this Contract Between Owner and Contractor;
- the Bid Form submitted by the Contractor;
- the County of Albemarle Construction Contract General Conditions, latest revision;
- the Supplemental General Conditions, if any;
- the Special Conditions attached to the Owner’s Invitation for Bids;
- the Owner’s Project Plans and Specifications dated ________ ; and modifications
shown as Addenda
.
All of these documents are incorporated herein by reference.
3. TIME FOR COMPLETION: The Work shall be commenced on a date to be
specified in a written order of the Owner and shall be Substantially Completed within __
calendar days or not later than the Contract Completion Date which is ___________________ .
The Work shall be finally completed within 30 days after the date of Substantial Completion of
the Work.
4. COMPENSATION TO BE PAID TO THE CONTRACTOR: The Owner agrees
to pay and the Contractor agrees to accept as just and adequate compensation for the performance
of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents the sum of
_____ ($
).
This Contract is subject to annual funding by the Board of Supervisors of the County of
Albemarle, Virginia, for services and work specified hereunder. In the event the Board of
Supervisors fails to appropriate funds necessary to perform the services and work specified in
this Contract and other contract documents, this Contract shall be deemed cancelled, with no
penalty to the County, and of no effect, provided notice of such cancellation is given to the
Contractor within thirty (30) days of the Board of Supervisors final approval of the annual
County budget. In the event that this Contract is cancelled for the reasons set forth in this
paragraph, the Contractor will be reimbursed for the value of all work performed or services
rendered as of the date of cancellation in accordance with the General Conditions.
Form AC-9 (March 1998; Rev. Oct. 2001; Rev. Nov 2009)
5. PAYMENTS: The procedures for establishing a Schedule of Values for the Work,
for requesting monthly progress payments for Work in place, and for requesting payments for
properly stored materials are stated in the General Conditions. Unless otherwise provided under
the Contract Documents, interest on payments due the Contractor shall accrue at the rate of one
percent per month. §2.2-4354(4) of the Code of Virginia.
6. CONTRACTUAL CLAIMS: Any contractual claims shall be submitted in
accordance with the contractual dispute procedures set forth in Section 46 of the General
Conditions and the supplemental instructions or procedures, if any, attached to this Contract.
7. NON-DISCRIMINATION: §2.2-4311 of the Code of Virginia applies to this
contract (see Section 4 of the General Conditions).
8. IMMIGRATION REFORM AND CONTROL ACT OF 1986: §2.2-4311.1 of the
Code of Virginia applies to this contract: Contractor does not, and shall not during the
performance of the Contract for this project knowingly employ an unauthorized alien as defined
in the federal Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986.
9. PROHIBITION OF ALCOHOL AND OTHER DRUGS: §2.2-4312 of the Code
of Virginia applies to this contract (see Section 5 of the General Conditions).
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto on the day and year written below
have executed this agreement in three (3) counterparts, each of which shall, without proof or
accountancy for the other counterparts, be deemed an original thereof.
CONTRACTOR
OWNER
By:
By:
(Signature in ink)
(Date)
(Signature in ink)
(Date)
Name: ____________________________________ Name: ___________________________
Title:
Title:
ATTEST __________________________________ ATTEST___________________________
(Signature)
(Date)
(Signature)
(Date)
Attachments:
Bid Form submitted by Contractor
Form AC-9 (March 1998; Rev. Oct. 2001; Rev. Nov 2009)
POST BID MODIFICATION
DATE:
PROJECT TITLE:
IFB NO.:
OWNER:
CONTRACTOR:
As allowed by Section 12(c) of the Instructions to Bidders and by §2.2-4318, Code of
Virginia, negotiations were conducted with the lowest responsive and responsible bidder,
, hereinafter called the Contractor. The following clarifications, amendments,
deletions, revisions, substitutions, and/or modifications to the Contract Documents were
made along with corresponding adjustments in the Contractor’s bid amount for furnishing
all labor and materials and performing all work necessary for construction of this project
in accordance with the modified contract documents:
Item
Amount
END OF POST BID MODIFICATION
Form AC-9b (Aug. 1998, Rev. Oct. 2001)
STANDARD PERFORMANCE BOND
FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENT: That __________________________________ , the
Contractor (“Principal”) whose principal place of business is located at ___________________
____________________________________and ________________________________(“Surety”)
are held and firmly bound unto the County of Albemarle, Virginia, and/or The County School Board of
Albemarle County, Virginia, the Owner (“Obligee”) in the amount of ____________________
____________________________________Dollars ($
), for the payment whereof
Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,
jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS,
Principal has by written agreement dated _____________________ , _______, entered into a
contract with Obligee for ________________________________________________________
which contract (the “Contract”) is by reference expressly made a part hereof;
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if the
Principal shall promptly and faithfully perform said Contract in strict conformity with the plans,
specifications and conditions of the Contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it
shall remain in full force and effect.
Provided, that any alterations which may be made in the terms of the Contract, or in the Work to
be done under it, or the giving by the Obligee of any extension of the time for the performance of the
Contract, or any other alterations, extensions or forbearance on the part of either or both of the Obligee or
the Principal to the other shall not in any way release the Principal and the Surety, or either of them, their
heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns from their liability hereunder, notice to the Surety
of any such alterations, extension, or forbearance being hereby waived.
No action shall be brought on this bond unless brought within one year after: (a) completion of
the Contract and all Work thereunder, including expiration of all warranties and guarantees, or (b)
discovery of the defect or breach of warranty or guarantee if the action be for such.
The Surety represents to the Principal and to the Obligee that it is legally authorized to do
business in the Commonwealth of Virginia.
Signed and sealed this _________ day of
Form AC-10 (February 1998)
,
.
Page 1 of 2
PRINCIPAL
BY:
(Please sign above and print name below)
TITLE:
ADDRESS:
PHONE:
SURETY (Must be signed by a Virginia Resident Agent of Surety)
BY:
(Please sign above and print name below)
ADDRESS:
PHONE:
BOND NO.:
ADDRESS OF SURETY’S HOME OFFICE:
Approved as to Form:
County Attorney
Form AC-10 (February 1998)
Date
Page 2 of 2
STANDARD LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENT: That __________________________________ , the
Contractor (“Principal”) whose principal place of business is located at ___________________
____________________________________and ________________________________(“Surety”)
are held and firmly bound unto the County of Albemarle, Virginia, and/or The County School Board of
Albemarle County, Virginia, the Owner (“Obligee”) in the amount of ____________________
____________________________________ Dollars ($
), for the payment whereof
Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,
jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS,
Principal has by written agreement dated _____________________ , _______ , entered into a
contract with Obligee for ________________________________________________________
which contract (the “Contract”) is by reference expressly made a part hereof;
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if the
Principal shall promptly make payment to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for labor performed
and material furnished in the prosecution of the Work provided for in the Contract, then this
obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect, subject, however, to the
following conditions.
The Principal and Surety, jointly and severally, hereby agree with Obligee as follows:
1.
A claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the Principal or with a subcontractor
of the Principal for labor, material, or both for use in the performance of the Contract. A
“subcontractor” of the Principal, for the purposes of this bond only, includes not only those
subcontractors having a direct contractual relationship with the Principal, but also any other
contractor who undertakes to participate in the Work which the Principal is to perform under
the aforesaid Contract, whether there are one or more intervening subcontractors contractually
positioned between it and the Principal (for example, a subcontractor). “Labor” and “material”
shall include, but not be limited to, public utility services and reasonable rentals of equipment,
but only for periods when the equipment rented is actually used at the work site.
2.
Subject to the provisions of paragraph 3, any claimant who has performed labor or furnished
material in accordance with the Contract documents in the prosecution of the Work provided in
the Contract, who has not been paid in full therefor before the expiration of ninety (90) days
after the day on which such claimant performed the last of such labor or furnished the last of
Form AC-10.1 (February 1998)
Page 1 of 3
such materials for which he claims payment, may bring an action on this bond to recover any
amount due him for such labor or material, and may prosecute such action to final judgment
and have execution on the judgment. The Obligee need not be a party to such action and shall
not be liable for the payment of any costs, fees or expenses of any such suit.
3.
Any claimant who has a direct contractual relationship with any subcontractor of the Principal
from whom the Principal has not required a subcontractor payment bond, but who has no
contractual relationship, express or implied, with the Principal, may bring an action on this
bond only if he has given written notice to the Principal within one hundred eighty (180) days
from the day on which the claimant performed the last of the labor or furnished the last of the
materials for which he claims payment, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed
and the name of the person for whom the Work was performed or to whom the material was
furnished. Notice to the Principal shall be served by registered or certified mail, postage
prepaid, in an envelope addressed to the Principal at any place where his office is regularly
maintained for the transaction of business. Claims for sums withheld as retainages with respect
to labor performed or materials furnished shall not be subject to the time limitations stated in
this paragraph 3.
4.
No suit or action shall be commenced hereunder by any claimant;
5.
a.
Unless brought within one year after the day on which the person bringing such action
last performed labor or last furnished or supplied materials, it being understood,
however, that if any limitation embodied in this bond is prohibited by any law
controlling the construction hereof, the limitation embodied within this bond shall be
deemed to be amended so as to be equal to the minimum period of limitation permitted
by such law.
b.
Other than in a Virginia court of competent jurisdiction, with venue as provided by
statute, or in the United States District Court for the district in which the project, or any
part thereof is situated.
The amount of this bond shall be reduced by and to the extent of any payment or payments
made in good faith hereunder.
Signed and sealed this _________ day of
Form AC-10.1 (February 1998)
,
.
Page 2 of 3
PRINCIPAL
BY:
(Please sign above and print name below)
TITLE:
ADDRESS:
PHONE:
SURETY (Must be signed by a Virginia Resident Agent of Surety)
BY:
(Please sign above and print name below)
ADDRESS:
PHONE:
BOND NO.:
ADDRESS OF SURETY’S HOME OFFICE:
Approved as to Form:
County Attorney
Form AC-10.1 (February 1998)
Date
Page 3 of 3
CONTRACT CHANGE
ORDER
Change Order Number:
Date:
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
Project Title:
0
RFQ/Contract No.: 0
CHANG
E
DESCRI
PTION
TO:
Gentlemen:
Under your contract dated January 0, 1900 for work on the project shown above, you are hereby
authorized to make the following changes:
This Change Order will
add to
deduct from the Contract Price, in accordance with the Contract
Documents, the sum of
/100 dollars
There will be an extension of
days for contract completion. The contract completion date will now be
January 0, 1900
. By signing this Change Order, the Contractor agrees to release and waive any and
all claims related to this Change Order.
(Failure to include a change for time shall waive any change to the time allowed by the Contract for completion
of the Work unless the parties mutually agree in writing to postpone a determination of the change to time
resulting from the Change Order. Such determination may not be postponed more than 45 days from the
approval of this Change Order by the Owner.)
CONTRACT COST SUMMARY
(Show information on Contract Summary sheet)
AMOUNT OF
ORIGINAL CONTRACT
$0.00
TOTAL
ADDITIONS
+
$0.00
TOTAL
DEDUCTIONS
-
$0.00
AMOUNT OF
CONTRACT TO DATE
=
$0.00
CHANGE AUTHORIZATION
Issued By:
Architect/Engineer
Approved By:
Date
Accepted By:
Contractor
Form AC-11 (May 2010)
Date
County of Albemarle, Virginia
and/or The County School Board
of Albemarle County, Virginia
Date
GENERAL CONTRACTOR ESTIMATE FOR CHANGE ORDER
GC-1
DGS-30-200
(Rev. 09/04)
Project Code:
Agency:
Project:
General Contractor:
Change Description:
GENERAL CONTRACTOR DIRECT COSTS
Scope Description
Direct Labor
Item
No.
Description
Quantity
Qty
Units
A
B
C
D
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
1.06
1.07
1.08
1.09
Subtotal from Estimate Continuation Sheets
1.97
1.98
Subtotal (S/T) Direct Costs:
Taxes/Insurance:
1.99
Total Direct Costs
Direct Labor
Hourly Wage
Hours
Total Direct
Rate, Excl.
Per Unit
Labor Hours Taxes & Ins.
E
FICA, FUI, SUI, & Workmens' Comp. at
SUBCONTRACT COSTS
Item
No.
A
Subcontractor Name
(List totals from attached SC-1 forms)
B
Total Subcontract Costs
G
H=FxG
$0.00
Material
Cost
Per Unit
I
Direct Equipment
Total
Material
Cost
Equipment
Cost
Per Unit
J=CxI
$0.00
K
Total
Cost
C
$0.00
Item
No.
Total
Equipment
Cost
L=CxK
$0.00
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
Subtotal Labor
% of Item 1.97H =
$0.00 Subtotal Mat'l
$0.00 Sales Tax @ 5.3%
$0.00 Subtotal Equip.
$0.00 Sales Tax @ 5.3%
$0.00
$0.00
Total Labor
$0.00
Total Mat'l
Total Equip.
$0.00
$0.00
Submitted By
SUMMARY
2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
2.05
2.06
2.07
2.08
2.09
2.99
F=CxE
0.00
Direct Material
Total
Labor
Cost
3.01
3.02
Description
Total Direct Labor Cost
Total Direct Material Cost
Item 1.99H
Item 1.99J
Total Cost
$0.00
3.03
3.04
3.05
3.06
3.07
3.08
3.09
3.10
Total Equipment Cost
Item 1.99L
Subtotal
3.01+3.02+3.03
Overhead and Profit
15% x Item 3.04
Subtotal
3.04+3.05
Subcontractor Cost
Item 2.99
GC Markup on Subcontractor10% x Item 3.07
Subtotal
3.06+3.07+3.08
Additional Bond Cost
$0.00
3.99
Total Change Order Cost
$0.00
(3.09+3.10)
$0.00
Name:
Signature:
$0.00
$0.00
T
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
D
i
I have reviewed the costs proposed and find
at
them to be reasonable (as proposed) (as marked).
$0.00
A/E Signature: tl
ee
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
THE COUNTY OF ALBEMARLE and/or THE COUNTY SCHOOL BOARD OF
ALBEMARLE COUNTY, VIRGINIA CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT GENERAL
CONDITIONS (February 1998, Revised October 2001) are modified and supplemented
as hereinafter described.
1.
Section 1 – DEFINITIONS, shall be supplemented by adding the
following: Replace Notice with the following:
Notice: All written notices, including demands, instructions, claims, approvals and
disapprovals, required or authorized under the Contract Documents. Any
written notice by either party to the Contract shall be sufficiently given by any
one or combination of the following, whichever shall first occur: (1) delivered
by hand to the last known business address of the person to whom the notice is
due; (2) delivered by hand to the person’s authorized agent, representative or
officer wherever they may be found; or (3) enclosed in a postage prepaid
envelope addressed to such last known business address and delivered to a
United States Postal Service official or mailbox. Notice is effective upon such
delivery. All notices to the Owner should be directed to the Project Manager.
Notices transmitted by Facsimile (Fax) or Email are acceptable for the
Project. Notices may be transmitted to the Fax number listed in the Contract
and shall have a designated space for the Fax Notice recipient to
acknowledge his receipt by authorized signature and date. The Fax Notice
with authorized signature acknowledging receipt shall be Faxed back to the
sender. Notices may be sent to the Email address(es) as provided by the A/E
and the Project Manager. The Email acknowledging receipt shall be emailed
back to the sender. The Faxed Notice and/or Email shall be effective on the
date it is acknowledged by authorized signature or Email acknowledgement.
All Faxed and Emailed Notices shall also be delivered by hard copy, which
shall be effective upon delivery, as provided herein. Notice shall be effective
upon the date of acknowledgment of the Faxed or Emailed Notice or the date
of delivery, whichever occurs first.
2.
Section 2 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, shall be supplemented by adding the
following:
Replace Paragraph (f) with the following:
(f)
3.
All correspondence, invoices, memoranda, submittals and other documents
related to this Project whether generated by the Owner, the A/E, the Contractor
or others should be identified at the beginning of the document with the Project
Title shown in the Contract. Additional identification such as a job number,
purchase order number or such may also be shown at the Owner’s option.
Section 6 – TIME FOR COMPLETION, shall be supplemented by adding the
Supplemental General Conditions
Page 1 of 7
following:
Replace Paragraph (3) with the following:
(3)
4.
All of the evidence and data supporting the request (including both historical
data and the recordings at the Site during the time of delay) must be
furnished to the Owner before any consideration will be given to the
request. That supporting data shall be submitted by the end of the calendar
month following the month for which the request is made. The submission
must be made on the Cover Sheet of the Certificate of Payment Form AC12. A Change Order prepared in accordance with Change Order
procedures specified in the Contract Documents must be submitted with a
Weather Delay Rectification Form and supporting documentation as
outlined in Section 6 – TIME FOR COMPLETION. Time extensions for
adverse weather-related days granted by the Owner will extend the
Contract Completion Date but will not include additional compensation to
the Contractor. In no manner of interpretation will an adverse weatherrelated time extension be construed to be a compensable delay.
Section 12 – “ALL RISK” BUILDER’S RISK INSURANCE
Delete Paragraphs (a) and (b).
(OR )
5.
Section 12 - “ALL RISK” BUILDER’S RISK INSURANCE Delete
Paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) as written and in its place add the following:
(a)
The requirements of this section of the General Conditions for "all-risk"
builders risk insurance on the full value of the entire building are waived for
this project. The Owner maintains insurance on the existing building (including
fire, vandalism and extended coverage). However, the Contractor shall
provide “all risk” builders risk insurance for the Work in an amount
equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price for the Work.
The loss, if any, is to be made adjustable with and payable to the Owner, in
accordance with its interests, as they may appear. The Owner, its officers,
employees and its agents, shall be named as an additional insured in any policy
of insurance issued. Written evidence of the insurance shall be filed with the
Owner no later than thirty (30) days following the award of the Contract. In the
event of cancellation of this insurance, not less than thirty (30) days prior
written notice must be sent to the Owner. A copy of the policy of insurance
shall be given to the Owner upon demand.
(b)
Not used
(c)
The Contractor is responsible for providing any desired coverage for
Contractor's or Subcontractors' buildings, equipment, materials, tools or
supplies that are on-site.
Supplemental General Conditions
Page 2 of 7
[No change to paragraph (d) as written in the General Conditions.]
6.
Section 16 - INSPECTION, shall be supplemented by adding the following:
Replace Paragraph (b) with the following:
(b) Site inspections, tests conducted on Site or tests of materials gathered on Site,
which the Contract requires to be performed by independent testing entities,
shall be contracted and paid for by the Owner. The Contractor shall schedule all
required tests, approvals and inspections of the Work or other work related to
the Project. The Contractor shall give proper notice to all required parties of
such tests, approvals and inspections, if feasible, the Owner and Others may
timely observe the tests at the normal place of testing. Unless otherwise
required by the Contract Documents, required certificates of testing, approval
or inspection shall be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the
Owner. Examples of such tests are the testing of cast-in-place concrete,
foundation materials, soil compaction, pile installations, caisson bearings and
steel framing connections. The Contractor shall promptly furnish, without
additional charge, all reasonable facilities, labor and materials necessary and
convenient for making such tests. Except as provided in (d) below, whenever
such examination and testing finds defective materials, equipment or
workmanship, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of
reexamination and retesting. Although conducted by independent testing
entities, the Owner will not contract and pay for tests or certifications of
materials, manufactured products or assemblies which the Contract, codes,
standards, etc., require to be tested and/or certified for compliance with industry
standards such as Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or ASTM. If fees
are charged for such tests and certifications, they shall be paid by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall also pay for all inspections, tests, and
certifications which the Contract specifically requires him to perform or to pay,
together with any inspections and tests which he chooses to perform for his
own purposes, but are not required by the Contract
7.
Section 17 – SUPERINTENDENCE BY CONTRACTOR, shall be supplemented
by adding the following:
Replace Paragraph (a) with the following:
(a)
The Contractor shall have a competent foreman or superintendent,
satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, on the Site at all times
during the Time for Completion of the Work. The superintendent or foreman
shall be familiar with and be able to read and understand the plans and
specifications, and be capable of communicating orally and in writing with the
Owner’s Project Manager and the Contractor’s workers. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and
procedures, for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract except
where otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, and for all safety and
Supplemental General Conditions
Page 3 of 7
worker health programs and practices. The Contractor shall notify the
Owner, in writing, of any proposed change in superintendent, including the
reason therefore, prior to making such change.
8.
Section 19 – SCHEDULE OF THE WORK, shall be supplemented by adding the
following:
Replace Paragraph (a) (1) & (2) with the following:
(1)
For Contracts with a price of $250,000 or less, a bar graph schedule will satisfy
the above requirement. The schedule shall indicate the estimated starting and
completion dates for each major element of the work. See (b) below.
(2)
For Contracts with a price over $250,000, a Critical Path Method (CPM)
schedule shall be utilized to control the planning and scheduling of the
Work. The CPM schedule shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and
shall be paid for by the Contractor. See (c) below.
9.
Section 20 – SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT,
shall be supplemented by adding the following:
Replace Paragraph (a) with the following:
(a)
Before submittal of the first partial payment request under the Contract, the Contractor
shall prepare for review and approval of the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, a
schedule of the estimated values using the Divisions of Construction as listed in the
Project Manual Specifications. The Divisions will be further broken down into the
following headings, which may result in divisions being used multiple times, as
required in each heading:
(1) SITEWORK
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Erosion and Sediment Control
Demolition
Earthwork
Surfacing and Incidental Construction
Water Distribution System
Storm Sewer System
Wastewater Piping Systems
Chain Link Fence and Gates
Seeding
(2)
DRIP IRRIGATION SYSTEM
(3)
PACKAGE WASTEWATER TREATMENT SYSTEM, including tanks.
(4)
CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS
(5)
PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDING SYSTEM
(6)
CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
Supplemental General Conditions
Page 4 of 7
(7)
ELECTRICAL
(8)
MOBILIZATION
In addition to the divisions and headings in the abovementioned paragraph, the
estimated values will be further broken down into Labor and Materials, so that the
total of all the values equals the Contract Price. Where the total project has multiple
parts or phases, the Contractor shall prepare appropriate schedules of values to
facilitate reviews and justifications for payments. All requests for payment shall be
made on the Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form AC-12).
Succeeding pages may be on the Form AC-12 continuation sheets or a computerized
spreadsheet which is in the same format and which contains the same information.
10.
Section 23 – PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS, shall be supplemented by adding
the following paragraph:
(i) Close-out and Operations and Maintenance Documents: Upon completion of
the Work and prior to final payment, the Contractor shall deliver to the
Architect/Engineer, two complete hard copy sets of the Close-out and
Operations and Maintenance Documents as specified in the Project Manual
Specifications. Additionally, the Contractor will provide two CDs or other
acceptably formatted electronic copy of the abovementioned documents to
accompany the hard copy versions. The electronic version will be organized
with folders and appropriate hierarchy as to represent the hard copy versions.
The documentation found on the electronic version will be in PDF format, or
other acceptable format as directed by the Owner.
11.
Section 38 – CHANGES IN THE WORK, shall be supplemented by adding the
following paragraph:
(4) By using Estimate for Change Order Forms GC-1, SC-1 and SS-1, respectively,
the Contractor will present to the Owner, an accurate, itemized account of the
cost of the change in the Work, including, but not limited to, the costs of labor,
materials, equipment, and supplies; and to annotate a copy of the Project
schedule to accurately show the status of the Work at the time this initial
change order is issued, to show the start and finish of the changed Work, and
the status of the Work when the changed Work is completed. A Change Order
citing this subsection shall describe the parameters of the change in the Work,
describe the cost items to be itemized and verified for payment, address the
impact on the schedule for Substantial Completion, and state that a subsequent
Change Order will be issued to incorporate the cost of the changed Work into
the Contract Price and any change in the Contract Time for Completion or
Contract Completion Date. The Contractor shall sign the Change Order
acknowledging he has been directed to proceed with the changed Work.
Supplemental General Conditions
Page 5 of 7
Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by the Owner, such costs shall
not exceed those prevailing for the trades or crafts, materials, and equipment in
the locality of the Project, may include only those items listed as allowable in
Subsection 38(e), and shall not include any of the costs listed as not allowable
in Subsection 38(f). The Owner shall be permitted, on a daily basis, to verify
such records and may require such additional records as are necessary to
determine the cost of the change to the Work. Within fourteen (14) days of the
conclusion of such ordered Work, the Contractor and the Owner shall arrive at
a cost for the Change Order, based on the records kept and the Contractor’s
allowance for overhead and profit as set forth in Subsections (d), (e) and (f)
below, and such costs shall be incorporated into a Change Order which
references the Change Order ordering the Work. If agreement on the cost of
the changed Work cannot be reached within the fourteen (14) days allotted, the
Contractor may file a claim for the disputed amount as provided for in Section
46.
12. Section 42 - DAMAGES FOR DELAY, EXTENSION OF TIME, shall be
supplemented by adding the following paragraphs:
(i)
It is imperative that the Work in this contract be substantially completed not
later than
(date)
to give time for the Owner to furnish and equip
the facility and meet other contractual obligations. The Contractor represents
and agrees that he has taken into account in his bid the requirements of the
bid documents, the location, the time allowed for the Work, local conditions,
availability of materials, equipment, and labor, and any other factors which
may affect performance of the Work. The Contractor agrees and warrants
that he will achieve substantial completion of the Work not later than
(date) .
(1) Assuming timely execution of the Contract with applicable Bonds,
Notice to Proceed will be given to the Contractor no later than
(date)
.
(j)
Subject to the provisions of the General Conditions allowing for extension
of time allowed for completion of the Work, if the work is not substantially
completed by the specified date, the Contractor shall owe to the Owner, not
as a penalty but as liquidated damages, the sum of One Thousand Dollars
($1,000.00) per day for each and every calendar day for delay in substantial
completion of the Work beyond
(date)
. Likewise, if the Work is
not finally completed by the specified date, the Contractor shall owe to the
Owner, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages, the sum of
hundred dollars ($
) per day for each and every calendar day of
delay in final completion of the Work.
(k)
The Owner may withhold from the monthly Progress Payment, the current
value of the liquidated damages. Failure of the Owner to withhold liquidated
damages during ongoing operations that have exceeded the Contract
Supplemental General Conditions
Page 6 of 7
Completion Date is not a waiver of the Owner’s entitlement to damages as
set forth in the Contract Documents.
(l)
Final accounting of liquidated damages will be administered through a
deduction in the final amount owed the Contractor, as reflected in the
Cover Sheet of the Certificate of Payment Form AC-12.
Supplemental General Conditions
Page 7 of 7
SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR ESTIMATE FOR CHANGE ORDER
SS-1
DGS-30-208
(Rev. 09/04)
Project Code:
Agency:
Project:
General Contractor:
Subcontractor:
Sub-Subcontractor:
Sub-Subcontractor Trade:
Change Description:
SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR DIRECT COSTS
Scope Description
Item
No.
Description
A
B
Direct Labor
Quantity
Qty
Units
Direct Labor
Hours
Per Unit
C
D
E
Total
Hourly Wage
Direct Labor
Rate, Excl.
Labor Hours Taxes & Ins.
F=CxE
G
Direct Material
Total
Labor
Cost
H=FxG
Material
Cost
Per Unit
I
Total
Material
Cost
J=CxI
Direct Equipment
Equipment
Cost
Per Unit
Total
Equipment
Cost
K
L=CxK
1.01
1.02
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
1.03
1.04
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
1.05
1.06
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
1.07
1.08
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
1.09
Subtotal from Estimate Continuation Sheets
1.97
1.98
Subtotal (S/T) Direct Costs:
Taxes/Insurance:
1.99
Total Direct Costs
FICA, FUI, SUI, & Workmens' Comp. at
Subtotal Labor
% of Item 1.97H =
$0.00
$0.00
Subtotal Mat'l
$0.00
$0.00
Subtotal Equip.
Sales Tax @ 5%
Sales Tax @ 5%
$0.00
$0.00
Total Labor
$0.00
Total Mat'l
$0.00
Total Equip.
$0.00
Submitted By
SUMMARY
Item
No.
Description
3.01
3.02
3.03
Total Direct Labor Cost
Total Direct Material Cost
Total Equipment Cost
3.04
3.05
Subtotal
Overhead and Profit
3.99
Total Sub-Subcontractor
Total Cost
Item 1.99H
$0.00
Item 1.99J
$0.00
Item 1.99L
$0.00
3.01+3.02+3.03
$0.00
15% x Item 3.04
$0.00
$0.00
Name:
Signature:
Title:
Date:
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
FORM AC-12
PART A
SUMMARY AND CERTIFICATION
PAYMENT REQUEST NO.
and
1
PERIOD BEGINNING DATE: 01/00/1900
PERIOD ENDING DATE: 01/00/1900
CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
IFB NUMBER: 0
OWNER NAME: County of Albemarle, Virginia and/or The County School Board of Albemarle County,
Virginia
PROJECT TITLE: 0
VALUE OF WORK COMPLETED
PREVIOUS
VALUE
TO DATE
TOTAL
VALUE
A
Original Contract Line Items (from AC-12, PART B) $
$
Approved Change Orders (from AC-12, PART C)
$
ADJUSTED CONTRACT TOTAL
Retainage
Retainage Percentage: 5.0%
VALUE
THIS
REPORT
B
-
NET REQUISTION AMOUNT
C
CURRENT
VALUE
TO DATE
PERCENT
COMPLETE
D=B+C
E=D/A
$
$
$
$
-
$
$
$
$
-
$
$
$
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
Amount Requested
CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION
The undersigned Contractor requests of the
foregoing Schedule of Values, and
Schedule of Values is accurate and correct;
accordance with the Contract Documents;
under this Contract have been applied
incurred in connection with Work covered
(4) title to all materials and equipment in said
Work, will pass to Owner at time
encumbrances (except such materials
payment of that portion of the
contract represents and warrants to
the (2) the Work covered by this (3)
all previous progress payments to
discharge in full (except for allowable
by prior Certificates for Payment for
which payment is requested in of
payment free and clear of all and
equipment which are covered
price shown
Owner that: (1)
Certificate has
received from
retainage) ( N/A
for Payment this
Certificate, liens,
claims, security by
a Bond previously
on the last line the
data shown on the
been completed in
Owner on account
of Work done
all obligations of Contractor
No. 1 ) ; whether or
not incorporated
interests and
accepted by Owner).
Contractor: 0
FEIN #: 0
By:
Date: January 0, 1900
signature
Typed Name: 0
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER CERTIFICATION
This is to certify that, in accordance with the the terms of a contract for IFB/Contract Number executed
day of , , by and between, , the Contractor,
and the County of Albemarle, Virginia the and/or The County School Board of Albemarle County,
Virginia, the Contractor the amount of
Owner, for work at , there is due to
No Dollars and No Cents $.00
Architect/Engineer:
By:
signature
printed name
date
OWNER ACTION
Recommended for Payment:
Form AC-12 (May 2010)
Project Manager
Date
0%
0%
0%
Original Contract Line Items
Page 1 of 1
SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
FORM AC-12
RFQ NUMBER:
PART B
ORIGINAL CONTRACT LINE ITEMS
ITEM
NO.
Date Printed: 3/19/2014
PAYMENT REQUEST NO.
0
OWNER NAME: County of Albemarle, Virginia and/or The County School Board of Albemarle County, Virginia
PROJECT TITLE:
0
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
VALUE OF WORK COMPLETED
PREVIOUS
VALUE
CURRENT
VALUE
THIS
VALUE
TO DATE
REPORT
TO DATE
TOTAL
VALUE
PERCENT
COMPLETE
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
Do not insert rows below this point ! $
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
TOTAL ORIGINAL CONTRACT
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
PERIOD BEGINNING DATE:
PERIOD ENDING DATE:
NOTES / COMMENTS
1
01/00/1900
01/00/1900
Approved Change Orders
Page 1 of 1
SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
FORM AC-12
PART C
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE ORDERS
CHNG
ORD.
NO.
Date Printed: 3/19/2014
PROJECT CODE:
0
AGENCY NAME: County of Albemarle, Virginia and/or The County School Board of Albemarle County, Virginia
PROJECT TITLE:
0
$
$
-
VALUE OF WORK COMPLETED
PREVIOUS
VALUE
CURRENT
VALUE
THIS
VALUE
TO DATE
REPORT
TO DATE
$
$
$
$
$
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
Do not insert rows below this point ! $
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
0%
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
TOTAL APPROVED CHANGE ORDERS
TOTAL
VALUE
$
-
$
-
$
-
$
-
PERCENT
COMPLETE
0%
0%
0%
PAYMENT REQUEST NO.
PERIOD BEGINNING DATE:
PERIOD ENDING DATE:
NOTES / COMMENTS
1
01/00/1900
01/00/1900
AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF CLAIMS
By:
This day _______________________________________________ personally appeared before
me, ____________________________________________ , a Notary Public in and for the
City/County of ___________________________ , ________________________ and, being by
me first duly sworn, states that all subcontractors and suppliers of labor and materials have been
paid all sums due them for work performed or materials furnished in the performance of the
Contract between The County School Board of Albemarle County, Virginia, Owner and
____________________________ , Contractor, dated __________________ , 20____, for the
construction of _______________________________________________________________
or arrangements have been made by the Contractor satisfactory to such subcontractors and
suppliers with respect to payments of such sums as may be due them by the Contractor.
(Contractor Name)
By: ________________________________________
Print Name: ________________________________________
Title: ________________________________________
Subscribed and sworn to before me this __________ day of____________________ , 20
My commission expires on the
day of _____________________, 20 ____ .
Notary Registration #: ______________________
Notary Public
Form AC-13 (May 2010)
.
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER’S CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Date: _______________________________
The County School Board of Albemarle County, Virginia
c/o Building Services Department
2751 Hydraulic Road
Charlottesville, Virginia 22901
Project Title: ____________________________________________________________
RFQ/Contract No.: __________________________
In accordance with the requirements of the Contract Between Owner and Architect/Engineer and based upon the
knowledge gained in the performance of the architectural/engineering services provided in said Contract and the
reports of the Owner’s Inspection and Testing entities, the undersigned Architect/Engineer states that the
following portions of the project named above are substantially complete in accordance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents and are recommended for use of their intended purpose (indicate portions which are
ready for use and, if applicable, occupancy):
All applicable tests, certificates and regulatory inspections required by the Contract Documents and any local,
state or federal regulations have been performed with respect to the substantially completed portions of the
project and the Owner has been provided with a copy of each report, except for the following:
A tentative list of unfinished Work and defective Work, referred to as the “punch list,” is attached hereto. The
list may not be all-inclusive, and the failure to include an item in it does not alter the responsibility of the
Contractor to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The items in the tentative list
shall be completed or corrected by the Contractor within ______ days of the above date of Substantial
Completion.
(A/E Firm Name)
By: ____________________________________________
Print Name: _____________________________________________
Title:
Attachment: Punch List
Form AC-13.1a (June 2010)
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION BY ARCHITECT/ENGINEER
Date:
The County School Board of Albemarle County,
Virginia c/o Building Services Department
2751 Hydraulic Road
Charlottesville, Virginia 22901
Project Title: _________________________________________________________________
RFQ/Contract No.: ________________________
In accordance with the requirements of the Contract Between the Owner and the
Architect/Engineer for Professional Services and based upon the knowledge gained in the
performance of the services required in said Agreement, the undersigned hereby states that the
above named project was fully completed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents on
,
.
(Month)
(Day)
(Year)
All applicable tests, certificates and regulatory inspections required by the Contract Documents
and any local, state or federal regulations have been performed and the Owner has been provided
with a copy of each report.
Final as-built drawings have been prepared by the Architect/Engineer and submitted to the
Owner in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Owner has been
provided with a copy of all warranties and guarantees, including the starting date(s) of all
warranties and guarantees, written and unwritten, required by the Contract Documents.
(A/E Firm Name)
By: ________________________________________
Print Name: ________________________________________
Title: ________________________________________
Form AC-13.1 (June 2010)
CERTIFICATE OF PARTIAL OR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION BY CONTRACTOR
Date:
The County School Board of Albemarle County, Virginia
c/o Building Services Department
2751 Hydraulic Road
Charlottesville, Virginia 22901
Project Title: ____________________________________________________________
RFQ/Contract No.: __________________________
In accordance with the requirements of the Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, the undersigned
Contractor hereby states that portions of the above named project are substantially completed in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents as modified by approved change orders. Those portions of
the project now substantially complete are:
All applicable tests, certificates and regulatory inspections required by the Contract Documents and any
local, state or federal regulations have been performed with respect to the substantially completed portions of
the project and the Owner has been provided with a copy of each report.
As-built marked up prints of the substantially completed portions of the project have been provided to
the Architect/Engineer as required by the Contract Documents.
The Owner has been provided with a copy of all warranties and guarantees, including the starting date(s) of
all warranties and guarantees, written and unwritten, required by the Contract Documents with respect to the
completed portions of the project, except as follows:
All training, operating instructions and maintenance manuals required by the Contract Documents have
been provided to the Owner, except as follows:
This certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents nor is
it a release of CONTRACTOR’S obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
(Contractor Name)
By: ____________________________________________
Print Name: ____________________________________________
Title:
Form AC-13.2a (June 2010)
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION BY CONTRACTOR
Date:
The County School Board of Albemarle County, Virginia
c/o Building Services Department
2751 Hydralic Road
Charlottesville, Virginia 22901
Project Title: _________________________________________________________________
RFQ/Contract No.: _______________________
In accordance with the requirements of the Contract Between Owner and Contractor (Form AC9) the undersigned Contractor hereby states that the above named project has been fully
completed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as modified by
approved change orders.
All applicable tests, certificates and regulatory inspections required by the Contract Documents
and any local, state or federal regulations have been performed with respect to the completed
project and the Owner has been provided with a copy of each report.
As-built marked up prints of the completed project have been provided to the Architect/Engineer
as required by the Contract Documents.
The Owner has been provided with a copy of all warranties and guarantees, including the starting
date(s) of all warranties and guarantees, written and unwritten, required by the Contract
Documents.
All training, operating instructions and maintenance manuals required by the Contract
Documents have been provided to the Owner.
(Contractor Name)
B y:
Print Name:
Title:
Copy: Architect/Engineer
Form AC-13.2 (June 2010)
ADVERSE WEATHER DAY RECTIFICATION FORM
PROJECT TITLE
ANTICIPATED
w EA 7714R.:DAys:
ADVERSE.
January
MFebrilafy,
ay
Jljne. March
July
A ugeA
September
October;
November
MpNTNLY
WEATHER'DAYS.
IMPACT •i
ADVERSE..
Atf
August
6:
14
-
12
Febriia'6i
March
A011' May
12:
14
6
8:
6
July
September
October
November
December;
Jtirie
14
6
January
.!7
May
12
6,
5
5
March
CUMULATIVE
'
.RECTIFICATION
6:
January
.D,OCe-ntOr:
June
MONTHLY
12
1:

“
J ul y
September
October
November
8
5
Decerriber
6
Page 1 of 2
8
0
6
12
Section 01400
General Requirements
1
General
1.1 Summary of Work
1.1.1 The work covered under this contract comprises the furnishing of all labor,
materials, equipment, tools and services and the installation and construction
of all items, and the performance of all work necessary to complete the work
shown or called for on the drawings and/or this project manual.
1.1.2 All units under this Contract shall be operable, shall be installed as designed,
and shall conform to the manufacturer’s specifications for the particular
application.
1.2 Contractor Use of Premises
1.2.1 The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping
of products stored on or off premises.
1.2.2 The Contractor shall coordinate use of premises with the Owner and Engineer,
and remove stored products that interfere with the operations of the Owner or
other contractors.
1.2.3 The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all additional storage or work areas
needed for operations under this Contract. These areas shall be subject to the
same conditions as described for the Owner’s property.
1.3 Permits – See Special Conditions
1.4 Construction and Scheduling Sequence
1.4.1 The existing wastewater treatment facilities shall remain in full operation
during the construction period. The existing treatment facilities consist of a
septic tank, dosing tank and subsurface soil absorption system. In addition,
wastewater generated by Simpson Park discharges into the existing septic
tank via a reported 1-1/2-inch PVC force main. Phases of the construction
which involve the temporary interruption of essential services and
demolition of existing items shall be scheduled in consultation with the
Owner or his representative, shall not be of longer duration than essential to
accomplish the purpose for such interruptions, and shall be coordinated to
give the Owner the ability to maintain wastewater service. Liaison with the
Owner in these matters is a salient feature of this contract.
1.4.2 Provide a written construction schedule and plan which describes in detail each
major task and operation which will interfere with any existing system,
equipment, or operation. The plan shall describe the sequence and proposed
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
01400/1
method of accomplishing each task and the proposed schedule for
interruptions.
1.4.3 All construction activities shall be performed inside right of ways/limits of
construction/limits of clearing and grading designated for this project.
Laydown areas for this project shall be on-site and agreed upon by the
Owner. Coordination and scheduling of construction activities with the
Owner is a salient feature of this contract.
1.4.4 Provide temporary bypass pumping and piping, and temporary electrical
service as required to maintain the existing wastewater treatment operations.
1.4.5 Additional contract requirements for the project are summarized as follows:
1.4.5.1 The Contractor shall construct new electrical supply from existing
panel “G” inside existing school building and extend to new
treatment building. A maximum outage of 4 hours will be allowed
for this activity, if required.
1.4.5.2 Test and start up all structures, equipment, piping, and unit processes
at the new WWTP as specified in this project manual. Perform leak
testing for all wastewater-retention structures for new WWTP
equipment with potable water.
1.4.5.3 Provide sufficient seed sludge from an existing WWTP with similar
unit processes (activated sludge with nitrification and
denitrification) to start biological processes at the new WWTP.
Provide dry soda ash and MicroC1000 carbon for chemical feed
system startup as specified in Section 11600 – Chemical Feed
Equipment.
1.4.5.4 Once the new WWTP is fully functional and operable, divert
wastewater to the new WWTP with a nighttime outage. Once
wastewater is diverted to the new WWTP, the Contractor shall
abandon the septic tank and dosing siphon. Remove wastewater and
solids from septic tank and dosing siphon and dispose of these
wastes at an approved facility. Tanks shall be abandoned in
accordance with VDH Regulations. Fill tank and dosing siphon tank
with sand or gravel. Disconnect and plug piping.
1.4.5.5 Comply with all rules and regulations required by the County of
Albemarle School Board. The Contractor may be requested not to
work during certain school activities and events.
1.4.5.6 All work associated with the existing school site, except for septic
tank and dosing siphon demolition, shall be complete by August 8,
2014. This includes seeding the school site.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
01400/2
1.4.5.7 5-day performance test shall be performed with wastewater.
1.5 Work Restrictions
1.5.1 Occupancy: If the Owner elects to operate any of the wastewater treatment
plant improvements under partial utilization, prior to the project’s final
acceptance, neither WW Associates nor the Contractor shall be held
responsible for the safety or well being of those occupants beyond the
normal care and practice of the construction industry.
1.5.2 Normal working hours for the Contractor shall be 8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M.,
Monday through Friday, excluding state and federal holidays, unless
otherwise approved by the Owner and WW Associates.
1.6 Contract Modification Procedures
1.6.1 Change Orders: No amount, in part or in whole, of a change order shall be
included in a requisition for payment by the Contractor until the change
order has been executed and copies of the change order have been distributed
to the Owner and Contractor.
1.6.2 Work Orders: A work order is a device which enables the Owner to
promptly order changes in the work which may involve changes in cost or
contract time, or both pending preparation and execution of a formal
change order.
1.6.3 Request for Change Order Proposal: The Owner may request the Contractor
to submit a change order proposal for changes in contract work. The
Contractor shall submit the proposal in accordance with contract
requirements within 3 days of a request by the Engineer or Owner. The
Owner may issue to the Contractor a work order authorizing the required
changes for an additional amount not to exceed, or a deduction of not less
than the amount shown in the work order. If the Contractor is not in
agreement with the amount stipulated in the work order, he shall, within a
reasonable time after the issue date of the order, submit to WW Associates
an equitable proposal and develop with the Owner a mutually acceptable
price for the required change in work.
1.6.4 The Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to the
Engineer containing:
1.6.4.1 Description of the proposed changes.
1.6.4.2 Statement of the reason for making the changes.
1.6.4.3 Statement of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
1.6.4.4 Statement of the effect on the Work of separate Contractors.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
01400/3
1.6.4.5 Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract
Time, as appropriate.
1.7 Payment Procedures
1.7.1 Applications and Certificates for Payment: The form of each application for
payment shall be AIA Document G702 entitled, “Application and Certificate
for Payment” accompanied by “Continuation Sheet,” AIA Document G703.
Each application for payment by the Contractor, excluding the first, shall be
accompanied by a “Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims,”
AIA Document G706, and “Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens,” AIA
Document G706A. Each application shall be submitted on forms, copies of
which are included in this project manual. Payment for stored material
delivered but not incorporated in the work will be the invoiced amount only.
Submit application invoices with application for payment.
1.7.2 Upon recommendation by WW Associates of the Contractor’s request for
partial payment, the Owner shall pay to the Contractor 95 percent of the total
amount due and the Owner shall retain 5 percent of the amount due until
final completion and acceptance of all work covered by the contract.
1.7.3 Schedule of Values: Submit complete schedule of values at least 10 days prior
to first application for payment.
1.8 Project Meetings
1.8.1 Preconstruction conferences with the Contractor will be held after the effective
date of the agreement.
1.8.2 Progress Meetings: Each month, the Contractor, Engineer, and the Owner shall
hold a progress meeting to review progress to date and to resolve all
questions for the upcoming month.
1.9 Progress Schedules: Submit a detailed construction schedule prior to the
preconstruction conference. Revise the schedule prior to each progress meeting.
Construction schedule shall be in a form that will clearly show the proposed degree
of completeness of each aspect of the construction throughout the life of the
contract. CPM schedule shall be provided in accord with the County of Albemarle
Construction Contract General Conditions Paragraph 19(c).
1.10 Submittal Procedures
1.10.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: Prior to the preconstruction
conference, prepare a submittal schedule satisfactory to WW Associates
fixing the dates for submission of shop drawings, product data, samples, and
the like and update this schedule at each progress meeting to reflect the
status of each submittal item.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
01400/4
1.10.1.1 Submit six copies of all shop drawings.
1.10.1.2 A maximum of two marked copies will be returned to the
Contractor.
1.10.1.3 Submit shop drawings, product data, samples, and the like as
required by applicable specification sections.
1.10.1.4 Identify each item submitted using applicable specification section
number and paragraph reference or drawing reference.
1.10.1.5 Shop drawings shall be approved by the Contractor and those
subcontractors whose work is associated with the subject equipment
as being in accordance with the contract documents prior to
submission.
1.10.1.6 Failure to comply with these requirements will result in the
submittal being returned unprocessed.
1.10.2 The Engineer’s approval of Contractor’s shop drawings will be general and
shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for adherence to the
Contract, nor shall it relieve him of the responsibility for any errors that may
exist. Where such errors or omissions are discovered later, they shall be
made good by the Contractor, irrespective of any approval by the Engineer.
1.11 Quality Control
1.11.1 Testing Laboratory Services: The Owner will employ and pay for the services
of an independent testing laboratory to perform testing specified to be done
by an independent testing laboratory, unless specifically stated otherwise in
other sections of the specifications. Employment of the laboratory by the
Owner shall in no way relieve the Contractor’s obligations to perform the
work of the contract.
1.11 Temporary Utilities
1.11.1 Temporary Electricity: The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements
for obtaining temporary electric power for construction purposes. No
separate payment for electric power for construction purposes or testing
other than the payment included in the contract lump sum or unit prices will
be allowed. Fees charged by the power company for permanent electrical
service will be paid by the Owner.
1.11.2 Temporary Water shall be the responsibility of the Contractors. The school’s
potable water supply is not to be used.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
01400/5
1.11.3 Temporary Sanitary Facilities: The Contractor shall provide and maintain in a
neat and sanitary condition such accommodations for the use of his
employees as will comply with laws and regulations.
1.12 Temporary Controls
1.12.1 Construction Cleaning: The Contractor shall clean daily all areas under
construction to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, sidewalks,
and access of School personnel.
1.12.2 Erosion and Sediment Control: These controls shall be in coordination with
the appropriate drawings and any requirements of the local authority.
1.12.3 Dust Control: Contractor shall ensure that dust is held to a minimum
throughout the length of the project through the application of moisture
where applicable.
1.13 Vehicular Access and Parking
1.13.1 Parking and Laydown Areas: The location of Contractor parking and
laydown areas shall be as agreed upon by the Owner and the Engineer. The
Contractor shall obtain approval from the Owner in advance for proposed
parking and laydown areas. Provide gravel in the laydown area and comply
with the latest edition of Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.
1.14 E-Mail Address: The Contractor shall provide an e-mail address to allow the Owner
and the Engineer to correspond with the Contractor’s project manager during the
construction period.
1.15 Product Requirements
1.15.1 Quality of Material and Equipment Incorporated into the Work:
1.15.1.1 Design, fabricate and assemble in accordance with the best
engineering and shop practices.
1.15.1.2 Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and
gauges, to be interchangeable.
1.15.1.3 Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same
manufacturer.
1.15.1.4 Products shall be suitable for services conditions.
1.15.1.5 Equipment capacities, sizes, and dimensions shown or specified
shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in
writing.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
01400/6
1.15.2 Except as specifically indicated or specified, materials and equipment
removed from the existing structure shall not be used in the completed work.
1.15.3 For material and equipment specifically indicated or specified to be reused in
the work:
1.15.3.1 Use special care in removal, handling, storage, and reinstallation to
assure proper function in the completed work.
1.15.3.2 Arrange for transportation, storage, and handling of products, which
require off-site storage, restoration, or renovation. Pay all costs for
such work.
1.15.4 Manufacturer’s Instructions
1.15.4.1 When contract documents require that installation of work shall
comply with manufacturer’s printed instructions, obtain and
distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the
installation, including two copies to WW Associates.
1.15.4.2 Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during
installation and until completion.
1.15.4.3 Handle, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust products in
accordance with such instructions and in conformity with specified
requirements.
1.15.5 Transportation and Handling of Materials
1.15.5.1 Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction
schedules. Coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at
the site.
1.15.5.2 Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer’s
original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and
legible.
1.15.5.3 Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance
with requirements of contract documents and approved submittals,
and that products are properly protected and undamaged.
1.15.6 Storage and Protection
1.15.6.1 Store products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, with
seals and labels intact and legible.
1.15.6.2 Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight
enclosures.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
01400/7
1.15.6.3 Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by
manufacturer’s instructions.
1.15.6.4 Exterior Storage
1.15.6.4.1 Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking
or skids; prevent soiling or staining; cover products,
which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet
coverings; and provide adequate ventilation to avoid
condensation.
1.15.6.4.2 Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on
solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter.
1.15.6.4.3
Protection after Installation: Provide substantial
coverings as necessary to protect installed products
from damage from traffic and subsequent construction
operations. Remove when no longer needed.
1.16 Lines and Grades
1.16.1 The Contractor shall include $7,000 in Base Bid to be provided as payment
for the initial construction stakeout provided by WW Associates Certified Land
Surveyor. Should the Contractor disturb the initial stakeout, restaking will be
provided on an hourly rate to the Contractor by WW Associates. Stakeout
services for the Base Bid will be as follows:

Stake limits of clearing as required

Stake sediment trap and stormwater management facilities

Provide stakeout to rough grade site

Stake storm structures and provide two point offsets

Stake sanitary sewer and sanitary manholes and provide two point
offsets

Stake waterline and fittings and provide two point offsets

Stake corners of treatment structures and new treatment building and
provide offsets

Stake Drip Dispersal Fields

Stake limits of new gravel paving and access road

Stake corners of fencing

Stake TMP 128A2-18 and 22 property line (prior to construction)
1.17 Starting of Systems
1.17.1 The Contractor shall initially start up and place all piping systems installed by
the Contractor into successful operation according to manufacturers’ written
instructions and as instructed by manufacturers’ representatives.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
01400/8
1.17.2 Provide all materials, labor, tools, equipment and expendables required.
1.17.3 Coordinate schedule for start-up of various piping systems. Notify the
Engineer at least seven days prior to start-up of each piping system. The
Owner’s operator and the Engineer will be present during start-up.
1.17.4 Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer’s
representative in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
1.17.5 Submit a written report that piping systems have been properly installed and
are functioning correctly.
1.17.6 General activities include the following:
1.17.6.1 Cleaning.
1.17.6.2 Removing temporary protective coverings.
1.17.6.3 Flushing and replacing greases and lubricants, where required by
manufacturer.
1.17.6.4 Lubrication.
1.17.6.5 Check shaft and coupling alignments and reset where needed.
1.17.6.6 Check and set motor, pump and other equipment, rotation, safety
interlocks, and belt tensions.
1.17.6.7 Check and correct, if necessary, leveling plates, grout, bearing
plates, anchor bolts, fasteners, and alignment of piping which may
put stress on equipment connected to it.
1.17.6.8 Test all equipment and systems at normal operating conditions and
through the normal operating range.
1.17.6.9 Make all adjustments and balances required.
1.17.7 Minimum Start-Up Procedures.
1.17.7.1 Motors: Measure amperage of each motor and compare to
nameplate valve. Correct conditions which produce excessive
current flow, and which exist due to equipment malfunction.
1.17.7.2 Pumps: Check glands and seals for cleanliness and adjustment
before operating pump. Inspect shaft sleeves for scoring. Inspect
mechanical faces, chambers, and seal rings, and replace, if
defective. Verify that piping system is free of debris before
circulating liquid through pump. Pump startup shall be performed
in accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
01400/9
under the supervision of the manufacturer’s representatives, and as
specified in the technical specifications of this document.
1.17.7.3 Valves: Inspect all valves, clean bonnets and stems. Inspect packing
glands to assure no leakage, and tighten or replace as necessary.
Verify that control valve seats are free from foreign material and are
properly positioned for service.
1.17.7.4 Pipe Joints: Inspect all joints for leakage, and tighten, remake, or
replace as necessary.
1.17.7.5 Pipe Supports: Inspect all piping supports to assure adequate
restraint to prevent displacement, vibration, or failure of piping and
fittings, while allowing for expansion and contraction. Modify and
adjust as necessary.
1.17.7.6 Electrical Circuits: Check each electrical control circuit to assure
operation complies with Specifications and requirements to provide
desired performance.
1.17.7.7 Instruments: Test, adjust, and calibrate as required.
1.17.7.8 Wastewater Treatment Plant Equipment: Equipment startup shall be
performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written
recommendations under the supervision of the manufacturer’s
representatives, and as specified in the technical specifications of
this document.
1.18 Demonstration and Instructions
1.18.1 Prior to final inspection, demonstrate operation of each system to the
Engineer and the Owner.
1.18.2 Instruct the Owner’s personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
systems.
1.19 Acceptance for Operation
1.19.1 As soon as the unit, equipment, or system has been properly prepared for
operation and it is necessary to be placed into service, bring it on-line; then
make an on-line performance test by operating it under approximately
normal conditions using wastewater for a period of 5 consecutive days to
demonstrate that all materials and components are in proper working order
and free from defects. During this time, the Owner will receive specified
instruction on the unit or system by qualified personnel, and be furnished all
appropriate operation and maintenance manuals. In event of failure to
demonstrate successful performance on the first or any subsequent attempt,
make all alternations, adjustments, repairs, and replacements that may be
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
01400/10
needed; and, if it becomes necessary to shut down the unit or system, or any
portion thereof before the on-line test is satisfactorily completed, provide all
appropriate measures to resume wastewater treatment operations without the
unit or system. When the unit or system is again ready for operation, bring it
on-line and start a new on-line test. This procedure shall be repeated as often
as necessary until the piping system shall have operated continuously to the
satisfaction of the Owner, for a test period duration of 5 consecutive days.
The Contractor will furnish all operating personnel (other than vendor’s or
subcontractor’s service engineers) needed to operate equipment during the
on-line test period; operating personnel will perform their duties under the
Contractor’s direction and supervision. Until performance tests are completed
and units and systems are accepted by the Owner for operation, the
Contractor shall be fully responsible for supervising their operation.
1.19.2 When the on-line test has been completed, the Owner will notify the
Contractor to this effect in writing and will then take over the unit or system
for purpose of operation. Neither this notice nor the act of taking over any
item for operation shall relieve the Contractor from his obligations to
complete the facility or perform any other obligations or responsibilities,
which extend beyond the completion of the on-line tests.
1.19.3 The Contractor shall maintain full responsibility for the maintenance of all
units and systems placed on-line until they have been determined
substantially complete. No warranties shall begin prior to the date of
substantial completion.
1.19.4 Acceptance Requirements:
All equipment shall pass the specified
performance testing prior to substantial completion certifications. Partial
acceptance of equipment will not be allowed. See additional performance test
criteria requirements in Section 11400, Paragraph 3.3.
1.20 Cleaning
1.20.1 Periodically clean premises of accumulated construction debris.
1.20.2 Prior to final completion, thoroughly remove from premises any debris
remaining from construction activities, and properly dispose. Leave premises
in a clean, neat, orderly and safe condition.
1.21 Contract Closeout Procedures
1.21.1 Punch List: Correct All Punch List Items.
1.21.2 Operations and Maintenance Data: Obtain, assemble, and submit to WW
Associates three manuals containing comprehensive operating and
maintenance instructions and parts lists. Each manual shall be self-contained
and include information for efficient servicing of equipment supplied and
installed under the contract.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
01400/11
1.21.2.1 Operating instructions shall explain maintenance procedures,
methods of checking the systems for safe and normal operation, and
recommended procedure for safely stopping and starting the
equipment and systems.
1.21.2.2 These requirements shall be fulfilled before any guarantee periods
become effective so as to limit the possibility of claims arising from
the absence of pertinent information.
1.21.3 Guarantees, Warranties, and Bonds: Submit all required guarantees,
warranties and bonds.
1.21.4 Project Record Documents
1.21.4.1 Provide one complete set of drawings and project manual recording
all changes to work to indicate actual installation. Changes shall be
noted in legible red letters at least 1/8-inch high. These changes shall
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.21.4.1.1 Size, depth or position of foundations
1.21.4.1.2 Exact location and elevation of all underground utility
services
1.21.4.1.3 Changes in general construction, mechanical, or electrical
work above or below ground.
1.21.4.2 These records are a specific contract requirement, and final payment
will not be made until these drawings and project manual have been
submitted in an acceptable form.
1.21.5 Spare parts and maintenance materials required by these contract documents
shall be delivered to the Owner as directed by the Owner.
1.21.6 List of Manufacturers and Suppliers: At the conclusion of the project, the
Contractor shall furnish WW Associates with a complete list of
subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers who participated in the
construction or who furnished materials or equipment. The address of each
firm shall be included, together with types of materials or work performed.
1.21.7 Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims
1.21.8 Affidavit of Release of Liens
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
01400/12
Section 02010
Erosion & Sediment Control
1
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
1.1.1 The requirements of Division 0 - Bidding Information, General Conditions
and Forms, Division 1 - General Requirements and Division 2 - Sitework,
of this Project Manual apply to all work under this Section.
1.1.2 Perform all work required to control erosion and the sedimentation of
downstream improvements and properties, indicated by the Contract
Documents, and other related items necessary for the proper execution and
completion of this Project.
1.2 References
1.2.1 The provisions of the current Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control
Handbook, Albemarle County Code Chapter 17 Water Protection
Ordinance, and related County of Albemarle policies apply to all work
under this section.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1
All erosion and sediment control related materials shall conform to the current
Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook. Where the Handbook
specifications are lacking or less restrictive than the requirements of these plans
and specifications, these plans and specifications will prevail.
3 EXECUTION
Erosion and sediment control shall be implemented in accordance with the current
Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook and as described in the Erosion and
Sediment Control Narrative.
3.1
Erosion and Sediment Control Narrative, Control Measures and Strategies: See
Contract Drawings.
3.2
Permanent Stabilization
Permanent Stabilization will be in accordance with Section 02936 –
Seeding. 3.3 Maintenance
Inspect all erosion and sediment control measures at the close of each workday
and after each significant rainstorm. Make necessary repairs or clean up
immediately to maintain the effectiveness of the measures. The following items
will be checked in particular:
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
002010/1
3.3.1 The silt fence barrier will be checked regularly for undermining or
deterioration of the fabric. Sediment shall be removed when the level of
sediment deposition reaches half way to the top of the barrier.
3.3.2 Inlet and outlet protection shall be checked regularly to ensure proper
functioning.
3.3.3 The seeded areas will be checked regularly to ensure that a good stand is
maintained. Areas shall be limed, fertilized, reseeded and mulched as
needed.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
002010/2
Section 02050
Demolition
1
GENERAL
1.1
Description: This section specifies demolition, removal and disposal, off site, of
the following:
1.1.1 Existing improvements as indicated on the Drawings.
1.1.2 Incidental related work.
1.1.3 Rubbish and debris located on property identified at Tax Map 128A2-22 and
within the limits of construction/limits of clearing and grading are to be
removed.
1.2 Definitions
1.2.1 Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be
reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain on the Owner’s property.
1.2.2 Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain
the Owner’s property. Remove, clean and pack or crate items to protect
against damage. Identify contents of containers and deliver to the Owner’s
designated storage area.
1.2.3 Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service and
otherwise prepare them for reuse; store and protect against damage.
Reinstall items in locations indicated
1.2.4 Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against
damage and soiling during demolition. When permitted by WW
Associates, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location
during demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original
location.
1.3
Materials Ownership
1.3.1 Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, or otherwise
indicated to remain the Owner’s property, demolished materials shall
become the Contractor’s property and shall be removed from the site and be
disposed of by the Contractor.
1.3.2 Historical items, relics, and similar objects, which may be encountered
during demolition, remain the Owner’s property. Carefully remove and
salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver
promptly to the Owner.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02050/1
1.4
Quality Assurance
1.4.1 Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) notification regulations before starting
demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.5
Project Conditions
1.5.1 The Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of structures to be
demolished.
1.5.2 Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be
permitted.
1.5.3 Asbestos: It is not expected that asbestos will be encountered in the course
of this contract. If any materials suspected of containing asbestos are
encountered, do not disturb the materials. Immediately notify WW
Associates and the Owner.
1.5.4 Remove rubbish, debris and trash from limits of construction at no additional
cost to the Owner.
1.6 Prot ection
1.6.1 Protect all existing and newly constructed improvements and paved surfaces
from damage due to project demolition and construction. Contractor shall
repair or replace all damaged construction at no cost to Owner and to
Owner’s satisfaction
1.6.2 Maintain and protect all trees along edge of ROW and limits of
construction/limits of clearing and grading during construction.
1.6.2.1 Root prune trees per current arboriculture practices.
1.6.2.2 Repair, replace or regrade adjacent properties as necessary to
maintain continuity between new and old conditions.
1.7
Scheduling
1.7.1 Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with the access to
adjacent properties. Work closely with the Owner to notify adjacent land
owners and residents of construction activities affecting their access.
Provide temporary access at all times as necessary.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02050/2
1.8
Submittals
1.8.1 Contractor shall provide sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape of
existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that
could be misconstrued as damage caused by the contractor’s work.
1.8.2 Proposed dust control measures.
2
PRODUCTS: NOT USED.
3
EXECUTION
3.1 General
3.1.1 Existing asphalt surfaces and miscellaneous structures within the areas
designated for new construction work shall be demolished to the extent
necessary and all debris removed from the site. Asphalt surfaces to be
demolished shall be smooth with saw cut. Existing rubbish/debris to be
removed. Existing asphalt surfaces shall be restored in kind after
construction of new improvements.
3.1.2 Work shall be performed in such manner as not to endanger the safety of the
workmen or the public or cause damage to nearby structures.
3.1.3 Provide all barriers and precautionary measures in accordance with the
Owner’s requirements and other authorities having jurisdiction.
3.1.4 Where parts of existing structures are to remain in service, demolish the
portions to be removed, repair damage, and leave the structure in proper
condition for the intended use. Remove concrete and masonry to the lines
designated by drilling, chipping, saw cutting or other suitable methods.
Leave the resulting surfaces reasonably true and even, with sharp straight
corners that will result in neat joints with new construction and be
satisfactory for the purpose intended. Where existing reinforcing rods are
to extend into new construction, remove the concrete so that the
reinforcing is clean and undamaged. Cut off other reinforcing 1/2 inch
below the surface and fill with epoxy resin binder flush with the surface.
3.1.5 Prior to the execution of the work, the Contractor and Owner shall jointly
survey the condition of the adjoining and/or nearby structures.
Photographs and records shall be made of any prior settlement or cracking
of structures, pavements, and the like, that may become the subject of
possible damage claims.
3.1.6 Should previously unidentified archeological or cultural resources be
encountered during construction, the contractor shall stop work in that area
immediately and notify the Owner’s representative. The Owner will
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02050/3
make every effort to allow the contractor to move to another location on
the project and continue work until the issue is resolved.
3.2
Disposal of Material
3.2.1 All debris resulting from the demolition and removal work shall be disposed
of by the Contractor as part of the work of this contract. All material shall
be legally disposed of off site by the Contractor at his expense in
accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations.
3.2.2 Burning of any debris resulting from demolition activities will not be
permitted at the site.
3.3
Utility Services
3.3.1 Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off
utility services to be removed or abandoned in place as indicated on the
drawings.
3.3.2 Maintain existing utilities and protect them against damage during
demolition operations.
3.3.2.1 Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating
facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities
having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during
interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing
authorities.
3.4
Explosives: Explosives shall not be used for demolition activities.
3.5
Pollution Controls
3.5.1 Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit
the spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental
protection regulations.
3.5.1.1 Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable
conditions, such as ice, flooding, or pollution.
3.5.2 Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on
adjacent surfaces and areas. Keep pavement and area adjacent to the site
clean and free of mud, dirt, and debris at all times.
3.5.3 Clean adjacent buildings and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused
by demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to the condition existing
before the start of demolition activities.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02050/4
3.6
Filling Below Grade Areas: Completely fill below grade areas and voids resulting
from demolition of structures and pavements with soil materials where applicable
and in accordance with Section 02200 - Earthwork. Fill material shall be
completely free of debris and rubbish. Seed disturbed areas are to be vegetated in
accordance with Section 02936 – Seeding.
3.6.1 Prior to placement of fill materials, ensure that areas to be filled are free of
standing water, frost, frozen material, trash, and debris.
3.6.2 After fill placement and compaction, grade surface to meet adjacent contours
and to provide positive flow to surface drainage structures.
3.7
Asphalt Surface Removal: Saw cut and remove existing asphalt concrete
pavement in accordance with Section 02500 –Surfacing and Incidental
Construction.
3.8
Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent utilities, pavement or other
existing improvements caused by demolition activities. Repair/replace in kind.
3.9
Cleanup
3.9.1 Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished
materials to accumulate on-site. If the Contractor fails to remove excess
debris promptly, the Owner reserves the right to remove it at the
Contractor’s expense.
3.9.2 Remove promptly salvageable material that becomes property of the
Contractor and is not to be reused in construction. Sale of material on the
site will be prohibited.
3.9.3 Remove all tools, equipment, and materials from the demolition site, and all
rubbish upon completion of the work.
3.9.4 Leave the site clean, neat, orderly, and in condition to begin new
construction.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02050/5
Section 02200
Earthwork
1 GENERAL
1.1 References: The publication listed below form a part of this specification to the
extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic
designation only.
1.1.1 American Society For Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.1.1.1 ASTM C 136: Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates
1.1.1.2 ASTM D 698: Laboratory compaction characteristics of soil using
standard effort
1.1.1.3 ASTM D 1140: Amount of material in soils finer than the No. 200
(75-micrometer) sieve
1.1.1.4 ASTM D 1556: Density and unit weight of soil in place by the sandcone method
1.1.1.5 ASTM D 1557: Laboratory compaction characteristics of soil using
modified effort
1.1.1.6 ASTM D 2487: Classification of soils for engineering purposes
1.1.1.7 ASTM D 6938: In-place density and water content of soil and soilaggregate by nuclear methods (shallow depth)
1.1.1.8 ASTM D 4318: Liquid limit, plastic limit, and plasticity index of
soils
1.2 Definitions
1.2.1 Hard Materials: Weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits, or conglomerate
materials which are not included in the definition of “rock” but which
usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment, ripper teeth, or jack
hammers for removal.
1.2.2 Rock: Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly
cemented, laminated, or foliated masses or conglomerate deposits, neither of
which can be removed without systematic drilling and blasting, drilling and
the use of expansion jacks or feather wedges, or the use of backhoe-mounted
pneumatic hole punchers or rock breakers; also large boulders, buried
masonry, or concrete other than pavement exceeding 1/2 cubic yard in
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02200/1
volume. Removal of hard material will not be considered rock excavation
because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed merely to
increase production.
1.2.3 Cohesive Materials: Materials ASTM D 2487 classified as GC, SC, ML, CL,
MH, and CH. Materials classified as GM and SM will be identified as
cohesive only when the fines have a plasticity index greater than zero.
1.2.4 Cohesionless Materials: Materials ASTM D 2487 classified as GW, GP, SW,
and SP. Materials classified as GM and SM will be identified as cohesionless
only when the fines have plasticity index of zero.
1.3 Submittals: Provide the following in a timely manner in accordance with the
approved submittals schedule as specified in Section 01400 – General
Requirements.
1.3.1 Two copies of field test reports for fill and backfill tests, select materials tests,
and density tests.
1.4 Delivery, Storage, and Handling: Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or
segregation of materials.
1.5 Criteria for Bidding
1.5.1 Base bids on the elevations as indicated.
1.5.2 Rock excavation shall be unclassified. All earthwork excavation shall be
performed to the indicated elevations.
1.5.3 Blasting will not be permitted on this project as specified herein.
1.5.4 Remove material in an approved manner, and provide excavation support
structures as required in accordance with the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers
“Safety and Health Requirements Manual,” EM-385-1-1, Section 25.
Burning of trees and stumps is allowed if approved by the Albemarle County
Fire Department.
1.6 Provide barricades, coverings, or other types of protection necessary to prevent
damage to existing improvements not indicated to be removed, and improvements
on adjoining properties.
1.6.1 Restore all improvements damaged by this work to their original condition,
and acceptable to the Owner or other parties or authorities having
jurisdiction, unless indicated otherwise.
1.7 Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place against cutting,
breaking, or skinning of roots; skinning and bruising of bark; smothering of
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02200/2
trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line;
excess foot or vehicular traffic; or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide
temporary fences, barricades, or guards as required to protect trees and vegetation to
be left standing.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1
Soil Materials: Free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material, vegetation, refuse, soft
unsound particles, and frozen deleterious or objectionable materials. The maximum
particle diameter shall be one-half the lift thickness at the specified location. The
maximum particle diameter for pipe backfill material located less than 1-foot above
the pipe crown shall be 1-inch.
2.1.1 Common Fill: Approved, unclassified soil material with the characteristics
required to compact to the soil density specified for the intended location.
2.1.2 Embankment and Cutoff Trench Fill: ASTM D 2487, Classification ML, CH
with a minimum permeability of 10-5 centimeters/second.
2.1.3 Backfill and Fill Material: ASTM D 2487, Classification GW, GP, GM, GC,
SW, SP, SM, SC with a maximum ASTM D 4318 liquid limit of 35,
maximum ASTM D 4318 plasticity index of 12, and a maximum of 25
percent by weight passing ASTM D 1140, No. 200 sieve.
2.1.4 Topsoil: Provide as specified in Section 02936 – Seeding.
2.1.5 Select Material: ASTM D 2487, Classification GW, GP, SW, SP with a
maximum of 10 percent by weight passing ASTM D 1140, No. 200 sieve.
2.1.6 Pipe Bedding Material: VDOT No. 57 coarse aggregate.
2.1.7 Aggregate Fill: VDOT No. 57 coarse aggregate.
2.1.8 Riprap: Class 1 dry riprap as defined in the Virginia Department of
Transportation (VDOT) Road and Bridge Specifications, Section 414,
“Riprap.”
2.2 Borrow: Obtain borrow materials required in excess of those furnished from
excavations from sources off the Owner’s property. Provide and submit soil
classification testing to ensure borrow materials meet the requirements of this
specification.
2.3 Geotextile Fabric
2.3.1 Geotextile fabric shall be protected from mud, dirt, dust, sunlight, and debris
during transport and storage. Material shall be inert to commonly
encountered chemicals; resistant to mildew, rot, insects, and rodents; and
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02200/3
biologically and thermally stable. Geotextile fabric for subsurface installation
shall not be exposed to direct sunlight for more than 24 hours during
installation.
2.3.2 Geotextile fabric for riprap bedding material shall be woven polypropylene and
shall have the following properties as a minimum:
Physical Property
Apparent Opening
Size
Specification
Equal to or greater
than No. 50 sieve
Test Method
Grab Tensile
Strength Warp/Fill
350 pounds/250 pounds
ASTM D 4632
Puncture Strength
140 pounds minimum
ASTM D 4833
ASTM D 4751
Acceptable products are Erosion 1 as manufactured by Synthetic Industries,
4019 Industry Drive, Chattanooga, Tennessee 37416, Telephone: (615) 8990444, and Amoco 1199 as manufactured by Amoco Fabrics and Fibers
Company, 900 Circle 75 Parkway, Suite 300, Atlanta, Georgia 30339,
Telephone: (404) 984-4444.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 Clearing
3.1.1 Remove from the site trees, stumps, roots, brush, shrubs, down timber, rotten
wood, rubbish, other vegetation, as well as fences and incidental structures
necessary to allow for new construction.
3.1.2 Clearing work shall be restricted to area within “Construction Limits”
specified in this Section and as indicated on the drawings.
3.1.3 Remove all stumps and roots located within “Construction Limits” as specified
herein and as indicated on the drawings.
3.2 Existing Trees and Shrubs
3.2.1 Trees and shrubs that are to remain shall be protected by the Contractor.
3.2.2 Ownership of Trees: Unless otherwise noted, trees removed to allow for new
construction shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be
removed from the site.
3.2.3 Provide protection for roots and branches over 11/2 inches in diameter that are
cut during construction operations. Coat the cut faces with an emulsified
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02200/4
asphalt or other coating especially formulated for horticultural use on cut or
damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover all exposed roots with wet burlap
to prevent roots from drying out. Provide earth cover as soon as possible.
3.3 Clearing
3.3.1 Clear all areas located within “Limits of Construction” in preparation for drip
field installation as follows:
3.3.1.1 Remove standing trees and downed trees. Trees shall be hand cut
flush to grade.
3.3.1.2 Rake the site and remove all debris.
3.3.1.3 Grind large stumps to 8" below ground surface. Small stumps may be
grubbed.
3.3.1.4 The soil scientist needs to approve moisture conditions before
breaking ground, even for clearing. In tight clay soils moisture
conditions will have to be correct and low.
3.3.2 Use only hand methods for grubbing inside the drip lines of trees that are to
remain.
3.4 Land Disturbance and Limits of Construction Criteria for Utility Construction
3.4.1 General Requirements Applying to all Areas
3.4.1.1 Contractor shall plan construction to minimize disturbance to
properties adjacent to the proposed utilities. Contractor shall flag the
proposed limits of construction and mark all proposed trees to be
cut for review and approval by the Engineer prior to any clearing
being performed.
3.4.1.2 The Engineer reserves the right to limit the width of land to be
disturbed and to designate on the drawings or in the field certain
areas or items within this width to be protected from damage.
3.4.1.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for damages to area or items
designated by the Engineer to be protected. Repairs to, replacement
of, or reparations for areas or items damaged shall be made to the
satisfaction of the Engineer before acceptance of the completed
project.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02200/5
3.4.1.4 Unless otherwise noted on the contract drawings, all trees cut shall be
removed from this project. Brush, laps, roots, and stumps from trees
shall also be removed from the site.
3.4.1.5 All buildings or structures located along the line shall be protected by
the Contractor. Hand trenching, shoring, or other methods may be
required.
3.4.1.6 Any fences disturbed by the Contractor shall be repaired with new
materials to a condition equal to or better than their original
condition or to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Provide new fencing
where indicated on the drawings
3.4.1.7 The Contractor shall obtain written permission from property owners
for use of any access points other than ones located within right-ofways. Written permission shall contain conditions for use and
restoration agreements between property owner and Contractor.
3.4.1.8 All areas disturbed shall be restored to a condition equal to or better
than their original condition and shall be graded to drain.
3.4.1.9 The Contractor shall replace or repair all damaged or destroyed
hedgerows or property corners.
3.4.1.10 Topsoil shall be removed from trench line to a depth of 18 inches
and stockpiled for use in final restoration. Topsoil shall be replaced
to the same depth.
3.4.1.11 Excavated rock shall be removed from the site unless otherwise
ordered by the Engineer.
3.4.1.12 Restoration and fine grading shall follow within 1 week from the
time an area is disturbed or within 500 feet from the immediate work
site, whichever occurs first. Seeding shall follow as specified in
Section 02936 – Seeding.
3.4.2 Limits of Construction
3.4.2.1 The Contractor shall not disturb any areas outside the construction
limits indicated on the drawings without express written permission
from the Engineer. Limits of Construction are defined as the limits
of clearing and grading, existing public road right-of-way and new
tree line.
3.4.2.2 No clear-cutting of timber shall be permitted within the limits of
construction. The Contractor shall make select cutting of trees,
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02200/6
taking the smallest trees first, that are mandatory for the
construction of the utility line. The Engineer’s decision shall be
final on determination of which trees are to be cut.
3.5 Clean up debris resulting from site clearing operations continuously with the progress
of the work.
3.6 Remove debris from the site in such a manner as to prevent spillage. Keep pavement
and areas adjacent to site clean and free from mud, dirt, and debris at all times.
3.7 Surface Preparation
3.7.1 Stripping: Strip existing topsoil, when present, to a depth of 6 inches without
contamination by subsoil material. Stockpile topsoil separately from other
excavated material and locate convenient to finish grading area.
3.7.2 Unsuitable Material: Remove unsuitable soil materials, waste material,
vegetation, debris, decayed vegetable matter, sod, and mulch from the
construction site. Dispose of the unsuitable material off the Owner’s property
in accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations.
3.7.3 All subgrades shall be certified by a geotechnical engineer prior to
construction.
3.8 Protections
3.8.1 Protection Systems: Provide shoring, bracing, and sheeting as required in
accordance with the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers “Safety and Health
Requirements Manual,” EM-385-1-1, Section 25.
3.8.2 Site Drainage: Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and
subsurface water encountered during construction.
3.8.2.1 Surface Drainage: Completely drain the construction site during
periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry.
Provide temporary ditches, swales, and other drainage features and
equipment as required to maintain dry soils. When unsuitable
working platforms for equipment operation and unsuitable soil
support for subsequent construction features develop, remove
unsuitable material and provide new soil material as specified in this
section at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.8.2.2 Subsurface Drainage: Consider site surface and subsurface
conditions, available soil, and hydrological data. Remove water by
benching, sump pumping, deep well pumping, or other methods to
prevent softening of surfaces exposed by excavation. Use filters on
dewatering devices to prevent removal of fines from soil. Provide
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02200/7
erosion control at the outlet of piping to prevent erosion. Operate
dewatering system continuously until construction work below
existing water levels is complete.
3.8.3 Underground Utilities: Location of existing utilities indicated on the
drawings is approximate. The Contractor shall physically verify the
location and elevation of the existing utilities, whether indicated or not,
prior to starting construction. The Contractor shall contact Miss Utility and
respective utility owners for exact locations prior to any excavation near
utilities.
3.8.4 Machinery and Equipment: Movement of construction machinery and
equipment over pipes during construction shall be at the Contractor’s risk.
Repair or remove and provide new pipe for existing or newly installed pipe
that has been displaced or damaged at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.8.5 Flotation: The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent the
flotation of new piping and structures during installation and the period
before the new piping and associated structures are backfilled and placed in
service.
3.9 Excavation
3.9.1 Excavate to the elevations and dimensions indicated and as specified in this
section. Reuse excavated materials that meet the specified requirements for
the material type required at the intended location. When soil not meeting the
requirements specified in this section is encountered during excavation,
remove the unsuitable soil material and replace with select material as
specified in this section. Removal and disposal of unsuitable soil material
and placement and compaction of select material shall be performed at no
additional cost to the Owner.
3.9.2 Keep excavations free from water. Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by the
Contractor’s operations, and soils softened or made unsuitable for
subsequent construction due to exposure to weather. Refill with select
material and compact to 95% of ASTM D 698 maximum density. Unless
specified otherwise, refill excavations cut below indicated depth with select
material and compact to 95% of ASTM D 698 maximum density. Side slopes
when allowed shall be protected with 6-mil polyethylene sheeting.
3.9.3 Pipe Trenches: Excavate to the dimensions indicated and as specified herein.
Trenches in public roadways shall be excavated in accordance with the latest
edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications. Where rock is
encountered, excavate and remove rock to a minimum depth of 6 inches
below the pipe invert. Grade bottom of trenches to provide uniform support
for each section of pipe after pipe bedding placement.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02200/8
3.9.4 Unsuitable Subgrade Soil Materials: Subgrades which are determined to be
unsuitable for bearing new equipment, structures, pavements or piping, shall
have the unsuitable subgrade soil materials removed and disposed of, and
replaced with select material at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.9.5 Excavate embankment cutoff trench to the limits as shown on the drawings.
3.10 Filling and Backfilling: Fill and backfill to elevations and dimensions indicated.
Compact each lift before placing overlaying lift. All backfill shall be placed at plus
or minus three percent (3%) optimum moisture.
3.10.1 Common Fill Placement: Provide for general site. Place in 6-inch lifts.
Compact areas not accessible to rollers or compactors with mechanical hand
tampers. Aerate material excessively moistened by rain to satisfactory
moisture content. Provide a smooth finish surface by blading, rolling with a
smooth roller, or both.
3.10.2 Backfill and Fill Material Placement: Place in 6-inch lifts. Place backfill
material adjacent to structures as the structural elements are completed and
accepted. Backfill against concrete only when approved. Place and compact
material to avoid loading upon or against structures. Place backfill and fill
materials to 5 feet outside of structures.
3.10.3 Select Material Placement: Provide under all structures and concrete slabs.
Select materials shall be provided from approved borrow areas. In addition,
provide stone where indicated on the drawings. Place in 6-inch lifts. Backfill
adjacent to structures shall be placed as structural elements are completed
and accepted. Backfill against concrete only when approved. Place and
compact material to avoid loading upon or against structures.
3.10.4 Trench Backfilling: Backfill as rapidly as construction, testing, and
acceptance of work permits. Trenches shall be backfilled at the end of each
working day except where otherwise permitted. Place and compact initial
backfill and backfill materials in 6-inch lifts to the top of the trench.
Trenches in public roadways shall be backfilled and compacted in
accordance with the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge
Specifications.
3.10.5 Bedding Requirements: Bed all piping in accordance with bedding details of
the pipe utility owner.
3.10.5.1 Where rock is encountered, provide a minimum bedding depth of 6
inches beneath the pipe invert.
3.10.6 Subgrade for piping placed under the embankment shall be certified by the
geotechnical engineer prior to installation.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02200/9
3.10.7 Embankment and Cutoff Trench Requirements: Place in 6-inch lifts.
3.11 Compaction: Expressed as a percentage of maximum density. Determine in-place
density of the existing subgrade; if required density exists, no compaction of the
existing subgrade will be required.
3.11.1 General Site: Compact underneath areas designated for vegetation and areas
outside the 10-foot line of structures to 90% of ASTM D 698.
3.11.2 Structures and Concrete Slabs: Compact 12 inches of subgrade, and all fill,
backfill, and select materials to 98% of ASTM D 698.
3.11.3 Pipe Trenches: Compact fill, backfill, and select materials placed in pipe
trenches to 95% of ASTM D 698.
3.11.4 Adjacent Areas: Compact areas within 10 feet of structures to 95% of ASTM
D 698.
3.11.5 Paved Areas: Compact top 12 inches of subgrade, and all of fill, backfill, and
select materials to 98% of ASTM D 698. In addition to the specified
compaction requirements, fill and backfill materials shall be compacted to
develop a California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of 10.
3.11.6 Embankment and Cutoff Trench: Compact to 98% of maximum dry weight
density with a moisture content within + 3% of the optimum per ASTM D698.
3.12 Finish Operations
3.12.1 Grading: Finish grades as indicated within one-tenth of 1 foot. Grade areas to
drain water away from structures. For existing grades that will remain but
which were disturbed by the Contractor’s operations, grade as directed.
3.12.2 Seeding: Provide as specified in Section 02936 – Seeding.
3.12.3 Protection of Surfaces: Comply with all local requirements and the latest
edition of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook to control
erosion and sedimentation. Protect newly graded areas from traffic, erosion,
and settlements that may occur. Repair or reestablish damaged grades,
elevations, or slopes.
3.12.3.1 No more than 250 feet of trench shall be open at any one time.
3.12.3.2 During curb/curb and gutter construction activities, the Contractor
shall provide seeding and mulch restoration to ensure no more than
10,000 square feet of disturbed area remains unrestored at any
given time.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02200/10
3.12.3.3 Install silt fence on downhill side of construction activities and at
other locations to prevent sediment from entering drainageways.
3.12.3.4 Apply permanent or temporary soil stabilization to denuded areas
within 15 days after final grade is reached on any portion of the
site. In addition, apply soil stabilization within 15 days to denuded
areas which may not be at final grade but will remain dormant
(undisturbed) for longer than 60 days. Soil stabilization practices
include vegetative establishment, mulching, and the early
application of gravel base on areas to be paved.
3.12.3.5 Install straw bale dam or silt fence around soil stockpiles and
excavations.
3.12.3.6 Take all applicable erosion and siltation control measures prior to
grading.
3.12.3.7 Protect and maintain storm sewer inlets with inlet protection.
3.12.3.8 Inspect all erosion and sediment control devices at the close of each
work day and after each rainstorm. Make necessary repairs or clean
up immediately to maintain effectiveness of the device.
3.12.3.9 Where consistent with job safety requirements, easement
conditions, and construction methods, place all excavated material
on the uphill side of the trench. When the soil is placed on the
downhill side of the trench, divert maximum drainage toward the
trench.
3.12.3.10 Repair after cleanup: Upon completion of construction work and
after spoils and debris have been removed; regrade any areas
disturbed by the operations.
3.12.3.11 Water discharged from dewatering activities shall not be
discharged directly to any stream or body of water. Comply with
Specification 3.26, “Dewatering Structure,” of the latest edition of
the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.
3.13 Riprap: Riprap shall be installed in accordance with the latest edition of the VDOT
Road and Bridge Specifications, Section 414, “Riprap.” Geotextile fabric shall be
placed under all riprap.
3.14 Geotextile Fabric: Geotextile fabric shall be installed in accordance with the latest
edition of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook and the
manufacturer’s written recommendations.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02200/11
3.15 Disposition of Surplus Material: Waste unsuitable soil materials off the Owner’s
property as directed by the Owner and WW Associates in accordance with federal,
state, and local regulations.
3.16 Field Quality Control: The County shall employ an independent testing firm to
provide all soil testing required for this project. The Contractor will schedule the
tests as provided in Supplemental Contract General Conditions; Item 6.
3.16.1 Sampling: Take the number and size of samples required to perform the
following tests.
3.16.2 Testing: Perform one of each of the required tests for each material used.
Provide additional tests for each source change and as requested by WW
Associates.
3.16.2.1 Fill, Backfill, Embankment and Cutoff Trench: Test fill, backfill
and embankment/cutoff trench material in accordance
with
ASTM C 136 for conformance to ASTM D 2487 gradation limits;
ASTM D 1140 for material finer than the No. 200 sieve; ASTM
D 423 for liquid limit and ASTM D 424 for plastic limits; ASTM
D 698 or ASTM D 1557 for moisture density relations, as
applicable.
3.16.2.2 Select Material: Test select material in accordance with ASTM C
136 for conformance to ASTM D 2487 gradation limits; ASTM D
1140 for material finer than the No. 200 sieve; ASTM D 698 or
ASTM D 1557 for moisture density relations, as applicable.
3.16.2.3 Density Tests: Test soil density in accordance with ASTM D
1556, or ASTM D 6938. When ASTM D 6938 density testing is
used, verify density test results by performing an ASTM D 1556
density test at a location already ASTM D 6938 tested as
specified herein. Perform an ASTM D 1556 density test at the
start of the project, and for every ten (10) ASTM D 6938 density
tests thereafter. Test each lift at randomly selected locations every
500 square feet of existing grade in fills for structures and
concrete slabs, every 500 square feet for other fill areas, every
1,000 square feet of subgrade in cut, and every 250 linear feet for
pipe line installation (minimum one test per pipe line), and
additional tests as requested by WW Associates.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02200/12
Section 02500
Surfacing and Incidental Construction
1 GENERAL
1.1 Reference specifications where applicable to work under this section are referred to
by abbreviation as follows:
American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials................................................................................ AASHTO
American Society for Testing and Materials ..................................................... ASTM
Virginia Department of Transportation ............................................................. VDOT
1.2 Submittals: Provide the following in a timely manner in accordance with the
approved submittals schedule as specified in Section 01400 – General
Requirements.
1.2.1 Materials certificates signed by material producer and Contractor. Certificates
shall state that each material item meets specified requirements and is on the
VDOT approved materials list.
1.3 Materials and work shall be performed in accordance with and shall meet the
requirements of the referenced sections of the VDOT Road and Bridge
Specifications (2007 Edition with latest VDOT revisions) and the VDOT Road and
Bridge Standards (2008 Edition with latest VDOT revisions) unless noted
otherwise.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ... Aggregate course for stone surface access road at the site shall be Size No. 25 or 26,
graded aggregate material as defined in VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications,
Section 203 “Coarse Aggregate” and Section 205, “Crusher Run Aggregate”, and
cross-referenced sections.
3 E XE C U T IO N
3.1 Graded aggregate base course for stone surface construction methods and equipment
shall conform to requirements of Section 309, “Aggregate Base Course,” of VDOT
Road and Bridge Specifications.
3.2 ..... Subgrade Preparation: Subgrade preparation shall consist of the final machining of
the subgrade immediately prior to placing the aggregate base course. The surface
shall be true to line and grade. Construction methods and equipment shall conform
to applicable portions of Section 305, “Subgrade and Shoulders,” of VDOT Road
and Bridge Specifications.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02500/1
3.3 Pavement Repairs
3.3.1 Pavement repairs shall be performed at any point where excavations disturb
existing asphalt. Repairs shall be included in the lump sum bid for this
project.
3.3.2 Contractor shall match the existing subgrade, base, and overlay elevations
when installing repairs. Repairs shall bring trench area to the same elevation
as the surrounding area.
3.3.3 Asphalt surfaces that will be disturbed must be saw cut. No jagged edges will
be allowed. Make the cut in a straight line, parallel to, and 6 inches wider
than the trench, on each side, to provide an undisturbed shoulder under the
new work. Provide heel cut where new asphalt concrete pavement connects
to existing asphalt concrete pavement.
3.3.4 Where trenches cross a street, the Contractor shall disturb no more than one
half of the street width at one time, and restore the firsts trench opening to
satisfactory travelable condition before the second half is excavated. Avoid
placement of excavated material on existing pavement wherever possible.
Clean the pavement by an approved method. Do not use cleated equipment
on pavements. Any pavements damaged by equipment or Contractor’s
operation shall be repaired at the Owner’s discretion at no additional cost.
Alter normal traffic flow only with permission from the Owner.
3.3.5 Replace aggregate base course in layers not to exceed 6 inches in thickness to a
depth of 1 1/2 times the thickness of the original aggregate base. In no case
shall the replaced base be less than 8 inches thick.
3.3.6 Replace asphalt concrete base course equal to the original pavement asphalt
base.
3.3.7 Replace asphalt finish surface course equal to the original pavement surface
course.
3.3.8 Restore private entrances to the original condition or provide no less than 6
inches of aggregate base course, whichever condition is better.
3.4 All finished pavement edges shall be clean and straight. The final paving quality
control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be acceptable to the
Owner based on surface thickness and smoothness. Adjacent earth surface shall
match top of new gravel surface and ensure positive drainage. See Earthwork
Section 02200 for material and compaction requirements. See Seeding Section
02936 for restoration.
3.5 Do not block private entrances except for short periods, and maintain ingress and
egress to adjacent property at all times.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02500/2
3.6 Do not clog street drainage. Maintain shoulders, gutters, and ditches affected by
trenching operations to carry drainage flows. New pavement overlays shall not block
existing drainage flow conditions.
3.7 Upon completion of construction work and after spoils and debris have been removed;
regrade any areas disturbed by the operations.
3.8 Upon completion of construction and upon approval of the Owner a two-inch thick
top dressing of VDOT Size No. 25 or 26 grade aggregate material “Crusher Run
Aggregate” shall be applied to the access road/parking lot/turnaround area.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02500/3
Section 02660
Water Distribution System
1 GENERAL
1.1 Description: This section specifies all potable water system work 5 feet or more
outside of buildings.
1.2 Reference specifications are referred to by abbreviation as follows:
1.2.1
American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials.........................................................
AASHTO
1.2.2
American National Standards Institute ..................................
ANSI
1.2.3
American Society of Sanitary Engineering ...........................
ASSE
1.2.4
American Society for Testing and Materials .........................
ASTM
1.2.5
American Water Works Association .....................................
AWWA
1.2.6
Canadian Standards Association ...........................................
CSA
1.2.7
Commercial Standard (National Bureau of Standards) .........
CS
1.2.8
Virginia Department of Health ..............................................
VDH
1.3 Project Conditions: Separation of Water Lines and Sanitary Sewers.
1.3.1 Follow VDH standards for separation of water mains and sewer lines.
1.3.2 Parallel Installation
1.3.2.1 Normal Conditions: Water lines shall be constructed at least 10 feet
horizontally from a sewer or sewer manhole whenever possible, the
distance shall be measured edge-to-edge.
1.3.2.2 Unusual Conditions: When local conditions prevent a horizontal
separation of at least 10 feet, the water line may be laid closer to a
sewer or sewer manhole provided that:
1.3.2.3 The bottom of the water line is at least 18 inches above the top of the
sewer.
1.3.2.3.1 Where this vertical separation cannot be obtained, the
sewer shall be constructed of AWWA approved water
pipe pressure-tested in place to 50 psi without leakage
prior to backfilling. The sewer manhole shall be of
watertight construction and tested in place.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02660/1
1.3.3 Crossing
1.3.3.1 Normal conditions: Water lines crossing over sewers shall be laid to
provide a separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the
water line and the top of the sewer whenever possible.
1.3.3.1.1 Unusual conditions: When local conditions prevent a
vertical separation described in crossing, normal
conditions, paragraph above, the following construction
shall be used.
1.3.3.1.2 Sewers passing over or under water lines shall be
constructed of the materials described in parallel
installation, unusual conditions, as specified above.
1.3.3.1.3 Water lines passing under sewers shall, in addition, be
protected by providing:
1.3.3.1.3.1 A vertical separation of at least 18 inches
between the bottom of the sewer and the
top of the water line.
1.3.3.1.3.2 Adequate structural support for the
sewers to prevent excessive deflection of
the joints and settling on and breaking
water line.
1.3.3.1.3.3 That the length of the water line be
centered at the point of the crossing so
that joints shall be equidistant and as far
as possible from the sewer.
1.3.4 Sanitary Sewers or Sewer Manholes: No water pipes shall pass through or
come in contact with any part of a sewer or sewer manhole.
1.4 Submittals: Provide the following shop drawings in accordance with the approved
submittals schedule as specified in Section 01400 – General Requirements.
1.4.1 Pipe and Fittings: Catalog cuts and certificates of compliance for pipe, fittings,
linings, and materials for approval. Certificates shall state that materials
furnished comply with the standards specified in this section.
1.4.2 Pipe Restraint Devices
1.4.3 Valves: Catalog cuts and certificates of compliance for valves.
1.4.4 Valve Boxes
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02660/2
1.4.5 Tapping Sleeve and Valve
1.4.6 Water Piping Field Test Certification Reports
1.4.7 Bacteriological Test Reports (Submit to Owner) 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 Piping Application
2.1.1 The following piping systems, smaller than 2 inches in diameter, shall be
constructed of ASTM B 88 Type K flexible copper pipe unless otherwise
indicated:
2.1.1.1 Above grade water service piping
2.1.2 The following piping systems, smaller than 2 inches in diameter, shall be
constructed of solvent welded Schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe
unless otherwise indicated:
2.1.2.1 Below grade water service piping
2.1.3 Accessories: Provide flanges, joint restraints, connecting pieces, transition
glands, transition sleeves, tapping saddles, and other adapters as required for
complete and operable piping systems for the service indicated. Provide
restrained joints where indicated on the drawings and as specified in this
section.
2.2 Pipe
2.2.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping
2.2.1.1 Pipe, couplings, and fittings shall be Schedule 40 meeting the
requirements of ASTM D 1785, manufactured of material meeting
the requirements of ASTM D 1784, Type 1120. Provide ASTM D
2467 Schedule 80 fittings, ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. Joints
shall be solvent welded, meeting requirements of ASTM D 2855.
2.2.1.2 PVC pipe manufacturer shall be Charlotte Pipe and Foundry
Company, P.O. Box 35430, Charlotte, North Carolina 28235 or
approved equal.
2.2.1.3 Provide screwed joints and flanges as required to connect dissimilar
pipe materials, valves, equipment, and appurtenances.
2.2.2 Copper Tubing
2.2.2.1 Copper tubing and associated fittings shall be ASTM B 88, Type K
flexible.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02660/3
2.2.2.2 Brass fittings shall be compression joint by Ford Meter Box
Company, Inc. or approved equal.
2.3 Pipe Labeling
2.3.1 Detectable tape shall be provided for all below grade piping systems and shall
have a metallic core protected by a plastic jacket. The tape shall be
continuously marked indicating that a water main is buried beneath the tape.
In addition, a continuous No. 14 gauge copper wire with protective coating
shall be provided for all below grade piping systems as indicated on the
drawings.
2.4 Valves
2.4.1 Ball Valves: Ball valves shall be Class 150, meeting requirements of ANSI
B16.34. Valves shall have ANSI carbon steel bodies and balls. Valves shall
have stainless steel stems and trim, and Viton or Teflon seats, body seals,
and stem seals. Valves shall be lever operated. Valves shall be
manufactured by Velan Valve Corporation, ITT-Grinnell, Worchester, Inc.,
or approved equal.
2.5 Valve boxes shall be adjustable cast iron valve boxes of the two-piece screw-type.
Base shall be proper type and size for the valve with which it is used. The word
“WATER” shall be cast or embossed on the valve box lid in letters not less than 1inch high. Valve boxes shall be manufactured by Mueller Company, Dewey
Brothers, Tyler, or Bingham-Taylor or approved equal.
2.6 Pipe to sleeve sealant shall be grouting compound. Grouting compound shall be as
manufactured by 3M Company or be an equivalent product having tensile strength
of 80 psi and elongation property of 700% in accordance with ASTM D 3574 Test
E, and linear dimension change shall not exceed 18% when subject to wet and dry
cycles in accordance with ASTM D 756, Procedure G and ASTM D 1042.
2.7 Mechanical Type Pipe to Wall Sleeve Seals: Mechanical type pipe to wall sleeve seals
shall be “Link-Seal” pipe to wall closures manufactured by Thunderline
Corporation, Wayne, Michigan or approved equal. Seals shall be modular
mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to fill
annular space between pipe and wall opening and shall provide watertight seal
between pipe and wall opening.
3 EXECUTION
3.1 Pipe Laying
3.1.1 Take all precautions necessary to insure that pipe, valves, fittings, and other
accessories are not damaged in unloading, handling, and placing in trench.
Examine each piece of material just prior to installation to determine that no
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02660/4
damage has occurred. Remove any damaged material from the site and
replace with undamaged material.
3.1.2 Exercise care to keep foreign material and dirt from entering pipe during
storage, handling, and placing in trench. Close ends of in-place pipe at the end
of any work period to preclude the entry of animals and foreign material.
3.1.3 Bedding of pipe shall be as specified in Section 02200 – Earthwork.
3.1.4 Do not lay pipe when trench bottom is muddy or frozen, or has standing
water.
3.1.5 Use only those tools specifically intended for cutting the size and material and
type pipe involved. Make cut to prevent damage to pipe or lining and to
leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
3.2 Lay water main piping with bell ends facing the direction of laying. Where grade is
10 percent or greater, pipe shall be laid uphill with bell ends upgrade. Lay water
main piping with a minimum cover of 36 inches unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 Join and assemble solvent welded PVC pipe joints in accordance with requirements
of ASTM D 2855.
3.4 Welded, soldered, or brazed joints between sections of copper pipe and between pipe
and fittings shall be in compliance with ANSI B31.1. Make joints in piping system
tight and leakproof against the design pressure. Peening of welded joints to correct
leaks will not be permitted. Brazed or soldered joints that leak shall be disassembled,
cleaned, and made again.
3.5 Install detectable tape in trench above all pipe per the manufacturer’s written
recommendations. Install continuous copper wire in trench above all pipe as shown
on the drawings.
3.6 Set Valves and Valve Boxes as follows:
3.6.1 Equip all underground valve operators with valve boxes. Set box in alignment
with valve stem centered on valve nut. Set valve box to prevent transmitting
shock or stress to the valve. Set box cover flush with the finished ground
surface or pavement.
3.7 Installation of Tapping Saddles and Tapping Valves
3.7.1 All tapping saddles shall be set to avoid interference with existing pipe
joints.
3.7.2 After all tapping saddles and valves have been set in place; a 150-psi pressure
test shall be performed to insure that there are no leaks around the sleeve or
through the valve prior to tapping. All leakage shall be corrected.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02660/5
3.7.3 Actual taps shall be made in the presence of the Owner’s representative. The
Owner shall be given a minimum of 48 hours notice before tapping
operations commence.
3.8 Construct concrete cap or cradle in accordance with the latest edition of the VDOT
Road and Bridge Standards at locations where the vertical separation between the
new water main piping and adjacent utilities is less than 6 inches.
3.9 Use sleeves where pipes, valves, stem extensions, or equipment parts pass through
concrete or masonry walls or slabs. Sleeves shall be or sufficient size to allow
sealing around pipes and clearance for valve stem or equipment. Extend vertical
sleeves through slabs 1-inch above top surface.
3.9.1 Use cast iron or steel sleeves with intermediate collars to anchor and provide
water stops on sleeves that pass through exterior walls below grade. Seal
around pipes using grouting compound or “Link-Seal” pipe to wall closures
manufactured by Thunderline Corporation, Wayne, Michigan. Seals shall be
modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links
shaped to fill annular space between pipe and wall opening and shall provide
watertight seal between pipe and wall opening. Grouting compound shall be
mixed and placed in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer. Mechanical pipe to wall seal shall be installed in accordance
with the written recommendations of the manufacturer.
3.10 Acceptance Tests
3.10.1 After the line has been backfilled, subject the line or any valved section of the
line to a hydrostatic pressure test. Fill the system with water at velocity of
approximately 1 foot per second while necessary measures are taken to
eliminate all air. After the system has been filled, raise the pressure by pump
to 1.5 times the working pressure. Measure pressure at the low point on the
system compensating for gage elevation. Maintain this pressure for 2 hours.
If pressure cannot be maintained, determine cause, repair, and repeat the test
until successful.
3.10.2 A leakage test shall be conducted concurrently with the pressure test. Leakage
shall be determined with a calibrated test meter furnished by the contractor.
Leakage will be defined as the quantity of water required to maintain a
pressure within 5 psi of the specified test pressure, after air has been
expelled, and the pipe filled with water. Leakage shall not exceed that
quantity obtained by the formula below. If leakage exceeds that determined
by the formula, find and repair the leaks and repeat the test until successful.
The leakage formula shall be as follows:
L = SD (√P)/148,000
Where L = Allowable leakage in gallons/hour
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02660/6
S = Length of pipeline tested in feet
D = Nominal diameter of the piper in inches
P = Average test pressure during leakage test in psig
3.10.3 All visible leaks shall be repaired regardless of the amount of leakage.
3.11 Disinfect and test water mains and accessories in accordance with AWWA standards
and as specified herein.
3.11.1 Preliminary Flushing: The main shall be flushed prior to disinfection, except
when the tablet method is used. Flushing shall be at a velocity of not less
than 2.5 feet per second. Adequate provisions shall be made for drainage of
flushing water.
3.11.2 Form of Chlorine for Disinfection
3.11.2.1 Liquid chlorine shall be used only when suitable equipment is
available and only under the direct supervision of a person familiar
with the physiological, chemical, and physical properties of this
element and who is properly trained and equipped to handle any
emergency that may arise. Introduction of chlorine-gas directly
from the supply cylinder is unsafe and shall not be permitted.
3.11.2.2 Calcium hypochlorite contains 70% available chlorine by weight. It
shall be either granular or tabular in form. The tablets, six to eight
to the ounce, are designed to dissolve slowly in water. A chlorinewater solution shall be prepared by dissolving the granules or
tablets in water in the proportion requisite for the desired
concentration.
3.11.2.3 Sodium hypochlorite is supplied in strengths from 5.25% to 16%
available chlorine. The chlorine-water solution shall be prepared by
adding hypochlorite to water.
3.11.2.4 Application: The hypochlorite solutions shall be applied to the water
main with a gasoline or electrically powered chemical feed pump
designed for feeding chlorine solutions. For small applications, the
solutions may be fed with a hand pump; for example, a hydraulic
test pump. Feed lines shall be of such material and strength as to
withstand safely the maximum pressures that may be created by the
pumps. All connections shall be checked for tightness before the
hypochlorite solution is applied to the main.
3.11.3 Methods of Chlorine Application
3.11.3.1 Continuous Feed Method: Water from the existing distribution
system or other approved sources of supply shall be made to flow at
a constant, measured rate into the newly laid pipeline. The water
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02660/7
shall receive a dose of chlorine, also fed at a constant, measured
rate. The two rates shall be proportioned so that the chlorine
concentration in the water in the pipe is maintained at a minimum of
50 mg/L available chlorine. To assure that this concentration is
maintained, the chlorine shall be measured at intervals not
exceeding 2,000 feet in accordance with the procedures described in
the current edition of “Standard Methods” and AWWA M12 –
“Simplified Procedures for Water Examination.” In the absence of a
meter, the rate may be determined either by placing a pitot gage at
the discharge or by measuring the time to fill a container of known
volume.
During the application of the chlorine, valves shall be manipulated
to prevent the treatment dosage from flowing back into the line
supplying the water. Chlorine application shall not cease until the
entire main is filled with the chlorine solution. The chlorinated
water shall be retained in the main for at least 24 hours, during
which time all valves and hydrants in the section treated shall be
operated in order to disinfect the appurtenances. At the end of this
24-hour period, the treated water shall contain no less than 25 mg/L
chlorine throughout the length of the main.
3.11.3.2 Tablet Method: Use only when allowed by the Engineer. Do not use
this method if trench water or foreign material has entered the main
or if the water is below 41°F (5°C). This method may be used for
mains up to 12 inches in diameter, and where the total length of the
main is less than 2,500 feet.
Place tablets in each section of pipe and also in hydrants, hydrant
branches, and other appurtenances. Enough tablets shall be used to
ensure that a chlorine concentration of 25 mg/L is provided in the
water. Attach tablets using Permatex No. 1 adhesive or other
approved adhesive, except for the tablets placed in hydrants and in
the joints between the pipe sections. Tablets shall be free of
adhesive except on the one broad side to be attached. Place all
tablets at the top of the main. If the tablets are attached before the
pipe section is placed in the trench, mark the position of the tablet
in the pipe and assure that the pipe is placed with the tablet at the
top.
When installation is completed, fill the main with water at a
velocity of less than 1 foot per second. The water shall remain in
the pipe for at least 24 hours. Operate valves so that the strong
chlorine solution will not flow back into the line supplying the
water.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02660/8
3.11.4 Final Flushing: After the applicable retention period, the heavily chlorinated
water shall be flushed from the main until the chlorine concentration in the
water leaving the main is no higher than that generally prevailing in the
system, or less than 1 mg/L. Chlorine residual determination shall be made
to ascertain that the heavily chlorinated water has been removed from the
pipeline. Contractor shall provide dechlorination of all flushed water prior to
discharge.
3.11.5 Bacteriologic Tests
3.11.5.1 After final flushing and before the water main is placed in service,
samples shall be collected and tested for bacteriologic quality and
shall show the absence of coliform organisms. At least two samples
shall be collected at least 24 hours apart at intervals not exceeding
2,000 feet, and tested by a VDH-approved laboratory and results
submitted to the Owner.
3.11.5.2 Samples for bacteriological analysis shall be collected in sterile
bottles treated with sodium thiosulfate. If laboratory results indicate
the presence of coliform bacteria, the samples are unsatisfactory,
and disinfection shall be repeated until the samples are satisfactory.
3.11.5.3 A sampling tap consisting of a corporation cock with metal pipe
shall be installed within 2 feet of valves. The corporation stop inlet
shall be male, 1-inch in size, and the outlet shall have 1-inch I.P.
threads and a cap.
3.11.6 Cleaning, disinfection, and testing will be the responsibility of the
Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish the water required for these
operations at his own cost and expense. No separate payment, other than that
included in the contract lump sum, will be allowed.
3.11.7 Testing and disinfection of the completed sections shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility to repair or replace any cracked or defective
pipe. All work necessary to secure a tight line shall be done at the
Contractor’s expense.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02660/9
Section 02720
Storm Sewer System
1
GENERAL
1.1
System Description: Work in this section includes all storm drainage work on
this project.
1.2
Reference specifications are referred to by abbreviation as follows:
1.2.1
American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials ............................................................ AASHTO
1.3
1.2.2
American National Standards Institute .............................................. ANSI
1.2.3
American Society for Testing and Materials ................................... ASTM
1.2.4
Virginia Department of Transportation ........................................... VDOT
Submittals: Provide the following in timely manner in accordance with the
approved submittals schedule as specified in Section 01400 – General
Requirements.
1.3.1
Shop Drawings of the following:
1.3.1.1
Pipe
1.3.1.2 End Sections/Endwalls
1.3.1.3
Storm Drainage Item Details
2 PRODUCTS:
2.1
Piping Application
2.1.1
HDPE storm sewer shall be constructed of high density polyethylene
(HDPE) Type S corrugated pipe meeting AASHTO M294.
2.1.2
PVC storm sewer pipe and joints shall meet the requirements specified
in Section 02660 Water Distribution System.
2.2
Drop inlets, curb drop inlets and manholes and other storm drainage items shall be
in accordance with the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards
(2008 edition with latest VDOT revisions).
2.3
Pipe to precast concrete storm drainage structure connections shall be installed in
accordance with the latest edition of the VDOT Road and Bride Specifications.
3 EXECUTION
3.1
Maintain drainage on site to prevent erosion, damaging water, and standing water
during all phases of construction.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02720/1
3.2
Keep excavations clear of water while work is being installed. Control subsurface
water in accordance with Section 02200 - Earthwork.
3.3
Take all precautions necessary to insure that pipe, fittings, and related items are
not damaged in unloading, handling, and placing in trench. Examine each piece
of material just prior to installation to determine that no damage has occurred.
Remove any damaged material from the site and replace with undamaged
material.
3.4
Do not lay pipe when trench conditions or weather are unsuitable for such work.
Keep pipe interior clean and free from dirt or waste materials.
3.5
Lay pipe so as to maintain a true alignment and grade as indicated on drawings.
After completion, the pipe shall exhibit a full circle of light when lighted at one
manhole and viewed from the next.
3.5.1
Commence laying piping at the lowest point on a section of line and lay
pipe upgrade with bell or groove ends upstream.
3.5.2
Pipe Joint: Preparatory to making pipe joints, clean and dry all surfaces
of joint pipe and jointing material. Use lubricants, primers, adhesives,
and similar materials as recommended by the manufacturers. Place, fit,
join, and adjust the jointing materials or factory fabricated joints as
recommended by manufacturer to obtain the degree of water tightness
required. As soon as possible after the joint is made, place sufficient
backfill material, as specified in Section 02200 – Earthwork, along each
side of pipe to resist forces that might tend to move pipe off line and
grade.
3.5.3
Backfill as specified in Section 02200 – Earthwork. Place backfill over
the pipe immediately after the pipe has been laid.
3.6
Construct end sections and other storm drainage items as detailed in the latest
edition of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards or on the drawings, as
applicable.
3.7
Join pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.8
As each joint is laid, visually inspect to be certain that no jointing compound,
gasket, or trash is protruding from the joint or lying inside the pipe.
3.9
At the completion of constructing the improvements associated with this contract,
the contractor shall flush the entire closed conduit storm drain system with potable
water under suitable pressure to remove any sediment deposits or other observed
obstructions.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02720/2
Section 02730
Wastewater Piping Systems
1 GENERAL
1.1 Description: This section specifies all wastewater piping for the wastewater treatment
plant.
1.2 Reference specifications are referred to by abbreviation as follows:
1.2.1 American National Standards Institute ..............................
ANSI
1.2.2 American Society for Testing and Materials .....................
ASTM
1.2.3 American Water Works Association .................................
AWWA
1.2.4 Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association ........................................
UNI-B
1.2.5 Virginia Department of Health ..........................................
VDH
1.2.6 Virginia Department of Transportation .............................
VDOT
1.3 Project Conditions: Separation of Water Lines and Sanitary Sewers
1.3.1 Follow VDH standards for the separation of sanitary sewer and water
distribution systems.
1.3.2 Parallel Installation
1.3.2.1 Normal Conditions: Sewer lines and manholes shall be constructed at
least 10 feet horizontally from a water line whenever possible. The
distance shall be measured edge-to-edge.
1.3.2.2 Unusual Conditions: When local conditions prevent a horizontal
separation of at least 10 feet, then maximum horizontal separation
shall be provided with vertical separation of bottom of water line at
least 18 inches above top of sewer. Where this vertical separation
cannot be obtained, the sewer shall be constructed of AWWA
approved water pipe pressure-tested in place to 50 psi without
leakage prior to backfilling. The sewer manhole shall be of
watertight construction and tested in place.
1.3.3 Crossing
1.3.3.1 Normal Conditions: Sewers crossing under water lines shall be laid to
provide a separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of
water line and the top of the sewer whenever possible.
1.3.3.2 Unusual Conditions: When local conditions prevent a vertical
separation described in “Crossing, Normal Conditions,” paragraph
above, the following construction shall be used.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02730/1
1.3.3.2.1 Sewers passing over water lines shall be laid to provide:
1.3.3.2.1.1 Vertical separation of at least 18 inches
between bottom of sewer and top of
water line,
1.3.3.2.1.2 Adequate structural support for the
sewers to prevent excessive deflection of
the joints and settling on and breaking
the water line,
1.3.3.2.1.3 Maximum separation of water and sewer
line joints.
1.3.3.2.1.4 Sewers passing over or under water lines
shall be constructed of cast or ductile
iron with mechanical joints as described
in “Parallel Installation, Unusual
Conditions,” paragraph above.
1.3.4 Sanitary Sewers or Sewer Manholes: No water pipes shall pass through or
come in contact with any part of a sewer or sewer manhole.
1.4 Submittals: Provide the following in accordance with the approved submittals
schedule as specified in Section 01400 – General Requirements.
1.4.1 Pipe and Fittings: Catalog cuts and certificates of compliance for pipe, fittings,
linings, and materials for approval. Certificates shall state that materials
furnished comply with the standards specified in this section.
1.4.2 Pipe Restraint Devices
1.4.3 Valves: Catalog cuts and certificates of compliance for valves.
1.4.4 Valve Boxes
1.4.5 Flexible Couplings
1.4.6 Precast Concrete Manhole and appurtenances
1.4.7 Manhole Frames and Covers
1.4.8 Manhole Steps
1.4.9 Pipe to Manhole Connection Details
1.4.10 Certification Reports for Manhole and Sanitary Sewer Testing
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02730/2
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Piping Application
2.1.1 All below grade sanitary sewer piping, 6 inches and larger in diameter, shall be
constructed of push-on joint SDR 35 solid wall polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
gravity sewer pipe.
2.1.2 All below grade wastewater treatment plant piping systems, smaller than 6
inches in diameter, shall be constructed of solvent welded Schedule 80
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe unless otherwise indicated.
2.1.3 Accessories: Provide flanges, connecting pieces, transition glands, transition
sleeves, and other adapters as required for complete and operable piping
systems for service indicated. Provide restrained joints where indicated on
the drawings and as specified in this section.
2.2 Valve Application
2.2.1 Wastewater plant valves shall be PVC ball valves.
2.2.2 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic gravity sewer piping (6 inches or larger)
shall meet requirements of ASTM D 3034 and be integral bell, gasketed
joint pipe with dimension ratio (DR) of 35 and minimum pipe stiffness (PS)
of 46 psi.
2.2.2.1 Pipe joint shall meet requirement of ASTM D 3212.
2.2.2.2 Rubber gaskets shall meet physical requirements specified in ASTM
F 477 in all respects.
2.2.2.3 PVC gravity sewer piping manufacturer shall be Charlotte Pipe and
Foundry Company, P.O. Box 35430, Charlotte, North Carolina
28235 or approved equal.
2.2.3 Schedule 80 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping
2.2.3.1 Pipe, couplings, and fittings shall be Schedule 80 meeting the
requirements of ASTM D 1785, manufactured of material meeting
the requirements of ASTM D 1784, Type 1120. Provide ASTM D
2467 Schedule 80 fittings, ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. Joints
shall be solvent welded, meeting requirements of ASTM D 2855.
2.2.3.2 Provide screwed joints and flanges as required to connect dissimilar
pipe materials, valves, equipment, and appurtenances.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02730/3
2.2.3.3 Schedule 80 PVC piping manufacturer shall be Charlotte Pipe and
Foundry Company, P.O. Box 35430, Charlotte, North Carolina
28235 or approved equal.
2.3 Valves
2.3.1 Ball valves for service with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) piping shall be
constructed of ASTM D 1784 PVC body, ball, carrier, and stem with
reversible PTFE ball seat and FPM (Viton) “o” rings and gaskets. Socket
welded construction shall be PVC full port, True Union (Double
Union/Double Block through 3-inch diameter) design. Flanged construction
shall be PVC flanges conforming to 150-pound drilling. Provide locking
handle for ball valves at locations as indicated on the drawings. Valves shall
be suitable for 150-psi nonshock cold water service at 70°F. Valves shall be
Chemtrol or Hayward. No leakage shall be allowed.
2.4 Valve boxes shall be adjustable cast iron valve boxes of the three-piece type,
consisting of lid, two-piece screw-type extension, and base. Base shall be proper
type and size for the valve with which it is used. The word “SEWER” shall be cast
or embossed on the valve box lid in letters not less than 1-inch high. Valve boxes
shall be manufactured by Mueller Company, Dewey Brothers, Tyler, or BinghamTaylor.
2.5 Flexible couplings for connecting pipes of dissimilar materials shall be as
manufactured by Fernco of Davison, Michigan or approved equal.
2.6 Flexible couplings for ductile iron piping shall be of a gasketed, sleeve type. Each
coupling shall consist of a steel middle ring, two steel followers, two rubber
compounded wedge section gaskets, and sufficient galvanized track head steel bolts
to properly compress the gaskets. Couplings shall be of the type to match piping in
which installed.
Couplings shall be Style 38 manufactured by Dresser
Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries, Smith-Blair Products of Rockwell
International, or approved equal. All couplings shall be provided with tie rod
restraint.
2.7 Flange adapters for joining plain-end pipe to flanged items shall be Style 127 or 128
as manufactured by Dresser Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries, SmithBlair Products of Rockwell International, or approved equal.
2.8 Pipe Labeling
2.8.1 Above grade piping 1-inch in diameter and larger shall be labeled. Provide
labeling every 15 linear feet of pipe and spell out the pipe system. Labels shall
be either black for light colored piping or white for dark colored piping.
2.8.2 Detectable tape shall be provided for all below grade piping systems and shall
have a metallic core protected by a plastic jacket. The tape shall be
continuously marked indicating that a sewer line is buried beneath the tape.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02730/4
In addition, a continuous No. 14 gauge copper wire with protective coating
shall be provided for all below grade piping systems as indicated on the
drawings.
2.9 Manholes
2.9.1 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Section
2.9.1.1 Precast reinforced concrete manhole sections shall meet requirements
of ASTM C 478. Section ends shall have o-ring gasket groove
provided during manufacturing process. Gaskets for section joints
shall meet requirements of ASTM C 443. Joints may also be sealed
with flexible butyl resin sealant as manufactured by Concrete
Sealants, Inc. or approved qual. Sealant shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations. Top
sections for all manholes shall be designed to withstand HS-20
traffic loading.
2.9.1.2 Protective coating for concrete manhole section interior shall be two
coats of coal tar solution such as International protective coat
“Intertuf 100” or Pittsburgh Paint “Coal Cat 97-640/97-641” or
manufactured with calcareous aggregate so that the finished product
shall have an AZ factor equal to 90.
2.9.2 Manhole frames and covers shall be roadway type with deep socket covers.
Machine frames and covers to prevent rattling. Frames shall be provided
with holes for bolting it down to manhole riser section. Provide cover with
two 3/4-inch diameter holes for ventilation. Castings shall be gray iron
meeting requirements of ASTM A 48, Class 30, and have 24-inch diameter
clear openings such as Neenah Foundry Company Type R-1642 with Type
“C” cover by U.S. Foundry, East Jordan Iron Works, or approved equal.
Each cover shall have cast or embossed on it in letters not less than 1-inch
high “SANITARY SEWER” The frame and cover shall weigh at least 277
pounds.
2.9.3 Manhole frames shall be anchored to the top of the manhole riser sections with
3
/4-inch expansion bolts. Two passes of “ConSeal” bitumastic sealant or
approved equal in 1-inch rope form shall be used to provide watertight seal
between frame and manhole riser section. Clean manhole riser and frame
thoroughly prior to installation.
2.9.4 Manhole steps shall be “Surefoot” step constructed of a No. 4 steel reinforcing
rod encased in corrosion-resistant rubber by Oliver Tire & Rubber Company
or approved equal.
2.9.5 Pipe to manhole connection shall be sealed with a flexible boot, gasket, sleeve,
or as detailed on drawings and meet requirements of ASTM C 923.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02730/5
2.9.5.1 When the boot is used, the port shall be cored to the size, shape,
surface finish, and location required and not cast in the manhole.
Angular adjustments through 20º shall be allowed. The flexible boot
shall be a 3/8-inch thick neoprene compound meeting ASTM C 443
specifications. The boot shall be secured to the port with an internal
aluminum expanding band and to the pipe with a nonmagnetic
corrosion resistant steel external band. Boot seal shall be “Kor-NSeal” as manufactured by National Pollution Control Systems, Inc.
or approved equal.
2.9.5.2 When gasket is used, the gasket shall be a rubber pressed wedge
gasket cast into the manhole with a maximum deflection of 15º as
manufactured by Press-Seal Gasket Corporation or approved equal.
2.9.5.3 When sleeve is used, the sleeve shall be a flexible rubber sleeve cast
into the manhole complete with stainless steel strap as manufactured
by Interpace Corporation or approved equal.
2.10 Sleeves through concrete or masonry walls or slabs shall be cast iron or Schedule 40
steel. Provide sleeves through walls, floors, and ceilings for all pipe penetrations
except where wall pipes are indicated.
2.11 Pipe to sleeve sealant shall be grouting compound. Grouting compound shall be as
manufactured by 3M Company or be an equivalent product having tensile strength
of 80 psi and elongation property of 700% in accordance with ASTM D 3574 Test
E, and linear dimension change shall not exceed 18% when subject to wet and dry
cycles in accordance with ASTM D 756, Procedure G and ASTM D 1042.
2.12 Mechanical Type Pipe to Wall Sleeve Seals: Mechanical type pipe to wall sleeve
seals shall be “Link-Seal” pipe to wall closures manufactured by Thunderline
Corporation, Wayne, Michigan or approved equal. Seals shall be modular
mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to fill
annular space between pipe and wall opening and shall provide watertight seal
between pipe and wall opening.
3 E XE C U T IO N
3.1 Inspection and Preparation: Prior to all piping work, carefully inspect the installed
work or excavation by other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the
point where the piping may installed in accordance with these documents. Follow
the drawings in laying out work and check drawings of other trades to verify
sufficient space to install piping. Undimensioned drawings are intended to indicate
the general arrangement of piping systems and are not intended to convey precise
locational information. Coordinate with other trades to permit all phases of the work
to be installed. Offsets, fittings, and extra pipe, necessary to avoid interference or
provide maximum headroom and space shall be furnished and installed without
additional expense to the Owner. If the piping is installed without coordinating with
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02730/6
other phases of the work and so as to cause interference, the necessary changes shall
be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.2 Installation: Run piping concealed in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. Run
piping exposed in equipment rooms, service areas, or areas with no means or need
for concealment. Excessive cutting and similar operations likely to weaken a
building structure to facilitate the piping installation will not be permitted.
Implement suitable measures throughout the construction period to prevent trash
and dirt from entering pipes, before, during, and after installation. Unless otherwise
indicated, run piping parallel to the walls of the building. Erect vertical piping
straight and plumb, with risers centered in pipe sleeves. Offsets shall conform to
offsets in the building construction. Coordinate the work to insure that sleeves and
inserts are positioned accurately along with other built-in items, before concrete
pouring takes place, and before walls, partitions, and ceilings or roofs are erected so
as to reduce to an absolute minimum the necessity for cutting or patching at a later
stage.
3.3 Take all precautions necessary to insure that pipe, valves, fittings, and related items
are not damaged in unloading, handling, and placing in trench. Examine each piece
of material just prior to installation to determine that no damage has occurred.
Remove any damaged material from the site and replace with undamaged material.
3.3.1 Keep pipe clean. Exercise care to keep foreign material and dirt form
entering pipe during storage, handling, and placing. Close ends of in-place
pipe at the end of any work period to prevent entry of animals and foreign
material.
3.3.2 Bed pipe in accordance with Section 02200 – Earthwork and as detailed on the
drawings.
3.3.3 Do not lay pipe when weather or trench conditions are unsuitable.
3.4 Lay gravity sewers so as to maintain a true alignment and grade as indicated on
drawings. After completion, the pipe shall exhibit a full circle of light when lighted
at one manhole and viewed from the next.
3.4.1 Commence laying gravity sewers at the lowest point on a section of line and
lay pipe with the bell ends uphill.
3.4.2 Pipe Joint: Preparatory to making pipe joints on gravity sewer lines, clean
and dry all surfaces of joint pipe and jointing material. Use lubricants,
primers, adhesives, and similar materials as recommended by the
manufacturers. Place, fit, join, and adjust the jointing materials or factory
fabricated joints as recommended by manufacturer to obtain the degree of
watertightness required. As soon as possible after the joint is made, place
sufficient backfill material, as specified in Section 02200 – Earthwork,
along each side of pipe to resist forces that might tend to move pipe off
line and grade.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02730/7
3.4.3 Backfill as specified in Section 02200 - Earthwork. Place backfill over the pipe
immediately after the pipe has been laid.
3.5 Join push-on joint pipe as follows:
3.5.1 Thoroughly clean inside of the bell and 8 inches of the outside of the spigot
end of the joining pipe to remove oil, grit, excess coating, and other foreign
matter. Flex rubber gasket and insert in the gasket recess of the bell socket.
Apply a thin film of gasket lubricant supplied by pipe manufacturer to either
the gasket or the spigot end of the joining pipe.
3.5.2 Start spigot end of pipe into socket with care. The joint shall then be completed
by forcing the plain end to the bottom of the socket with a forked tool or jack
type device. Field cut pipe shall have the end filed to match the manufactured
spigot end.
3.5.3 Join restrained push-on joints as recommended in writing by the
manufacturer.
3.5.4 Permissible deflection of push-on joint pipe shall not be greater than listed in
AWWA C600.
3.5.5 Permissible deflection in restrained push-on joint pipe shall be as
recommended in writing by the manufacturer.
3.6 Join restrained push-on joint ductile iron pipe as recommended in writing by the
manufacturer. Permissible deflection in restrained joint pipe shall be as
recommended in writing by the manufacturer.
3.7 Join polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe using rubber ring gaskets in bell joints as
recommended in writing by the manufacturer. Join and assemble solvent welded
PVC pipe joints in accordance with requirements of ASTM D 2855.
3.8 Join pipe of different materials by using Fernco couplings or approved equal in
accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations.
3.9 Set Valves and Valve Boxes as follows:
3.9.1 Equip all underground valve operators with valve boxes. Set box in alignment
with valve stem centered on valve nut. Set valve box to prevent transmitting
shock or stress to the valve. Set box cover flush with the finished ground
surface or pavement.
3.10 Construct manholes using precast reinforced concrete manhole sections except as
otherwise noted. Install manhole frames and covers and manhole steps using
materials specified under products.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02730/8
3.11 Construct manhole channel with smooth semicircular bottoms matching inside
diameters of the connecting sewers. Change directions of flow with a smooth curve
of as large a radius as the manhole size will permit. Change size and grade of
channels gradually and evenly. Channels may be formed directly in the concrete
manhole bottom, made of channel pipe, laid in concrete, or constructed by laying
full section sewer pipe through the manhole and breaking out the top half when the
surrounding concrete has hardened. Manhole floors outside the channels shall be
smooth and shall have slope between 2 and 4 inches per foot toward the channels.
3.12 Install precast concrete valve structures in accordance with the manufacturer’s
written recommendations. Provide clean coarse aggregate fill beneath each structure
in accordance with Section 02200 – Earthwork and as indicated on the drawings.
3.13 Construct concrete cap or cradle in accordance with the latest edition of the VDOT
Road and Bridge Standards at locations where the vertical separation between the
new sanitary sewer and adjacent utilities is less than 6 inches.
3.14 Use wall pipes or sleeves where pipes, valves, stem extensions, or equipment parts
pass through concrete or masonry walls or slabs. Sleeves shall be or sufficient size to
allow sealing around pipes and clearance for valve stem or equipment. Extend
vertical sleeves through slabs 1-inch above top surface.
3.14.1 Use cast iron or steel sleeves with intermediate collars to anchor and provide
water stops on sleeves that pass through exterior walls below grade. Seal
around pipes using grouting compound or “Link-Seal” pipe to wall closures
manufactured by Thunderline Corporation, Wayne, Michigan. Seals shall be
modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links
shaped to fill annular space between pipe and wall opening and shall provide
watertight seal between pipe and wall opening. Grouting compound shall be
mixed and placed in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer. Mechanical pipe to wall seal shall be installed in accordance
with the written recommendations of the manufacturer.
3.15 For buried pressure piping, provide retainer gland type devices, restraining devices,
or restrained joint type pipe at all changes in direction of pressure piping, at dead
ends, and as shown on the drawings.
3.15.1 Restrain all joints with retainer glands/devices in accordance with the written
recommendations of the retainer gland/device manufacturer. All pipe joints
shall be restrained with retainer glands/devices a minimum of 60 feet each
side of a fitting or valve.
3.15.2 Where retainer glands/devices are used, extreme care shall be taken so that
each set screw is tightened as recommended by the manufacturer before the
pipe is backfilled and tested.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02730/9
3.16 Install detectable tape in trench above all pipe per the manufacturer’s written
recommendations. Install continuous copper wire in trench above all pipe as
indicated on the drawings.
3.17 Pressure pipe tests shall be as follows:
3.17.1 Supply the pumps, potable water, calibrated gages and meters, and all the
necessary apparatus.
3.17.2 Hydrostatic Pressure Test: After the line has been backfilled, a hydrostatic
pressure test shall be performed using potable water. Carefully fill the system
with potable water at a velocity of approximately 1 foot per second while
necessary measures are taken to eliminate all air. After the system has been
filled, raise the pressure by pump to 1.5 times the working pressure. Measure
pressure at lowest point in the system with gauge compensated for elevation.
Maintain this pressure for at least 2 hours. If pressure cannot be maintained,
determine the cause, repair, and repeat the test until successful.
3.17.3 Following the hydrostatic pressure test, subject the system to a leakage test.
Use calibrated meter to determine leakage. Leakage shall be defined as the
quantity of potable water that must be supplied into the pipe to maintain
working pressure, after all air in the pipe line has been expelled and the
pipe has been filled with potable water. Duration of leakage test shall be 2
hours. Leakage shall not exceed the quantity determined by the formula,
find and repair the leaks and repeat the test until successful. The formula is
as follows.
L = SD (√P)/148,000
Where:
L = Allowable leakage in gallons/hour
S = Lengths of pipeline tested in feet
D = Nominal diameter of the pipe in inches
P = Average test pressure during leakage test in psig
3.17.4 Repairs: If piping or valves fail to meet test requirements, or if any leaks,
crooked pipe, or other defects are visible by inspection, the Contractor shall
repair or rebuild at his expense those portions of pressure piping which are
faulty. The tests and repairs shall be continued until the pressure piping is
deemed acceptable.
3.18 Testing Gravity Sewer Lines
3.18.1 Low pressure air testing in accordance with UNI-B-6 may be used on
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sanitary sewer lines. Low pressure air testing in
accordance with ASTM C 924 may be used on all other sanitary sewer lines
24 inches or less in diameter. All manholes shall be tested using the
infiltration method, exfiltration method, or vacuum testing. Tests shall be
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02730/10
conducted on short sections of sewer line; i.e., between manholes, or at the
end of each day’s work. Installation of sewers will not be permitted at a
point more than 2,000 feet ahead of any section of sewer or any manhole
which has not been given the final test and accepted. The Contractor shall
provide all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary to make the
tests. All monitoring gauges shall be subject to calibration, if deemed
necessary. All sewer lines, regardless of size, that cross above or below
streams shall be tested for and exhibit zero infiltration or exfiltration.
3.18.2 Low Pressure Air Test
3.18.2.1 Summary of Method: After the backfill has been placed and
compacted to a minimum depth of 1 foot over the pipe, plug the
section of the sewer line to be tested. Introduce low-pressure air into
the plugged line.
3.18.2.2 Preparation of the Sewer Line: Flush and clean the sewer line prior
to testing, thus serving to wet the pipe surface as well as clean out
any debris. A wetted interior pipe surface will produce more
consistent results. Plug all pipe outlets using approved pneumatic
plugs with a sealing length equal to or greater than the diameter of
the line that is being tested. Give special attention to laterals.
3.18.2.3 Groundwater Determination: Install a 1/2-inch capped galvanized
pipe nipple, approximately 12 inches long, through the manhole.
Immediately prior to the line test, the groundwater elevation shall
be determined by removing the pipe cap and blowing air through
the pipe nipple into the ground so as to clear it, and then connecting
a clear plastic hose to the pipe nipple. The hose shall be held
vertically and a measurement of the height in feet of water over the
invert of the pipe shall be taken after the water has stopped rising in
the plastic hose.
3.18.2.4 Procedures
3.18.2.4.1 Determine the test duration for the section under test by
computation from the applicable formulas shown in
ASTM C 924, or from the following “Air Test Table.”
The pressure-holding time is based on an average
holding pressure of 3 psi (21 kPa) gauge or a drop from
3.5 psi (24 kPa) to 2.5 psi (17 kPa) gauge. The tests
shall be conducted between two consecutive manholes
or as directed.
3.18.2.4.2 The test section of the sewer line shall be plugged at each
end. One of the plugs used at the manhole shall be
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02730/11
tapped and equipped for the air inlet connection for
filling the line from the air compressor.
3.18.2.4.3 All service laterals, stubs, and fittings into the sewer test
section shall be properly plugged and carefully braced
against the internal pressure to prevent air leakage by
slippage and blowouts.
3.18.2.4.4 Connect air hose to tapped plug selected for the air inlet.
Then connect the other end of the air hose to the
portable air control equipment which consists of valves
and pressure gages used to control the air entry rate to
the sewer test section and the air pressure in the pipe
line.
3.18.2.4.5 More specifically, the air control equipment shall include
a shutoff valve, pressure regulating valve, pressure
reduction valve, and a monitoring pressure gauge
having a pressure range from 0 to 10 psi. The gauge
shall have minimum divisions of 0.10 psi and an
accuracy of plus or minus 0.04 psi.
3.18.2.4.6 Connect another air hose between the air compressor (or
other source of compressed air) and the air control
equipment. This completes the test equipment setup.
Test operations may commence.
3.18.2.4.7 Supply air to the test section slowly, filling the pipe line
until a constant pressure of 4.0 psig is maintained. The
air pressure shall be regulated to prevent the pressure
inside the pipe from exceeding 10.0 psig.
3.18.2.4.8 When constant pressure of 4.0 psig is reached, throttle
the air supply to maintain the internal pressure above
3.5 psig for at least 5 minutes. This time permits the
temperature of the entering air to equalize with the
temperature of the pipe wall. During this stabilization
period, check all plugged fittings with a soap solution to
detect any leakage at these connections. If leakage is
detected at any plug, release the pressure in the line and
tighten all leaky plugs. Then start the test operation
again by supplying air. When it is necessary to bleed off
the air to tighten or repair a faulty plug, a new 5-minute
interval shall be allowed after the pipe line has been
refilled.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02730/12
3.18.2.4.9 After the stabilization period, shut off or disconnect the
air supply. Before starting the test, the pressure may be
allowed to drop to 3.5 psig. Record the drop in pressure
for the test period. If the pressure has dropped more
than 1.0 psi (7 kPa) gauge during the test period, the
line shall be presumed to have failed. The test may be
discontinued when the prescribed test time has been
completed even though the 1.0 psig drop has not
occurred.
3.18.2.4.10 If the pipe to be tested is submerged in groundwater, the
test pressure shall be increased 1.0 psi for every 2.31
feet the groundwater level is above the invert of the
sewer.
3.18.2.4.10.1 Example: If the vertical height of water
from the sewer invert to the top of the
water column measures 4.62 feet, the
additional air pressure required would be
4.62 divided by 2.31 equals 2 psi.
3.18.2.4.10.2 Therefore, the starting pressure of the test
would be 3.5 plus 2 or 5.5 psig, and the
1.0 psig drop would be to 4.5 psig. There
is no change in the allowable drop (1.0
psig) or in the time requirements
established for the basic air test.
3.18.2.5 Safety: The air test may be dangerous if, because of lack of
understanding or carelessness, a line is improperly prepared.
3.18.2.5.1 It is extremely important that the various plugs be
installed and braced in such a way as to prevent
blowouts. A force of 250 pounds is exerted on an 8-inch
(203 mm) plug by an internal pipe pressure of 5 psi (34
kPa), it should be realized that sudden expulsion of a
poorly installed plug or of a plug that is partially
deflated before the pipe pressure is released can be
dangerous.
3.18.2.5.2 As a safety precaution, pressurizing equipment shall
include a regulator or relief valve set at 10 psi (69 kPa)
to avoid over-pressurizing and damaging an otherwise
acceptable line. No one shall be allowed in the
manholes during testing.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02730/13
3.18.2.6 Table: The air test table at the end of this section has been prepared
utilizing applicable formulas from ASTM C 924.
3.19 Manhole Testing
3.19.1 All manholes shall be tested using the infiltration method, exfiltration
method, or vacuum testing.
3.19.2 Infiltration or Exfiltration Method: All pipes leading to and from a manhole
shall be plugged. Plugs shall be inserted into the pipes a distance greater than
the length of the plugs used to test each respective section of sewer line to
insure the manhole and sewer line tests overlap. Plugs shall be secured to the
manhole structure. The manhole shall be filled with potable water to the top
of frame and allowed to soak for a minimum of 2 hours and a maximum of
12 hours to permit the manhole to absorb water. The cover shall be on the
manhole during the soaking period. At the end of the soaking period, potable
water shall be added until the manhole overflows. After 30 minutes, check
difference in level and convert to gallons. Manhole leakage shall not exceed
1
/4-gallon per hour. Upon completion of the test, the water shall be removed
from the manhole.
3.19.3 Vacuum Testing: The vacuum test shall be made using an inflatable
compression band, vacuum pump, and appurtenances specifically designed
for vacuum testing manholes. Test procedures shall be in accordance with
ASTM C 1244, except the more restrictive requirements specified herein.
Equipment shall be manufactured by Peter A. Glazier, Inc., P.O. Box 1002,
Worcester, Massachusetts 01613, Telephone: (508) 755-3849, Toll-Free:
(800) 822-6488, or approved equal.
3.19.3.1 Manholes may be tested by vacuum test immediately after assembly
of the manhole, frames, and connecting pipes and before any
backfill is placed around the manholes. However, the final test and
acceptance shall be based only upon a test after the manhole is
backfilled and the cover frame castings are set in place.
3.19.3.2 All lift holes shall be plugged with nonshrink grout and all pipes
shall be plugged, taking care to securely brace the plugs and pipe.
3.19.3.3 After the testing equipment is in place, a vacuum of 10 inches of
mercury shall be drawn on the manhole. The manhole will be
considered to have passed the test if the vacuum does not drop more
than 1-inch of mercury within 60 seconds for manholes 7 feet in
depth or less and 90 seconds for manholes over 7 feet deep.
3.19.3.4 If the manhole fails the initial test, the Contractor shall locate the
leakage and make proper repairs, and retest until a satisfactory test
result is obtained.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02730/14
3.19.3.5 After the manholes have been backfilled and the cover frame
casting sealed in place, and prior to final acceptance of the project,
any signs of leaks or weeping visible from the inside of the
manhole shall be repaired, and the manhole made watertight and
tested.
3.20 Test for leakage of gravity sewers including manholes, using either the infiltration
or exfiltration method. Maximum allowable leakage shall be limited to 2,400
gallons per day per mile or 100 gallons per day per inch diameter per mile,
whichever is less.
3.20.1 Use infiltration test when groundwater is at least 4 feet above top of the pipe
for the entire length of line to be tested. Plug the pipe at the upper manhole.
Install suitable measuring device at the next lowest manhole. Measure the
amount of water flowing through the measuring device over a 30-minute
period. Sewer lines crossing under streams shall exhibit zero infiltration.
3.20.2 Use exfiltration test when groundwater is less than 4 feet above top of pipe.
Plug the pipe at the lower manhole. Fill the line and manhole with potable
water to 4 feet above top of pipe, or top of manhole whichever is less. Let the
water stand until pipe has reached maximum absorption and until all trapped
air has escaped, 12-hour minimum. After maximum absorption is reached,
refill manhole to original level. After 30 minutes, record difference in level
and convert to gallons.
3.20.3 Groundwater Determination: Use same procedure as “Low Pressure Air Test”
above.
3.21 Repairs: If sewer lines or manholes fail to meet test requirements or if any leaks,
crooked pipe, or other defects are visible by inspection, the Contractor shall repair or
rebuild at his expense those portions of sewer lines which are faulty. The tests and
repairs shall be continued until the sewer line is deemed acceptable.
Air Test Table
Based on Formulas from ASTM C 924
Minimum Test Time in Minutes: Seconds
For Pressure Drop From 3.5 to 2.5 psig
Line Length in Feet
10
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
0:02
0:09
0:18
0:27
0:36
0:45
0:54
1:03
1:12
1:21
1:30
Pipe
Size
Inches
4
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02730/15
6
0:04
0:21
0:42
1:03
1:24
1:45
2:06
2:27
2:48
3:09
3:30
8
0:07
0:36
1:12
1:48
2:24
3:00
3:36
4:12
4:48
5:24
6:00
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02730/16
Section 02735
Pipe Supports and Anchors
1 GENERAL
1.1 Reference specifications are referred to by abbreviation as follows:
1.1.1 American National Standards Institute ......................................................ANSI
1.1.2 American Society for Testing and Materials ........................................... ASTM
1.1.3 Manufacturers Standardization Society of the
Valve and Fittings Industry ..................................................................... MSS
1.2 Piping systems shall be supported in accordance with ANSI B31.1 “Power Piping”
so as to maintain required pitch of lines, prevent vibration, and provide for
expansion and contraction movement. Provide hangers in accordance with MSS
SP-58 and MSS SP-69. Provide all supports required whether shown on the
drawing or not.
1.3 Acceptable Manufacturer: Anvil, Elcen Metal Products, F&S Central, or Michigan
Hanger Company. Anvil figure numbers establish the quality standard.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Hangers and Rigid Supports
2.1.1 Adjustable swivel split ring hanger shall be fabricated of black malleable iron
and be approved by Factory Mutual and be UL listed. Hanger shall be Anvil
Figure 104 or approved equal.
2.1.2 Adjustable clevis type hanger shall be black carbon steel and be approved by
Factory Mutual and be UL listed. Hanger shall be Anvil Figure 260 or
approved equal.
2.1.3 Pipe roll hangers shall consist of a cast iron roll and steel roll rod. Hanger shall
be Anvil Figure 171 or approved equal.
2.1.4 Brackets shall be heavy welded carbon steel, of dimensions required to
adequately support piping. Brackets shall be hot dipped galvanized after
fabricated in accordance with ASTM A 123. Brackets shall be Anvil Figure
199 or approved equal.
2.1.5 U-bolts shall be standard weight, hot dipped galvanized carbon steel, furnished
with four finished hex nuts. U-bolts shall be Anvil Figure 137 or approved
equal.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02735/1
2.1.6 Short strap shall be carbon steel, Anvil Figure 262 or approved equal. One-hole
clamp shall be black finished malleable iron, Anvil Figure 126 or approved
equal.
2.1.7 Adjustable pipe saddle support shall be cast iron saddle, locknut nipple, and
cast iron reducer, factory assembled. Stantion type support shall allow
vertical adjustment by turning locknut nipple. Adjustable pipe saddle support
shall be Anvil Figure 264 or approved equal. Adjustable pipe saddle support
shall include pipe stand with base flange of suitable size to carry load.
Provide expansion anchors for connecting base flange to finished floor,
minimum four anchors required.
2.2 Hanger rods shall be ASTM A 575 or A 576 hot rolled carbon steel and meet
mechanical property requirements of ASTM A 663.
2.3 Beam clamps shall be fabricated specifically for the structure to which the hanger rod
is attached.
3 E X E C U T IO N
3.1 Install rigid pipe hangers as follows:
3.1.1 Uninsulated pipe 2 inches and smaller – Anvil Figure 104 or approved equal.
3.1.2 All piping 21/2 inches and larger – Anvil Figure 260 or approved equal.
3.2 Where necessary due to space limitations, provide pipe roll hanger equal to Anvil
Figure 171 or approved equal for piping 21/2 inches and larger.
3.3 Space supports or hangers for horizontal piping as follows unless otherwise indicated
on the drawings. Provide additional supports for concentrated loads at valves or
specialties.
Nominal Pipe
Size, Inches
Maximum Span in Feet
Steel or Iron Pipe
Plastic Pipe
1
/2-inch
4
2
3
/4-inch through 11/2-inch
6
3
2-inch and 21/2-inch
10
4
3-inch
12
5
4-inch and 5-inch
14
6
6-inch
16
6
8-inch and 10-inch
18
7
12-inch and 14-inch
22
8
16-inch and 18-inch
27
-
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02735/2
20-inch
30
-
24-inch
32
-
3.3.1 Provide pipe hanger or support within 18 inches or every change in direction
for piping 11/2 inches and below and within 3 feet of every change in
direction for piping 2 inches and larger. Horizontal “No-Hub” piping shall be
supported at each joint.
3.3.2 Vertical Piping: Support metal piping at each floor, but at not more than 10foot intervals. Support plastic at each floor and at midpoint between floors,
but not at more than 5-foot intervals.
3.4 Support hangers for pipe by using malleable iron or galvanized steel concrete inserts,
concrete anchor bolts, beam clamps with lock nuts or retaining straps, or other
special fastening devices, as required, for the support of hangers. As an option where
direct attachment to frame members is not possible, auxiliary frame members may be
provided which shall span at least two structural frame members.
3.4.1 Where pipe cannot be suspended from overhead supports, use substantial cast
iron or welded steel wall brackets to support the hangers, pipe seats, or roll
stands, as conditions demand.
3.5 Use hot rolled steel hanger rods sized as follows:
3.5.1 For 2-inch pipe and smaller – 3/8-inch diameter
3.5.2 For 21/2-inch through 31/2-inch pipe – 1/2-inch diameter
3.5.3 For 4-inch and 5-inch pipe – 5/8-inch diameter
3.5.4 For 6-inch pipe – 3/4-inch diameter
3.5.5 For 8-inch and larger – 7/8-inch diameter
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02735/3
Section 02831
Chain Link Fences and Gates
1 GENERAL
1.1 Scope: The work covered by this section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment,
and materials necessary to install all required chain link fencing and gates for the
work. The contract documents apply to this Section.
1.2 Reference specifications are referred to by abbreviation as follows:
1.2.1 American Society of Testing and Materials .............................................. ASTM
1.2.2 Chain Link Fence Manufacturer’s Institute ............................................. CLFMI
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Submit shop drawings showing all details of the chain link fence, gates, and
lock.
2 MATERIALS
2.1 Fence
2.1.1 All tubular members shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 120 for weight
and coating.
2.1.2 All structural shapes shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 123 for
galvanized coatings.
2.1.3 End, corner, and pull posts shall be 2-7/8 inch O.D. pipe weighing 5.79 pounds
per linear foot.
2.1.4 Line posts shall be 2-3/8 inch O.D. pipe weighing 3.65 pounds per linear
foot.
2.1.5 Swing gate post shall be 4-inch O.D. pipe weighing 9.11 pounds per linear
foot.
2.1.6 Fit top posts with galvanized malleable iron fittings designed to exclude
water from the post interior. The top shall have provisions for
accommodating a rail.
2.1.7 A No. 7 gauge coiled spring tension wire having a zinc coating of 1.6 ounces of
zinc per square foot of surface shall be provided along the bottom of the
fence. Top of the fence shall be finished with a pipe rail of 1-5/8 inch O.D.
weighing 2.27 pounds per linear foot.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02831/1
2.2 Bracing and Tensioning
2.2.1 Bands shall be unclimbable, beveled edge type, secured with 3/8-inch diameter
square shouldered aluminum carriage bolts, nonremovable from outside the
fence enclosure.
2.2.2 All terminal posts shall have 1-5/8 inch O.D. horizontal compressive member
braces, securely attached to terminal and first line posts with malleable iron
fittings and bevel edge bands. Provide 3/8-inch diameter rod and turnbuckle
truss braces from first line post to bottom of terminal post.
2.2.3 Tension bars for attaching fence fabric to terminal posts shall be 1/4-inch by 3/4inch high carbon steel, and shall be attached to terminal posts with of beveled
edge bands.
2.3 Fabric
2.3.1 Fencing fabric shall consist of individual wire pickets, helically wound, and
interwoven from 9 gauge copper bearing steel wire to form a continuous
chain link fabric in 2-inch mesh. Top and bottom edges of the fabric shall
have a twisted and barbed finish, and fabric shall be 6 feet in height between
top and bottom edges.
2.3.2 Fence fabric edging shall be barbed top and bottom
2.3.3 The wire in the completed fabric shall have a tensile strength of not less 80,000
pounds per square inch.
2.4 Gates, Frames, and Hardware.
2.4.1 Swing gate frames shall be minimum 2 inches, O.D. standard weight steel
pipe with interval bracing of 1-5/8 inch O.D. standard weight steel pipe.
Frame members shall be welded at all joints to insure a watertight
construction.
2.4.2 Fabric for gates shall be as specified for fence.
2.4.3 Hinges shall be standard offset type that will allow gates to swing back
parallel with line fence. Hinge material shall be malleable iron or steel
forgings.
2.4.4 Double latches shall be drop-bar type, securely bolted to the gate frames and
designed to engage heavy malleable iron gate stops anchored in concrete
footings.
2.4.5 Single latches for gate frames up to and including 8 feet wide shall be
malleable iron, gravity type, designed to automatically engage a pin welded
to the gate frame and to be secured with an approved type padlock.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02831/2
2.4.6 Gate shall be equipped with a gate keeper designed to engage with the gate
when opened wide to secure it in this position.
2.4.7 Provide a padlock for the gate. Padlock key shall match “Best” keying
system.
2.4.8 Provide diagonal cross-bracing consisting of a 3/8-inch diameter adjustable
length truss rods on gates where necessary to provide frame rigidity without
sag or twist.
2.5 All miscellaneous fence fittings shall be malleable iron, pressed steel, aluminum, or
forgings. All miscellaneous ferrous metals shall be hot dipped galvanized.
2.6 Wire ties for tying fabric to post shall be minimum No. 9 gauge aluminum or steel for
tubular posts. No. 9 gauge aluminum wire ties shall be used to tie fabric to rails and
braces. No. 11 gauge pig rings shall be used to tie fabric to tension wire. Finish for
coil wire, pig rings, and wire ties shall be the same as fencing fabric.
3 E X E C U T IO N
3.1 General
3.1.1 Space posts no more than 10 feet on center.
3.1.2 Encase post in concrete footings at least 3 feet in depth. There shall be a
minimum of 6 inches of concrete below the post. Provide 10-inch diameter
footings for line posts and 14-inch diameter footings for corner, end, and gate
posts. Extend footings 2 inches above the ground line and slope to drain away
from posts.
3.1.3 Where rock is encountered, drill holes 3 feet deep and 2 inches greater than the
outside diameter of the post. Then fill hole around the post with grout. The
post shall be 6 inches off the bottom the hole.
3.1.4 Where the fence is located on concrete structures, cast or grout a 18-inch
section of steel pipe with an inside diameter at least 2 inches larger than the
post into the structure. Grout the fence post into the steel pipe.
3.1.5 Brace terminal posts with horizontal compressive member and truss braces and
fittings.
3.1.6 Brace corner posts in each direction with the bracing specified for terminal
posts.
3.1.7 Brace line fence at not more than 500 foot intervals and each vertical angle
point of 15 degrees or more with the bracing specified for terminal posts.
3.1.8 Install corner posts at each horizontal angle point.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02831/3
3.1.9 Install fence uniformly 2 inches above the ground.
3.1.10 Fasten fabric to top rail and bottom tension wire at intervals of 2 feet with pig
rings.
3.1.11 Attach fabric to all posts at intervals of not more than 14 inches and on the
outside of the post with relation to the enclosed area.
3.1.12 Bend ends of wire ties to minimize hazard to persons and clothing.
3.1.13 Attach stretcher bars to terminal posts with beveled edge band.
3.1.14 Install gates plumb, level and secure for full opening without interference.
Install ground-set items in concrete as recommended by the manufacturer.
Adjust and lubricate all hardware as required for smooth operation.
3.1.15 Install gate stops so that the plunger can be fully engaged.
3.1.16 Install nuts for tension band and hardware bolts on the inside of the fence.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02831/4
Section 02936
Seeding
1 GENERAL
1.1 Related Requirements: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this
section.
1.1.1 Section 01400 – General Requirements
1.1.2 Section 02200 – Earthwork
1.2 Submittals: Provide the following items in accordance with the approved submittals
schedule as specified in Section 01400 – General Requirements:
1.2.1 Seed Test Report
1.2.2 Fertilizer Analysis
1.3 Reference specifications are referred to by abbreviation as follows:
1.3.1 American Society of Testing and Materials .............................................. ASTM
1.3.2 Virginia Department of Transportation .................................................... VDOT
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Topsoil: Topsoil shall be the top 6 inches of original soil from the site. Topsoil
obtained off-site shall be fertile, friable loam, containing not less than 2% by weight
of finely divided, decomposed vegetation. Topsoil shall be free of subsoil, clay
lumps, brush, weeds, roots larger than 11/2-inch in diameter, stones larger than 11/2inch in diameter, and other material toxic or harmful to growth.
2.2 Fertilizer: Fertilizer shall meet requirements of Federal Specification O-F-241.
Provide fertilizer that is complete, inorganic, uniform in composition, and suitable
for application with approved equipment. Proportions of fertilizer nutrients shall be
the following:
2.2.1 Permanent Seeding
2.2.1.1 5% total nitrogen
2.2.1.2 10% available phosphoric acid
2.2.1.3 5% soluble potash
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02936/1
2.2.2 Temporary Seeding
2.2.2.1 10% total nitrogen
2.2.2.2 20% available phosphoric acid
2.2.2.3 10% soluble potash
2.3
Grass Seed: Grass seed, tested within 6 months of sowing, shall have the following
characteristics:
2.3.1 Permanent Seeding
Species
Kentucky 31 tall fescue
Merion Kentucky bluegrass
Kenblue Kentucky bluegrass
% Weight % Purity % Germination
90
98
90
5
90
75
5
85
75
2.3.2 Temporary Seeding
Seeding Date Species % Wgt. % Purity % Germ.
Feb 15-Apr 30
Oats
100
98
May 1-Aug 15
Millet
100
98
Aug 16-Nov 15 Rye
100
96
85
80
85
Speed Rate
(lb/acre)
100
50
140
2.4 Lime: Lime shall be ground agriculture grade limestone containing not less than 85%
calcium and magnesium carbonates. Fineness shall be such that 100% will pass a No.
20 sieve, and not less than 50% will pass a No. 100 sieve. Burnt lime or hydrated
lime may be substituted in equivalent carbonates, if requested.
2.5 Mulch: Type II mulch composed of threshed straw of cereal grain, pine needles or
wood fiber which shall be free of objectionable weed seeds or other harmful
material.
2.6 Asphalt Adhesive: Asphalt adhesive for use with Type II mulch shall be emulsified
asphalt meeting requirements of ASTM D 977, Grade SS-1.
2.7 Mulch Binder: Synthetic mulch binder for use with Type II mulch shall be Curasol,
DCA-70 Petroset, or Terra Tack.
2.8 Jute Mesh: Jute mesh shall be as defined in the VDOT Road and Bridge
Specifications, Section 244, “Roadside Development Materials.”
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02936/2
3 EXECUTION
3.1 General
3.1.1 Before seeding, not less than 4 inches of topsoil shall be spread in areas to be
seeded. In general, the topsoil shall come from the stockpiles created during
the initial clearing of the site. If there is insufficient topsoil in the stockpiles,
the Contractor shall provide topsoil from an offsite source at no additional
cost to the Owner.
3.1.2 Material shall be delivered in unbroken containers, clearly marked by the
manufacturer as to their contents. Seed, limestone, and fertilizer shall be
labeled as to proportions, analysis, and quality. Store all materials in a
manner affording protection from damage by weather or vandalism.
3.1.3 Seed only when the wind velocity is less than 15 miles per hour.
3.1.4 All areas disturbed by excavation, grading, or other construction operations,
except areas to be paved or otherwise permanently stabilized, shall be seeded
as specified for permanent seeding. Temporary seeding shall be provided
when required at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.1.5 Remove all soiling or staining off finished structures or pavements resulting
from seeding work. Maintain paved areas in clean condition.
3.2 Temporary Seeding
3.2.1 Use in areas when final grading has not been completed, when permanent
seeding cannot be performed due to the specified permanent seeding dates, or
when required for erosion control.
3.2.2 Apply fertilizer at a rate of 15 pounds per 1,000 square feet (600 pounds per
acre) or equivalent. Apply lime at a rate of 50 pounds per 1,000 square feet.
3.2.3 For loose soil, work lime and fertilizer into soil and then seed. For packed or
hard soil, loosen top layer while working lime and fertilizer into soil and
then seed at the rate specified for the temporary seeding species.
3.2.4 Seed only between February 15 and November 15. Use mulch between
November 15 and February 15.
3.3 Permanent Seeding
3.3.1 For all areas to receive permanent seeding, apply fertilizer at the rate of 25
pounds per 1,000 square feet and apply lime at the rate of 90 pounds per
1,000 square feet.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02936/3
3.3.2 Apply fertilizer and lime uniformly and mix well into the top 4 inches of the
seedbed.
3.3.3 Prepare soil for permanent seeding by tillage of topsoil in place to loosen
thoroughly and break up all clods to a depth of 6 inches. Remove all stumps
and roots, coarse vegetation, stones larger than 11/2 inches, and all
construction debris. Soil shall be worked by suitable agricultural equipment
to a depth of not less than 4 inches. Surface shall be uniform, smooth, and
drainable. A firm and compact seedbed is required.
3.3.4 Sow permanent grass seed between dates of March 1 and April 15 or
September 1 and November 15.
3.3.5 Sow seed by mechanical seeder as follows:
3.3.5.1 Mix seed thoroughly with clean dry sawdust and broadcast at rate of 6
pounds of seed per 1,000 square feet for permanent seeding or as
specified elsewhere for temporary seeding.
3.3.5.2 Apply Type II mulch uniformly to depth of approximately 1 1 / 4
inches.
3.3.5.3 Anchor Type II mulch by the following methods:
3.3.5.3.1 Apply light tack coat of asphalt emulsion or synthetic
mulch binder.
3.3.5.3.2 On slopes steeper than 4 horizontal to 1 vertical, anchor
with jute mesh fastened to wooden stakes.
3.3.6 Sow seed by hydraulic seeder as follows:
3.3.6.1 Prepare homogeneous slurry equal to the seed mixture used for
mechanical seeding as specified in this section.
3.3.6.2 Distribute slurry uniformly at rate equal to the rate specified for
mechanical seeding.
3.3.6.3 Apply mulch as specified for sowing by mechanical seeder.
3.4 Maintenance of Seeded Areas
3.4.1 Reseed and mulch spots larger than one square foot without uniform stand of
grass.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02936/4
3.4.2 Maintain all seeded areas until uniform stand of grass is acceptable to the
Engineer.
3.4.3 In the event that growth is not established by the final project inspection,
continue the specified attention until the stand is accepted by the Engineer.
3.4.4 Correct or repair all undue settling for a period of one year after final
inspection.
3.4.5 Water as necessary.
3.4.6 Mowing: Maintain grass height between 2 and 4 inches.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
02936/5
Section 03300
Cast-In-Place Concrete
1
GENERAL
1.1
Reference publications are referred to by abbreviations as follows:
1.1.1 American Concrete Institute ACI
1.1.2 American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM
1.1.3 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CRSI
1.1.4 National Institute of Standards and Technology
1.2
NIST
Quality Assurance
1.2.1 Provide the services of an independent inspection agency to perform
inspection as specified in this section. The inspection agency shall be
approved by WW Associates.
1.2.2 The independent testing agency, including branch office used, referred to in
this Section and Section 1 of ACI 301 shall meet the requirements of
ASTM E 329 and shall have been inspected within the past 3 years by the
cement and concrete reference laboratory of the NIST and shall have
corrected any deficiencies noted. Project sponsor as defined in ASTM E
329 shall be the contractor.
1.3
Submittals: Provide the following in a timely manner.
1.3.1 Shop drawings of reinforcing steel in accordance with ACI 301. All
construction joints shall be indicated on the shop drawings.
1.3.2 Complete concrete mix designs and documentation in accordance with ACI
301 Section 4.2.3 indicating compliance with one of the paths allowed in
the flow chart. Include the following documentation:
1.3.2.1
Specific mix designs proposed.
1.3.2.2 Quantity and types of admixtures.
1.3.2.3
Strength test results used to establish standard deviation,
and
calculated standard deviation in accordance with ACI 301,
Paragraph 4.2.3.2, if that procedure is followed.
1.3.2.4 Calculated required average compressive strength.
1.3.2.5
Strength test records used to verify that required average
compressive strength is met in accordance with ACI 301,
Paragraph 4.2.3.3, if that procedure if followed.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03300/1
1.3.2.6
Trial mixtures, strength test thereof, water-cement ratio
curve,
and selected water-cement ratio to meet the required average
compressive strength in accordance with ACI 301, Paragraph
4.2.3.4.b, if that procedure is followed.
1.3.3 Manufacturer’s literature for the following:
1.3.3.1
Waterstops
1.3.3.2 Specific reference to ASTM D 471 for Rubber Properly-Effect of
Liquite
1.3.3.3
List of materials and work requiring inspection; inspections
to
be performed; and a list of the individuals, approved agencies,
and firms intended to be retained for conducting such
inspections. These lists shall be submitted to WW Associates for
approval and to the building official.
1.3.3.4
Inspection reports.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Concrete work shall meet the requirements set forth in ACI 350.2R-04 “Concrete
Structures for Containment of Hazardous Materials.”
2.1.1 Compressure Strength – All concrete shall have a minimum compressure
strength of 4,000 psi.
2.2
Concrete work shall meet applicable requirements of ACI 301-10 “Specifications
for Structural Concrete,” except as modified by the supplemental requirements
specified in this section. For numbers in parentheses, refer to ACI 301
paragraphs.
2.2.1 (1.6.4) All of the testing services of Sections 1.6.4.1, 1.6.4.2, and 1.6.4.3
shall be paid for by the Contractor. If the concrete is placed by pumping,
the strength test shall be taken at the truck discharge and at the point of
placement.
2.2.1.1
The testing representative shall sample concrete in
accordance
with the following schedule for each design mixture placed in
any one day:
Strength Tests
1 Set of 3 Cylinders per 50 CY or
fraction thereof.
Slump Test
1 Test per 50 CY or fraction thereof
or if consistency varies
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03300/2
Temperature
1 Test per 50 CY or fraction thereof
Air Entrainment
1 Test per 50 CY or as necessary for
control
2.2.2 (2.2.1.4) Except where otherwise noted, expansion joint material shall be
self-expanding cork and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D1752.
2.2.3 (2.2.1.4) Except where otherwise noted, isolation joint material shall be the
thickness shown and shall meet requirements of ASTM D 1751.
2.2.4 (2.2.1.5) Except where otherwise noted, waterstops shall be Volclay RX by
Colloid Environmental Technology Company (CETCO), Synko-Flex by
Synko-Flex Products, Inc., MC-2010M by Adeka Ultraseal, or Duroseal
Type W by Absolute Waterproofing Systems, Inc. Install in accordance
with manufacturer’s instructions.
2.2.5 (2.2.2.5) Unless otherwise indicated, locate construction joints so that the
amount of concrete placed between forms does not exceed the following:
2.2.5.1
Walls and slabs of liquid retention structures: 35 feet in any
horizontal direction.
2.2.5.2 Walls of other structures: 70 feet in any horizontal direction.
2.2.5.3
Slabs of other structures: 5,000 square
feet.
2.2.6 (3.1) Reinforcement General
2.2.6.1
Details of reinforcing
Verify the location of all sleeves, embedments, attachments,
openings, and structural supports for the equipment provided.
All reinforcing shall be as follows unless otherwise noted on the
drawings:
Reinforcing shall be detailed, fabricated, and placed in
accordance with ACI 315-99, with the exception of
development lengths and splice lengths.
Splice lengths at locations not shown on the drawings shall be
detailed on the shop drawings to conform to ACI 315-99. Use the
splice category appropriate for the actual bar spacing and
concrete cover.
Pier ties shall be closed type (ACI Type T1).
Unless otherwise detailed, dowels in walls and columns shall
match size and spacing of main reinforcing bars.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03300/3
Unless otherwise detailed, provide corner bars at all locations
where walls intersect in plan to make a corner as shown in
Figure 11 of ACI 315.
2.2.7 (3.2.1.1) Reinforcing steel shall meet requirements of ASTM A 615 Grade
60 and shall be deformed.
2.2.8 (3.2.2.2) Welding of bar reinforcement will not be permitted.
2.2.9 (3.3.2.3) Cover requirements for concrete exposed to weather shall be used
at all surfaces of liquid retention structures, except where concrete is
deposited against earth.
2.2.10 (3.3.2.4) Where concrete will be exposed to view in the finished structure,
the portions of all bar supports within 1/2 inch of the concrete surface shall
be noncorrosive or protected against corrosion.
2.2.11 (4.2.1.1) Cement shall be as follows:
2.2.11.1 Portland cement for concrete for liquid retention structures shall
be ASTM C150, Type II. Portland cement for concrete for all
other structures shall be ASTM C150, Type I or II.
2.2.11.2 ASTM C989 Ground iron blast furnace slag may be mixed with
ASTM C150 Portland cement to produce the equivalent of
ASTM C595 Type IS (MS) blended cement, except that the
blast furnace slag content shall not exceed 50 percent by weight
of the total cementitious material.
2.2.11.3 ASTM C618 fly ash or pozzolan may be mixed with ASTM C150
Portland cement to produce the equivalent of ASTM C595 Type
IP (MS) blended cement, except that the total fly ash and
pozzolan content shall not exceed 25 percent by weight of the
total cementitious material. Loss on ignition of fly ash or
pozzolan shall not exceed 3 percent.
2.2.12 (4.2.1.2) Aggregates for slabs on grade shall conform to the following:
2.2.12.1 The nominal maximum size aggregate shall not be larger than the
requirements of 4.2.2.3 – size of coarse aggregate. The
combined aggregates shall be well graded from the coarsest to
the finest with not more than 18 percent nor less than 8 percent,
unless otherwise permitted, of the combined aggregate retained
on any individual sieve with the exceptions that the No. 50 may
have less than 8 percent retained, sieves finer than No. 50 shall
have less than 9 percent retained, and the coarsest sieve may
have less than 8 percent retained.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03300/4
2.2.12.2 Aggregates used in concrete shall have a combined aggregate
distribution similar to the aggregates used in the concrete
represented by field test data or used in trial mixtures. Reports
of individual aggregates shall include sieve sizes 11/2-inches, 1inch, 3/4-inch, 1/2-inch, 3/8-inch, No. 4, No. 8, No. 16, No. 30,
and No. 50 in accordance with ASTM E11.
2.2.13 (4.2.1.2) Coarse aggregate shall be a calcareous aggregate such as
limestone or dolomite.
2.2.14 (4.2.2.4) Concrete shall be air entrained except for interior slabs, which
shall be non-air entrained.
2.2.15 (4.2.2.5) Air entraining or water reducing admixtures or both will be
permitted. Other admixtures shall be submitted for approval before
submitting the mix designs and shall not be used without written approval.
2.2.16 (4.2.2.6) Calcium chloride shall not be used as an admixture, nor as an
ingredient in any admixture. Chloride ions in admixtures shall not exceed
0.1 percent by weight of cement content.
2.2.17 (4.2.2.9) The 28-day compressive strength of all concrete shall be 4,000
pounds per square inch.
2.2.18 (4.2.2.9) Concrete for liquid retention structures shall have a watercementitious material ratio of not more than 0.45. The following
structures are defined as liquid retention structures: building slab and
walls.
2.2.19 (5.3.1) Foundation concrete shall not be placed until the soil subgrade for
foundation bearing has been examined by the Geotechnical Engineer and
found satisfactory for the design bearing capacity.
2.3
Moisture barrier beneath slabs on grade shall be minimum 6-mil polyethylene,
with reinforced backing, with joints lapped not less than 6 inches.
2.4
Except as otherwise specified for secondary containment structures, nonshrink
grout for setting base plates, leveling plates, and bearing plates for columns and
machine bases shall be premixed and noncorrosive and shall meet the
requirements of ASTM C1107. Water for mixing grout shall be potable.
2.5
Where joint sealants are used in non-secondary containment areas, joint sealant
shall be Sikaflex 2C NS/SL by Sika Chemical Corporation, Eucolastic by Euclid
Chemical Company or Stonflex MN6/MP6 by Stonhard, Inc.
2.6
Grout for shaped bottoms of liquid retention structures shall be a mix of three
parts sand and one part ASTM C150 Type II cement.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03300/5
2.7
Provide anchor rods as required to suit the equipment provided. Anchor rods
shall be ASTM A36 or ASTM F1554, Grade 36 unless otherwise noted.
2.8
Adhesive anchors shall be HVA Adhesive Anchors by Hilti Fastening Systems,
Chem-stud by the Rawlplug Company, ET Epoxy-Tie Adhesive anchors by the
Simpson Strong-Tie Co. The anchor shall consist of a polyester resin adhesive
capsule and a chisel-pointed threaded steel rod. Steel shall be zinc plated ASTM
A 307. This type of adhesive anchor shall not be used in masonry. Allowable
working (service) loads shall be as follows for 4,000-psi concrete:
Diameter
Shear
Tension
(Inches)
(Pounds)
(Pounds)
2.9
1/2
1,800
2,850
5/8
2,750
4,550
3/4
3,850
6,100
7/8
4,925
7,700
1
6,725
8,750
Special inspection of materials
2.9.1 Provide the following special inspections:
2.9.1.1 Review documentation for materials furnished to verify
conformance to quality standards for materials specified herein.
2.9.1.2 Review mix design for conformance to Chapter 4 of ACI 301.
2.9.1.3 Inspect concrete mixing techniques for compliance with Section
4.3 of ACI 301.
2.9.2 Special inspection of materials will not be required for the following
elements:
2.9.2.1 Sidewalks
2.9.2.2 Other concrete items of a minor nature such as duct banks and
thrust blocks.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Refer to applicable sections of ACI 301-10, except as modified by the
supplemental requirements specified in this section. For numbers in parentheses,
refer to ACI 301 paragraphs.
3.1.1 (2.2.2.3) Earth cuts may be used as forms for foundations.
3.1.2 (5.3.2.1) Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold weather concreting and with the
recommendations of ACI 305 R for hot weather concreting.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03300/6
3.1.3 (5.3.3) All formed concrete which will be exposed to public view shall
receive a smooth form finish.
3.2
Backfilling adjacent to foundation walls shall not occur until structural elements
designed to brace walls have been placed and such concrete has reached 70
percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. Backfilling adjacent to
cantilever retaining walls shall not occur until wall concrete has reached its 28day design compressive strength.
3.3
Chamfer all exposed edges of concrete 1-inch.
3.4
Special Inspection of Field Work:
3.4.1 Provide the following special inspections:
3.4.1.1
Inspect installation of reinforcing steel to verify compliance
with contract drawings and Sections 3.3 of ACI 301.
3.4.1.2 Inspect formwork for compliance with Section 2.3 of ACI 301.
Inspect form removal for compliance with Section 2.3.2 of ACI
318.
3.4.1.3
Test concrete strength, air content, and slump in accordance
with Section 1.6.4.2 of ACI 301.
3.4.1.4 Inspect concrete placement for compliance with Section 5.3.2 of
ACI 301.
3.4.1.5
301.
Inspect curing for compliance with Section 5.3.6.1 of ACI
3.4.2 Special inspection of field work will not be required for the following
elements, except that concrete strength, air content, and slump shall be
tested in accordance with Section 1.6.4.2 of ACI 301.
3.4.2.1 Sidewalks
3.4.2.2 Other concrete items of a minor nature such as duct banks and
thrust blocks.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03300/7
Section 03450
Precast Concrete Tanks
1 GENERAL
1.1 General Requirements
1.1.1 Precast concrete tanks shall be those as manufactured by Concrete Pipe and
Precast, LLC, GHP Systems, Inc., Hanover Precast, or approved equal and
shall meet the dimensions and requirements of the package wastewater
treatment plant and drip dispersal equipment providers.
1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Preconstruction Submittals:
1.2.1.1 Submit quality control procedures established by the precast
manufacturer in accordance with the NPCA Quality Control
Manual for Precast Concrete Plants.
1.2.2 Shop Drawings:
1.2.2.1 Drawings for Precast Concrete Units
1.2.2.2 Submit shop drawings furnished by the manufacturer for approval by
the Owner and WW Associates. Provide detailed layout for this
project. These drawings shall demonstrate that the applicable
industry design standards have been met. Installation and
construction information shall be included on shop drawings upon
request. Details of steel reinforcement size and placement as well
as supporting design calculations, if appropriate, shall be included.
The precast concrete units shall be produced in accordance with the
contract drawings. Drawings shall indicate assumptions used in the
design of standard units. Shop drawings shall be coordinated with
the requirements of the package wastewater treatment plant and
drip dispersal equipment providers.
1.2.2.3 Tank Access Ways
1.2.3 Precast Concrete Unit Data:
1.2.3.1 Standard Precast Concrete Units:
1.2.3.1.1. The manufacturer shall supply cut sheets showing
conformance to project drawings and requirements and
to applicable industry design standards listed in this
specification.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03450/1
1.2.3.2 Anchorage, Lifting Inserts and Devices: For anchors, lifting inserts
and other devices, the manufacturer shall provide product data
sheets and proper installation instructions upon request. The Precast
concrete unit dimensions and safe working load shall be clearly
indicated.
1.2.3.3 Accessory Items: For items including, but not limited to sealants,
gaskets, pipe entry connectors, steps, racks and other items
installed before or after delivery, the manufacturer shall include
proper installation instructions and relevant product data upon
request.
1.2.4 Design Data: Upon request, the manufacturer shall supply precast concrete
unit design calculations and concrete mix design proportions and appropriate
mix design test data. Structural design calculations shall be signed by a
licensed professional engineer.
1.2.5 Test Reports: Upon request, the manufacturer shall supply copies of material
certifications and/or laboratory test reports, including mill tests and all other
test data, for portland cement, blended cement, pozzolans, ground granulated
blast-furnace slag, silica fume, aggregate, admixtures, and curing compound
proposed for use on this project.
Upon request, the manufacturer shall submit copies of test reports showing
that the mix has been successfully tested to produce concrete with the
properties specified and will be suitable for the project conditions. Such
tests may include compressive strength, flexural strength, plastic or
hardened air content, freeze-thaw durability, abrasion and absorption.
Special tests for precast concrete items shall be clearly detailed in the
specifications.
Upon request, the manufacturer will supply copies of in-plant QA/QC
inspection reports.
1.2.6 Certificates: Submit quality control procedures established in accordance with
NPCA Quality Control Manual for Precast Concrete Plants or verification of
current NPCA Plant Certification.
1.2.7 Delivery Time: Delivery time shall be 2 weeks from shop drawing
approval.
1.3 Design
1.3.1 Precast Concrete Unit Design: Design standard precast concrete units to
withstand indicated design load conditions in accordance with applicable
industry design standards ACI 318, ACI 350, ASTM, ACPA Design
Manual, PCI MNL-120, and AASHTO. Design must also consider
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03450/2
stresses induced during handling, shipping and installation in order to avoid
product cracking or other handling damage. Design loads for precast concrete
units shall be indicated on the shop drawings.
1.3.2 Joints and Sealants: Precast removable top slab shall be equipped with a
watertight seal.
1.3.3 Concrete Mix Design:
1.3.3.1 Concrete Proportions: Selection of proportions for concrete shall
be based on the methodology presented in ACI 211.1 for normal
weight concrete, ACI 211.2 for lightweight concrete and ACI
211.3 for no- slump concrete. The concrete proportions shall be
developed using the same type and brand of cement, the same
type and brand of pozzolan, the same type and gradation of
aggregates, and the same type and brand of admixture that will
be used in the manufacture of precast concrete units for the
project. Accelerators containing calcium chloride shall not be
used in precast concrete containing reinforcing steel or other
embedded metal items.
Upon request, the manufacturer shall submit a mix design for each
strength and type of concrete that will be used. Submitted mix
designs shall include the quantity, type, brand and applicable data
sheets for all mix design constituents as well as documentation
indicating conformance with applicable reference specifications.
The use of self-consolidating concrete is permitted provided that
mix design proportions and constituents meet the requirements of
this specification.
1.3.3.2 Durability and performance requirements
1.3.3.2.1. Concrete Compressive Strength: Precast concrete units
shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of
4000 psi.
1.3.3.2.2. Water-Cement Ratio: Concrete that will be exposed to
freezing and thawing shall contain entrained air (see
1.4.5.2.3) and shall have water-cement ratios of 0.45 or
less. Concrete which will not be exposed to freezing,
but which is required to be watertight, shall have a
water-cement ratio of 0.48 or less if the concrete is
exposed to fresh water, or 0.45 or less if exposed to
brackish water or sea water. For corrosion protection,
reinforced concrete exposed to deicer salts, brackish
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03450/3
water or seawater shall have a water-cement ratio of
0.40 or less.
1.3.3.2.3. Air Content: The air content of concrete that will be
exposed to freezing conditions shall be within the limits
given below.
Air Content %
Nominal Maximum
Aggregate Size (in)
Severe Exposure
Moderate Exposure
3/8
6.0 to 9.0
4.5 to 7.5
1
/2
5.5 to 8.5
4.0 to 7.0
3
/4
4.5 to 7.5
3.5 to 6.5
1
4.5 to 7.5
3.0 to 6.0
1-1/2
4.5 to 7.0
3.0 to 6.0
* For specified compressive strengths greater then 5000 psi, air content
may be reduced 1%
1.4 Quality Assurance: The manufacturer shall demonstrate adherence to the standards
set forth in the NPCA Quality Control Manual for Precast Concrete Plants. The
manufacturer shall meet requirements written in subparagraph 1.5.1 or 1.5.2.
1.4.1 NPCA Plant Certification: The manufacturer shall be certified by the NPCA
Plant Certification Program prior to and during production of the products
for this project.
1.4.2 Quality Control
1.4.2.1 Quality Control: The manufacturer shall show that the following
quality control tests are performed as required and in accordance
with the ASTM International standards indicated.
a. Slump: A slump test shall be performed for each 150 cu yd
of concrete produced per mix design, or once a day,
whichever comes first. Slump tests shall be performed in
accordance with ASTM C 143. Slump flow tests on selfconsolidating concrete mixes shall be performed in
accordance with ASTM C 1611.
b. Temperature: The temperature of fresh concrete shall be
measured when slump or air content tests are made and when
compressive test specimens are made in accordance with
ASTM C 1064
c. Compressive Strength: At least four compressive strength
specimens shall be made for each 150 cubic yards of concrete
of each mix design in accordance with the following applicable
ASTM standards; C 31, C 39, C 192, C 497 (no-slump
concrete).
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03450/4
d. Air Content: Tests for air content shall be made on airentrained, wet-cast concrete for each 150 cu yd of concrete,
per mix design, but not less often than once each day when
air-entrained concrete is used. The air content shall be
determined in accordance with either ASTM C 231 or ASTM
C 173 for normal weight aggregates and ASTM C 173 for
lightweight aggregates.
e. Density (Unit Weight): Tests for density shall be performed a
minimum of once per week to verify the yield of batch mixes.
Density tests shall be performed for each 100 cu yd of
lightweight concrete in accordance with ASTM C 138.
Density tests shall be performed for each 100 cu yd of
concrete per mix design, but not less often than once per day
when volumetric batch equipment is used.
The manufacturer shall submit documentation demonstrating
compliance with the above subparagraphs.
1.5 Handling, Storage and Delivery
1.5.1 Handling: Precast concrete units shall be handled and transported in a
manner to minimize damage. Lifting devices or holes shall be consistent
with industry standards. Lifting shall be accomplished with methods or
devices intended for this purpose as indicated on shop drawings. Upon
request, the manufacturer shall provide documentation on acceptable
handling methods for the product.
1.5.2 Storage: Precast concrete units shall be stored in a manner that will minimize
potential damage.
1.5.3 Delivery: Precast concrete units shall be delivered to the site in accordance
with the delivery schedule to avoid excessive build-up of units in storage
at the site. Upon delivery to the jobsite all precast concrete units shall be
inspected by the Owner or WW Associates for quality and final
acceptance.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 All precast tanks shall meet the requirements of the Package Wastewater Treatment
Plant and drip irrigation system providers and these specifications.
3
PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS
3.1 Manufacturers: The precast concrete manufacturer must meet the requirements
established in section 1.5 Quality Assurance.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03450/5
3.2 Materials: Except as otherwise specified, material shall conform to the following
section.
3.2.1 Cement
ASTM C 150 (Type I, II, III or V)
ASTM C 595 (for Blended Cements)
3.2.2 Silica Fume
ASTM C 1240
3.2.3 Fly Ash and Pozzolans
ASTM C 618
3.2.4 Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag
ASTM C 989
3.2.5 Water
ASTM C1602
The use of reclaimed/recycled process water shall be permitted.
3.2.6 Aggregates
3.2.6.1 Aggregate Selection: The nominal maximum aggregate size should
not exceed one-fifth the narrowest dimension between sides of
forms, nor three-quarters the minimum clear spacing between
individual reinforcing bars or wires.
Aggregates shall conform to ASTM C 33. Aggregates shall not
contain any substance which may be deleteriously reactive with the
alkalies in the cement. Upon request, the manufacturer shall
provide documentation indicating the aggregates are not susceptible
to alkali-aggregate reaction.
3.2.6.2 Aggregates for Lightweight Concrete
ASTM C 330
3.2.7 Admixtures
3.2.7.1 Air-Entraining
ASTM C 260
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03450/6
3.2.7.2 Accelerating, Retarding, Water Reducing [Moderate to High]
ASTM C 494
3.2.7.3 Corrosion Inhibitors
ASTM C 1582
3.2.8 Reinforcement
3.2.8.1 Reinforcing Bars
NOTE: Specify ASTM A 706 reinforcing steel when welding or
bending of reinforcement bars is critical. In addition, ASTM A 775
epoxy-coated reinforcing may be specified where extra
reinforcement corrosion protection is required.
3.2.8.1.1. Deformed Billet-Steel
ASTM A 615
3.2.8.1.2. Deformed Low-Alloy Steel
ASTM A 706
3.2.8.2 Reinforcing Wire
3.2.8.2.1. Plain Wire
ASTM A 185
3.2.8.2.2. Deformed Wire
ASTM A 496
3.2.8.3 Welded Wire Reinforcement
3.2.8.3.1. Plain Wire
ASTM A 185
3.2.8.3.2. Deformed Wire
ASTM A 497
3.2.8.4 Epoxy Coated Reinforcement
3.2.8.4.1. Reinforcing Bars
ASTM A 775
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03450/7
3.2.8.4.2. Wires and Welded Wire Reinforcement
ASTM A 884
3.2.8.5 Galvanized Reinforcement
ASTM A 767
3.2.9 Inserts and Embedded Metal: All items embedded in concrete shall be of the
type required for the intended for the intended use and meet the following
standards.
3.2.9.1 Structural Steel Plates, Angles, etc.
ASTM A 36
3.2.9.2 Hot-Dipped Galvanized
ASTM A 152
3.3 Manufacture: Manufacture shall conform to the NPCA Quality Control Manual for
Precast Concrete Plants unless specified otherwise.
3.3.1 Forms: Forms for manufacturing precast concrete units shall be of the
type and design consistent with industry standards and practices. They
should be capable of consistently providing uniform products and
dimensions. Forms shall be constructed so that the forces and vibrations
to which the forms will be subjected cause no damage to the precast
concrete unit.
Forms shall be cleaned of concrete build-up after each use.
Form release agents shall be applied according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations and shall not be allowed to build up on the form casting
surfaces.
3.3.2 Reinforcement: Applicable ASTM International and/or ACI 318 standards for
placement and splicing
Cages of reinforcement shall be fabricated either by tying the bars, wires or
welded wire reinforcement into rigid assemblies or by welding, where
permissible, in accordance with AWS D1.4. Reinforcing shall be positioned
as specified by the design and so that the concrete cover conforms to
requirements. The tolerance on concrete cover shall be one-third of that
specified but not more than 1/2 in. Concrete cover shall not be less than 1/2
in., unless otherwise specified. Positive means shall be taken to assure that
the reinforcement does not move during the casting operations.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03450/8
3.3.3 Embedded Items: Embedded items shall be positioned at locations specified in
the design documents. Welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS
D1.1 when necessary. Inserts, plates, weldments, lifting devices and other
items to be embedded in precast concrete units shall be held rigidly in place
so that they do not move during casting operations.
3.3.4 Concrete
3.3.4.1 Concrete Mixing: Mixing operations shall produce batch-to-batch
uniformity of strength, consistency, and appearance.
3.3.4.2 Concrete Placing: Conventional concrete shall be deposited into
forms as near to its final location as practical. Self-consolidating
concrete shall be placed in a manner in which it flows and
consolidates without segregation or air entrapment. The free fall of
the concrete shall be kept to a minimum. Concrete shall be
consolidated in such a manner that segregation of the concrete is
minimized and honeycombed areas are kept to a minimum.
Consolidation efforts are often not required when using selfconsolidating concrete. Vibrators used to consolidate concrete shall
have frequencies and amplitudes sufficient to produce wellconsolidated concrete.
3.3.4.2.1. Cold Weather Concreting: Recommendations for cold
weather concreting are given in detail ACI 306 R.
Adequate equipment shall be provided for heating
concrete materials and protecting concrete during
freezing or near-freezing weather. All concrete materials
and all reinforcement, forms, fillers, and ground with
which concrete is to come in contact shall be free from
frost. Frozen materials or materials containing ice shall
not be used. In cold weather the temperature of concrete
at the time of placing shall not be below 45° F. Concrete
that freezes before its compressive strength reaches 500
psi shall be discarded.
3.3.4.2.2. Hot Weather Concreting: Recommendations for hot
weather concreting are given in ACI 305 R.
During hot weather, proper attention shall be given to
constituents, production methods, handling, placing,
protection, and curing to prevent excessive concrete
temperatures or water evaporation that could impair
required strength or serviceability of the member or
structure. The temperature of concrete at the time of
placing shall not exceed 90° F.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03450/9
3.3.4.3 Concrete Curing: Commence curing operations immediately
following the initial set of the concrete and completion of surface
finishing.
3.3.4.3.1. Curing by Moisture Retention: Moisture shall be
prevented from evaporating from exposed surfaces until
adequate strength for stripping the precast concrete unit
from the forms is reached by one of the following
methods:



Cover with polyethylene sheets a minimum of 6
mils thick (ASTM C 171)
Cover with burlap or other absorptive material and
keep continually moist
Use of a membrane-curing compound applied at a
rate not to exceed 200 sq. ft. per gallon, or per
manufacturers’ recommendations (ASTM C 309)
Surfaces that will be exposed to weather during
service shall be cured as above a minimum of 7 days.
Forms shall be considered effective in preventing
evaporation from the contact surfaces.
If air
temperature is below 50° F the curing period shall be
extended.
3.3.4.3.2. Curing with Heat and Moisture: Concrete shall not be
subjected to steam or hot air until after the concrete has
attained its initial set. Steam, if used, shall be applied
within a suitable enclosure, which permits free
circulation of the steam in accordance with ACI
517.2R. If hot air is used for curing, precautions shall
be taken to prevent moisture loss from the concrete.
The temperature of the concrete shall not be permitted
to exceed 150° F. These requirements do not apply to
products cured with steam under pressure in an
autoclave.
3.3.4.4 Surface Finish: Unformed surfaces of wet-cast precast concrete
products shall be finished as specified. Surfaces shall be finished
using a strike-off to level the concrete with the top of the form.
3.3.4.4.1. Formed Non-Architectural Surfaces: Surfaces shall
be cast against approved forms in accordance with
standard industry practices in cleaning forms,
designing concrete mixes, placing and curing
concrete. Normal color variations, form joint marks,
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03450/10
small surface holes caused by air bubbles, and minor
chips and spalls will be accepted. Major imperfections,
excessive honeycombing or other major defects shall not
be permitted.
3.3.4.4.2. Unformed Surfaces: Surfaces shall be finished with a
vibrating screed, or by hand with a float. Normal color
variations, minor indentations, minor chips and spalls
will be accepted. Major imperfections, excessive
honeycombing or other major defects shall not be
permitted.
3.3.4.5 Stripping Precast Concrete Units From Forms: Precast concrete
units shall not be removed from the forms until the concrete
reaches the compressive strength for stripping required by the
design. Stripping strengths shall be routinely measured to ensure
product has attained sufficient strength for safe handling.
3.3.4.6 Patching and Repair
3.3.4.6.1. Repairing Minor Defects: Defects that will not impair the
functional use or expected life of a precast concrete unit
may be repaired by any method that does not impair the
product.
3.3.4.6.2. Repairing Honeycombed Areas: When honeycombed
areas are to be repaired, all loose material shall be
removed and the areas cut back into essentially
horizontal or vertical planes to a depth at which coarse
aggregate particles break under chipping rather than
being dislodged. Proprietary repair materials shall be
used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
If a proprietary repair material is not used, the area shall
be saturated with water. Immediately prior to repair, the
area should be damp, but free of excess water. A
cement-sand grout or an approved bonding agent shall
be applied to the chipped surfaces, followed
immediately by consolidating an appropriate repair
material into the cavity.
3.3.4.6.3. Repairing Major Defects: Defects in precast concrete
products which impair the functional use or the
expected life of products shall be evaluated by
qualified personnel to determine if repairs are feasible
and, if so, to establish the repair procedure.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03450/11
3.3.4.7 Shipping Precast Concrete Units: Precast concrete units shall not be
shipped until they are at least 7 days old, unless it can be shown
that the concrete strength has reached at least 75% of the specified
28-day strength, or that damage will not result, impairing the
performance of the product.
3.3.4.8 Lift Eyes: Provide lifting eyes for each 5 foot section of lids. 4
EXECUTION
4.1 Installation
4.1.1 Site Access: The contractor shall be responsible for coordinating access to the
site with the Owner to facilitate hauling, storage and proper handling of the
precast concrete units.
4.1.2 Installation

Precast concrete tanks/vault shall be installed to the lines and grades
shown in the contract documents.

Precast concrete tanks/vault shall be lifted by suitable lifting devices at
points provided by the manufacturer.

Precast concrete tanks/vault shall be installed in accordance with
applicable industry standards. Upon request, the manufacturer shall
provide installation instructions.
4.1.3 Watertightness: Watertight joints, pipe-entry connectors and inserts should be
used to ensure the integrity of the entire system.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
03450/12
Section 11400
Package Wastewater Treatment Plant
1 GENERAL
1.1 System Description
1.1.1 This work consists of furnishing and installing one complete wastewater
treatment facility with all necessary parts and equipment as described in the
following specifications. The wastewater treatment facility shall provide
treatment of the wastewater flow in accordance with the performance and
sizing requirements stated herein and the process flow diagram shown on the
drawings. The wastewater treatment facility shall consist of the following unit
processes:
1) Septic Tank
2) Equalization Tank & Effluent Pump
3) First Stage Aeration
4) Second Stage Aeration
5) Denitrification Filter
6) Re-aeration
7) Pump Station & Recycle Pump
8) Hydraulic Unit
9) Backwash Tank
1.1.2 Principal items of equipment supplied with the system, to achieve one
completely functional and operational wastewater treatment plant as
described herein, shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.1.2.1 Tankage with volumes and capacity as defined in these
specifications, pumps, air supply distribution system, air diffuser
systems, blowers, blower motors, complete control systems for
equipment, weirs, and all necessary piping and plumbing.
1.1.2.2 All equipment shall be retrievable from the top of the plant.
1.1.2.3 Hydraulic unit specification is in Section 11700 – Drip Irrigation
System.
1.1.3 Principal tankage for the wastewater treatment plant shall be used for the
following functions:
1.1.3.1 Septic Tank: 5,000 gallons of storage capacity
1.1.3.2 Equalization: 5,000 gallons of storage capacity
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11400/1
1.1.3.3 Stage 1 Aeration for Carbon Reduction: 5,000 gallons of storage
capacity
1.1.3.4 Stage 2 Aeration for Nitrification: 5,000 gallons of storage capacity
1.1.3.5 Denitrification Filter: 3,000 gallons of storage capacity
1.1.3.6 Re-aeration: 1,250 gallons of storage capacity
1.1.3.7 Pump Station: 5,000 gallons of storage capacity
1.1.3.8 Hydraulic Unit
1.1.3.9 Backwash Tank: 5,000 gallons of storage capacity
1.2 Related Requirements: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this
section.
1.2.1 Section 02200 – Earthwork
1.2.2 Section 02730 – Wastewater Piping System
1.2.3 Section 03450 – Precast Concrete Tanks/Vaults
1.2.4 Section 11600 – Chemical Feed Systems 1.2.5
Section 11700 – Drip Irrigation System 1.2.6 Section
16010 – Electrical General Provisions
1.3 Reference Specifications where applicable to work under this section are referred to
by abbreviation as follows:
1.3.1 American National Standards Institute ..................................
ANSI
1.3.2 American Society for Testing and Materials .........................
ASTM
1.3.3 National Electrical Code ........................................................
NEC
1.3.4 National Electrical Manufacturers Association .....................
NEMA
1.3.5 Occupational Safety and Health Administration ...................
OSHA
1.3.6 Precast Concrete Institute ......................................................
PCI
1.3.7 Virginia Department of Health ..............................................
VDH
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11400/2
1.4 Quality Assurance
1.4.1 The wastewater treatment facility shall be provided as a package system as
specified, as indicated on the drawings, and as required to provide a
complete installation ready for operation.
1.4.2 The package system shall be provided by a single source supplier regularly
engaged in providing wastewater treatment facilities as specified in this
section.
1.4.3 The equipment manufacturer/supplier shall have unit responsibility for
equipment startup. Provide the services of an experienced, manufacturertrained technician for one site visit consisting of a total of five 8-hour
working days on the site, to demonstrate satisfactory operation and to
provide training and instruction of the Owner’s personnel for equipment
operation.
1.4.4 Experience: The wastewater treatment plant manufacturer shall certify to not
less than 15 years of experience in the design and fabrication of wastewater
treatment plants. The manufacturer shall submit a list of not less than ten
operating wastewater treatment plants installed in the last five years as
evidence of meeting the experience requirement.
1.4.5 The drawing and design of the wastewater treatment plant is based on the BioMicrobics, Inc. “FAST” systems as represented by Nature Works, Inc.
[Address: P.O. Box 639, Burgess, Virginia 22432; Telephone: (804) 4537946; Email: [email protected]; Point of Contact: Michael I. Burch] as
the design standard. Approved alternate is the Advantex System as
manufactured by Orenco [Address: 814 Airway Ave., Sutherlin Oregon
97479; Telephone: (800) 348-9843 x 358; Email: [email protected];
Point of Contact: Jesten Brenner]. Other manufacturers substitution will not
be permitted.
1.4.6 If the alternate system is used, the Contractor shall provide a similar
arrangement, and revise the dimensional layout as necessary. The design of
the alternate wastewater treatment plant must be certified by a licensed
professional engineer and approved by WW Associates in the shop drawing
phase of construction.
1.5 Submittals: Provide the following in a timely manner in accordance with the
approved submittals schedule as specified in Section 01400 – General
Requirements.
1.5.1 Detailed shop drawings of the wastewater treatment plant, including plan view,
hydraulic profile, individual tank details, pump and blower capacities,
pipe penetrations, manways and mechanical and electrical details.
1.5.2 Detailed design calculations, showing all design equations for all aspects of the
treatment plant.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11400/3
1.5.3 Product data, catalog cut sheets, certified pump curves, and diffuser oxygen
transfer efficiency and pressure drop curves for associated equipment and
accessories.
1.5.4 Electrical power supply equipment and instrumentation and controls data,
including equipment, point-to-point wiring diagrams, point-to-point
instrumentations, control panels, and sequence of operation.
1.5.5 Plant performance certification.
1.5.6 All tankage shall be non-buoyant when empty with groundwater to top of the
tank. Shop drawings and design calculations for systems to prevent flotation
of the wastewater treatment plant tankage. All drawings and structural
calculations shall be stamped by a licensed professional engineer.
1.5.7 Operation and maintenance manuals, including approved shop drawings,
recommended spare parts, instructions on lubrication and adjustment
requirements, recommended schedule of maintenance tasks, startup and
operating instructions, troubleshooting instructions, and addresses and
telephone numbers for equipment manufacturers of all major components.
1.6 Project Conditions
1.6.1 Equipment furnished in accordance with this section shall be installed at the
location and in general the space allocated on the contract drawings.
1.6.2 Material used in the manufacturing of the tankage and equipment shall be of
excellent quality used for the purpose in commercial practice. Material shall
be free from all defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability
of the finished product.
1.6.3 The equipment supplied under this specification shall be the standard product
of the specified manufacturer so that prompt and continuous service and
delivery of spare parts may be secured. The component parts of the unit shall
be supplied by one manufacturer.
1.6.4 Pump and blower motors shall be sized such that the motor does not overload
at any point on the operating curve. Pumps, blowers, and motors shall be
designed to perform with a reasonable service life when operated
continuously or intermittently. Motors shall be designed with a minimum
service factor of 1.15. Other motor requirements shall be as specified in this
section and as specified in Division 16 – Electrical.
1.6.5 Electrical Motors, Controllers, Starters, and Disconnects: Furnish motors,
controllers, starters, and disconnects with their respective pieces of
equipment. Motors, controllers, starters, and disconnects shall conform to and
shall have electrical connections in accordance with the National Electrical
Code. Controllers and starters shall have a maximum of 120-volt control
circuits, and auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11400/4
1.6.6 Any structural, piping, electrical requirements, wiring, instrumentation and
controls, drawings, or other modifications required to accommodate
equipment offered shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.7 Warranty
1.7.1 The equipment manufacturer/supplier shall guarantee for 12 months from
date of start-up that the structure and all work and equipment will be free
from all defects in design, material, and workmanship. Warranties and
guarantees by the suppliers of various components in lieu of single source
responsibility by the manufacturer will not be accepted.
1.7.2 In the event one or more components fail to perform as specified or is proven
defective in service during the guarantee period, the equipment
manufacturer/supplier shall provide replacement parts without cost to the
Owner.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Design Criteria: The wastewater treatment plant system shall be designed in
accordance with the following design criteria:
2.1.1 Average daily design flow: 2400 gpd
2.1.2 Peak daily design flow: 4800 gpd
2.1.3 Design Loadings
Average
Constituent
BOD5
TSS
NH3-N
TN
Alkalinity
Influent
400 mg/L
300 mg/L
85 mg/L
90 mg/L
200 mg/L
Effluent (from Re-aeration Tank)
15 mg/L
15 mg/L
5 mg/L
2.1.4 Wastewater Temperature: 50°F to 68°F
2.1.5 Approximate Job Site Elevation: 490 feet MSL
2.1.6 Ambient Air Temperature: 0°F to 100°F
2.1.7 All applicable regulatory requirements of the Commonwealth of Virginia
Departments of Health and Environmental Quality and the U.S. EPA
(Environmental Protection Agency) with regard to the minimum dimensions,
capacities, and performance of the proposed wastewater treatment plant shall
be satisfied.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11400/5
2.2 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plant flow piping used as part of the package wastewater
treatment plant facility shall be as specified in Section 02730 – Wastewater Piping
Systems.
2.3 (1) Septic Tank
2.3.1 Septic tanks shall be precast concrete with an effective storage volume of
5,000 gallons.
2.3.2 Septic tank shall be buried and equipped with manway risers to above grade.
2.3.3 Septic tank influent tee, baffle and outlet structure shall be in accord with
applicable sections of the VDH On-Site Water and Sewage Regulation.
Provide 30-inch cast iron frames and covers.
2.4 (2) Equalization Tank
2.4.1 Equalization tank shall be precast concrete with an effective storage volume of
5,000 gallons.
2.4.2 Equalization tank to be equipped with float controls, duplex submersible
pumping units with guiderail retrieval system and flow control to ensure
constant flow is delivered to the Stage 1 Aeration for Carbon Reduction
Tank. Submersible pumps shall be non-clog cast iron sewage pumps capable
of passing 3-inch solids. Pumps shall be Zoeller, Goulds, or approved equal.
Pumps shall be rated for a minimum flow rate of 15 gpm at a TDH of 11
feet. Pumps shall be capable of passing a 3/8” diameter solid. Each pump
section shall be equipped with a screen which will pass solids no greater
than 1/4” diameter. Provide a recycle loop to allow the discharge rate
leaving the equalization tank to be adjustable. The recycle loop shall be
designed with a “head box.” The head box shall consist of 2 adjustable
weirs. One weir shall discharge to the first stage aeration tank; the second
weir shall discharge back to the equalization tank. The head box shall be
constructed of aluminum plate. Submit the head box design for review and
approval. Design feed rate to the Stage 1 Aeration unit shall be 4500 gpd.
The pump recycle loop shall also be utilized to completely mix the contents
of the equalization tank. The equalization pumps shall be provided with
variable frequency drive units (2 each) to allow for finite flow control
adjustment. The VFD’s shall be mounted in the new treatment building and
will allow for manual adjustment of the pump flow rates. The VFD shall be
Square D or approved equivalent.
2.4.3 Pumps shall be UL listed.
2.4.4 Pumps shall be hardwired in a watertight junction box per local code.
2.4.5 Each pump shall have individual breaker contactor and capacitor.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11400/6
2.4.6 Pumps shall have check valve, disconnect and shut-off valve on discharge side
and shall be equipped with stainless steel lifting cable.
2.5 (3) Stage 1 Aeration for Carbon Reduction
2.5.1 Stage 1 Aeration for Carbon Reduction Unit shall be housed in a precast
concrete tank with an effective volume of 5,000 gallons.
2.5.2 Unit shall be equipped with aeration and fixed media to facilitate reduction
of BOD. Fixed media shall be constructed of polypropylene, supported by a
polyethylene insert. The media shall be fixed in position and contain no
moving or wearing parts and shall not corrode. The media shall be designed
and installed to ensure that sloughed solids descend through the media to
the bottom of the tank. Tanks shall be vented with a vent grate and at least
19.3 square inches of open surface area. Secure with Stainless steel screws.
Vent piping must not allow condensate build up or create back pressure.
Vent shall be above finished grade. Tanks shall be designed to prevent air
passage between the settling zone/tank and the treatment zone and
preventing an air lock. Provide pump out access to clean out all zones.
Provide concrete pad for aeration blower unit.
2.5.3 See paragraph 2.12 for blower requirements.
2.5.4 Bio-Microbics, Inc. MicroFAST 4.5 FAST Unit is the design standard.
2.6 (4) Stage 2 Aeration for Nitrification
2.6.1 Stage 2 Aeration for Nitrification unit shall be housed in a precast concrete
tank with an effective volume of 5,000 gallons.
2.6.2 Unit shall be equipped with aeration and fixed media to facilitate nitrification.
Fixed media shall be constructed of polypropylene, supported by a PE
insert. The media shall be fixed in position and contain no moving or
wearing parts and shall not corrode. The media shall be designed and
installed to ensure that sloughed solids descend through the media to the
bottom of the tank. Tanks shall be vented with a vent grate and at least 7
square inches of open surface area. Secure with Stainless steel screws. Vent
piping must not allow condensate build up or create back pressure. Vent
shall be above finished grade. Tanks shall be designed to prevent air passage
between the settling zone/tank and the treatment zone and preventing an air
lock. Provide pump out access to clean out all zones. Provide concrete pad
for aeration blower unit.
2.6.3 A complete Soda Ash feed system for pH/alkalinity adjustment shall be as
specified in Specification Section 11600 – Chemical Feed Equipment.
2.6.4 Blower for aeration shall be capable of delivering 140 SCFM. See paragraph
2.12 for further requirements.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11400/7
2.6.5 Bio-Microbics, Inc. NitriFAST 4.5 FAST Unit is the design standard.
2.7 (5) Denitrification Filter
2.7.1 Denitrification Filter unit shall be housed in a precast tank with an effective
volume of 3,000 gallons.
2.7.2 Unit shall be equipped with fixed media and recirculation pump which
discharges to the equalization tank. Recirculation pump shall be equipped
with stainless steel cable. Recirculation pump shall be 5 gpm minimum, nonclog, cast iron, sewage pump, capable of passing a 3-inch solid with
adjustable recycle rate from 50% to 150% of plant rate flow of 4500 gpd.
Unit shall be vented and provided with a pump out access as specified in
paragraph 2.6.2.
2.7.3 A complete chemical feed system to feed supplemental carbon
(MicroC1000) is specified in Specification Section 11600 – Chemical
Feed Equipment.
2.7.4 Bio-Microbics, Inc. ABC-N 3.0 is the design standard. The treatment
system shall be complete with all needed equipment as specified herein.
Provide tank venting and pump out access. The unit shall include ABC-N
system insert, leg extensions, and pump. Media shall be rigid PVC,
Polyethylene, or polypropylene and shall be supported by the PE insert.
The media shall be fixed in position and contain no moving or wearing
parts and shall not corrode. The media shall be designed and installed to
ensure that sloughed solids through the media to the bottom the tank. The
unit shall be equipped with a continuous duty recirculation pump and
recirculation assembly. Recirculation pump shall be a cast iron, non-clog
submersible wastewater pump as manufactured by Zoeller, Gould, or
approved equivalent.
2.8 (6) Re-aeration
2.8.1 The re-aeration unit shall be housed in a precast concrete tank with an effective
volume of 1,250 gallons.
2.8.2 Unit shall be equipped with aeration and fixed media to facilitate reduction of
BOD from the denitrification filter. See paragraph 2.12 for blower
requirements.
2.8.3 Bio-Microbics, Inc. MicroFAST 0.9 FAST Unit is the design standard.
2.9 (7) Pump Station
2.9.1 The pump station unit shall be housed in a precast concrete tank with an
effective volume of 5,000 gallons.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11400/8
2.9.2 The pump station pump equipment to hydraulic unit is specified in
Specification Section 11700 – Drip Irrigation System.
2.9.3 The pump station unit will be equipped with a second set of duplex
submersible type pumps each rated at 15 gpm at a TDH of 7.8 feet. These
pumps will discharge to the equalization tank. Pumps shall be Zoeller,
Goulds or approved equal. The recycle pumps shall be provided with
variable frequency drive units (2 each) to allow for finite flow adjustment.
The VFD’s shall be mounted in the new treatment building and will allow
for manual adjustment of the pump flow rates. The VFD shall be Square D
or approved equal.
2.9.4 Pumps shall be UL listed.
2.9.5 Pumps shall be hardwired in a watertight junction box per local code.
2.9.6 Each pump shall have individual breaker contactor and capacitor.
2.9.7 Pumps shall have check valve, disconnect and shut-off valve on discharge side
and shall be equipped with stainless steel lifting cable.
2.10 (8) Hydraulic Unit
2.10.1 The hydraulic unit shall be housed in a manufactured housing unit with
heating unit as provided by the manufacturer.
2.10.2 The hydraulic unit is specified in Specification Section 11700 – Drip
Irrigation System.
2.11 (9) Backwash Tank
2.11.1 The backwash tank unit shall be housed in a precast concrete tank with an
effective volume of 5,000 gallons.
2.11.2 The backwash tank will be equipped with duplex submersible type pumps
each rated at 15 gpm at a TDH of 8 feet. Backwash pumps will discharge to
the equalization tank. Pumps shall be Zoeller, Goulds or approved equal.
2.11.3 Pumps shall be UL listed.
2.11.4 Pumps shall be hardwired in a watertight junction box per local code.
2.11.5 Each pump shall have individual breaker contactor and capacitor.
2.11.6 Pumps shall have check valve, float controls, disconnect and shut-off valve
on discharge side and shall be equipped with stainless steel lifting cable.
Pump shall pass a minimum 3/8” diameter solid.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11400/9
2.12 Air Blower Systems and Appurtenances
2.12.1 The stage 1, stage 2 and re-aeration tanks shall be aerated. Each tank is to be
individually equipped with dedicated blowers. Blowers are to be in
continuous operation. Blower manufacturer to be FUJI Electric or approved
equal.
2.12.2 Blowers shall be of a single stage ring compressor type with single shaft
direct drive TEFC electric motor. Each blower shall be equipped with a
removable all steel air intake filter. Filter shall be capable of being removed
to be cleaned with compressed air or tap water. Each blower is to be
equipped in a two-piece rectangular housing with tamper-proof screws.
2.12.3 The blowers which serve the stage 1 or stage 2 aeration tanks shall meet the
following:
2.12.3.1 Motor 2.5 horsepower 220 VAC, 60 Hz with NEMA Class B
insulation and pilot duty type thermal protector.
2.12.3.2 Each blower shall supply a minimum of 130 SCFM to the aeration
tanks.
2.12.3.3 Blower to be FUJI Model VFC 50 or approved equal.
2.12.4 The blower which serves the re-aeration tank shall meet the following:
2.12.4.1 Motor 1/3 horsepower 110 VAC, 60 Hz with NEMA Class B
insulation and pilot duty type thermal protector.
2.12.4.2 Blowers hall supply a minimum of 10 SCFM to the re-aeration
tank.
2.12.4.3 Blower to be FUJI Model VFC20 or approved equal.
2.12.5 Blower units shall be mounted on a precast concrete pad located at the
finished ground surface and adjacent to the treatment unit served. Precast
concrete shall be 4000 psi.
2.12.5.1 Stage 1 and stage 2 aeration tank concrete blowers pads minimum
57” x 36” x 2.5” thick.
2.12.5.2 Re-aeration tank concrete blower pad minimum 26” x 20” x 2.5”
thick.
2.12.5.3
Mount blowers
recommendations.
to
concrete
pad
per
manufacturer’s
2.12.6 Each motor/blower assembly shall be enclosed with a weatherproof, one-piece
molded fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) acoustical enclosure to help
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11400/10
reduce the resultant noise level. Each enclosure shall be constructed of a
fiberglass composite laminate of 3/16-inch minimum thickness with 1-inch
thick layer of polyurethane foam insulation sprayed on the inside surface.
Each enclosure shall include one pair of stainless steel hinges, aluminum
lifting handle with spring latch, a locking hasp, and vents.
2.13 Blower/Pump Motor Control Panel: Electrical controls for the blowers and
equalization pump motors shall be provided within a NEMA 4X control panel to be
wall-mounted in the building. Controls shall include motor circuit breakers, acrossthe-line magnetic type motor starters, motor thermal overload protection, indicating
lights, and elapsed time meters. The panel shall control the operation of all motors.
2.13.1 The control panel shall include a 15-minute, multiple 24-hour time clock to
permit automatic operation of the treatment facility throughout the day. A
second time clock shall be provided for blower operation during low flow
conditions (i.e., weekends, vacation periods, etc.) to allow operational
flexibility. A three-position “hand-off-auto” (H-O-A) selector switch shall be
installed for each motor, to allow the treatment plant aeration unit to operate
either on a continuous run basis or according to the cycle established on the
time clock. The control panel shall be provided by the treatment plant
equipment supplier.
2.14 Air Distribution Piping
2.14.1 The air distribution piping shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel piping, and
Schedule 40 galvanized malleable iron pipe fittings shall be used throughout
the air distribution system. Individual galvanized pipe unions and flexible
couplings with stainless steel clamps shall be provided as necessary in the air
distribution system. Individual air control valves shall be installed in the air
distribution piping as required to allow individual adjustment of each
separate element within the system.
2.14.2 Air distribution shall be provided through Schedule 40 galvanized steel air
header piping and fittings. The air header shall have individual drop pipes
connected to the header assembly for air supply to each individual diffuser
header and air lift assembly. Each drop pipe shall be equipped with an air
adjustment ball valve to control air flow to each individual diffuser header
and air lift assembly. In addition, a quick release union shall be provided for
each drop pipe downstream from the air adjustment ball valve.
2.15 Air Diffuser System
2.15.1 Each diffuser assembly shall be installed not more than 12 inches away
from the chamber sidewall. Diffuser headers shall be constructed of 1 1/4inch diameter Schedule 40 galvanized steel and shall be designed to
insure uniform mixing within the chambers. Each diffuser header shall be
equipped with 3/4-inch Model D-24 coarse bubble air diffusers as
manufactured by Sanitaire Corporation, 9333 North 49th Street, Brown
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11400/11
Deer, Wisconsin 53223, Telephone: (414) 365-2200, Fax: (414) 365-2210,
or approved equal.
2.15.2 Coarse Bubble Air Diffuser Performance (Minimum Requirements)
2.15.2.1 Oxygen transfer efficiency shall be defined as follows:
10% at 13 feet submergence
6% at 8 feet submergence
3% at 6 feet submergence
2.15.2.2 Pressure drop: 0.10 psig
2.15.2.3 Diffuser headers shall be located 8 inches above the tank floor. Air
bubble distribution effected by the diffusers shall be adequate to
provide all oxygen necessary for nitrification/aerobic
digestion/aeration processes, while maintaining a minimum
dissolved oxygen residual concentration of 3 mg/L in the respective
tanks. A minimum dissolved oxygen residual concentration of 8
mg/L shall be maintained in the re-aeration tank.
3 E XE C U T IO N
3.1 Excavation and Backfill
3.1.1 The Contractor shall provide a coarse aggregate base with a geotextile fabric
underliner beneath the reinforced concrete tanks. Aggregate fill material
shall be used between and around the tankage. Aggregate fill shall satisfy the
requirements specified in Section 02200 – Earthwork. Absolutely no
saturated soils, rocky material, or other questionable materials shall be used
for backfill activities. The voids between the tanks shall be filled before
backfilling around the outer perimeter of the plant. In addition, the
Contractor shall backfill evenly around the outer perimeter of the plant and
the remaining portions between the tankage in order to minimize unbalanced
external loading. Provide factory trained personnel for five (5) working days
for plant start-up.
3.1.2 Aggregate fill material used as backfill around the tankage shall not be
compacted to prevent damage to the precast concrete tankage from
compaction equipment.
3.1.3 The site shall be graded in such a way that all stormwater runoff drains away
from the site. Stormwater runoff shall not be permitted to enter the
excavation at any time. The Contractor shall backfill between and around all
tankage as soon as possible to prevent potential flotation.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11400/12
3.2 Manufacturer’s Instructions
3.2.1 Install the wastewater treatment plant system in accordance with the written
instructions of the equipment manufacturer as indicated and as specified in
this section.
Provide all necessary interconnections, services, and
adjustments for a complete operating system.
3.3 Performance Tests
3.3.1 Provide the services of the equipment manufacturer’s experienced engineers
to perform testing of the system installed. During the tests, all manufacturers
integrated equipment shall be tested under every condition of operation, and
controls shall be tested to demonstrate performance of function. All
adjusting and balancing shall be completed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Warranty on adjustment of controls and extend one year after the
system is put into operation. The equipment manufacturer/supplier shall
correct all defects to the work at no expense to the Owner and the test
repeated until satisfactory.
3.3.2 Five days of training shall be provided by a factory trained representative
supplying the package wastewater treatment plant equipment. Provide plant
startup and performance testing specified in Section 01400 – General
Requirements. Manufacturer shall return to site, test and balance system, and
verify treatment parameters three (3) additional times in the first six (6)
months of operation. Provide 12 month warranty for all equipment. Provide
Operation and Maintenance Manual for all equipment in one concise manual.
Provide Operation and Maintenance Manual in PDF form with two (2)
compact discs.
3.3.3 Effluent Parameters: The plant shall be designed based on the design criteria
set forth in Section 2.1 to ensure the plant can treat a wide variety of influent
and effluent conditions. The following effluent standards apply for the
purposes of permitting and the performance test:
Constituent
BODS
TSS
TN
Performance
Standards
30 mg/l
30 mg/l
20 mg/l
The plant must consistently meet this performance standard criteria prior to
successfully passing the performance testing and substantial completion.
3.4 Leakage Tests: All precast concrete structures shall be tested for leakage using
potable water. Measure the amount of leakage occurring over a 24-hour period. Zero
leakage from a structure shall demonstrate successful test completion. If leakage is
observed, find and repair the leaks, and repeat the test until successful.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11400/13
3.5 Piping Systems
3.5.1 Piping shall be hydrostatically tested at not less than 1.5 times the working
pressure, but not less than 50 psig and shall show no leakage or reduction of
gauge pressure after 4 hours.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11400/14
Section 11600
Chemical Feed Equipment
1 GENERAL
1.1 Description
1.1.1 Chemical feed equipment shall consist of, but not be limited to, all piping,
valves, and other appurtenances required for complete and operable feed
systems for the following chemical services:
1.1.1.1 Soda Ash Solution
1.1.1.2 MicroC1000 Carbon
1.1.2 The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals
required to install, test, and place in satisfactory services all chemical feed
systems and equipment as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.1.3 Provide PVC conduit below grade to convey tubing to point of application.
1.2 Submittals: Provide the following in a timely manner in accordance with Section
01400 – General Requirements.
1.2.1 Catalog cuts, performance data, shop drawings, replaceable parts lists, and
certificates of compatibility with intended chemical service for the following:
1.2.1.1 Piping, Fittings, and Pipe Appurtenances
1.2.1.2 Valves
1.2.1.3 Chemical Feed Pump Wall Mounted Shelves
1.2.1.4 Eye/Face Wash Station
1.2.1.5 Soda Ash Feed System and Appurtenances
1.2.1.6 MicroC1000 Feed System and Appurtenances
1.2.1.7 Miscellaneous Treatment Building Equipment
1.2.2 Provide piping schematics, wiring schematics with interconnection diagrams,
instrumentation diagrams, and a complete written sequence of operation for
each chemical feed equipment item. Provide plumbing riser for soda ash
make up water.
1.2.3 Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Bound in loose-leaf binders for review
by WW Associates.
1.2.3.1 The manual’s identification shall be inscribed on the cover.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11600/1
1.2.3.2 Each manual shall include the names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of the local representatives for each item of equipment and
each system.
1.2.3.3 Each manual shall have a table of contents and be assembled to
conform to the project manual table of contents with the tab sheets
placed before instructions covering the subject. Additionally, each
manual shall contain a comprehensive index of all manuals
submitted in accordance with this paragraph.
1.2.3.4 Manuals and specifications shall be furnished which provide full and
complete coverage of the following subjects:
1.2.3.4.1 Operational Requirement: This document shall describe, in
concise terms, all the functional and operational
requirements for the system.
1.2.3.4.2 Maintenance: Documentation of all user-performed
maintenance on all system components including
inspection, periodic preventative maintenance, fault
diagnosis, and repair or replacement of defective units. This
shall include calibration, maintenance, and repair of all
equipment, instrumentation, and controls, plus diagnosis
and repair or replacement of all system hardware.
1.2.4 Spare Parts: Each equipment manufacturer shall submit a recommended list of
spare parts for the equipment supplied.
1.3 Quality Assurance
1.3.1 The manufacturers shall provide all piping, valves, equipment, and
appurtenances required for complete and operable chemical feed systems.
1.3.2 Each equipment manufacturer shall have unit responsibility to the Contractor
for the installation of all equipment, instrumentation, and controls specified
in this section.
1.3.3 Each equipment supplier shall have unit responsibility for its equipment startup.
Provide services of experienced, manufacturer-trained technicians for two
separate site visits consisting of a minimum one 8-hour working day on the
site to demonstrate satisfactory operation and another minimum of one 8-hour
working day to provide training and instruction of owner’s personnel for
equipment operation. Site visits shall be coordinated with the engineer.
1.4 Project Conditions
1.4.1 Equipment furnished in accordance with this section shall be installed at the
location and in the space allocated on the contract drawings. The Contractor
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11600/2
shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to
install, test, and place in satisfactory service all chemical feed equipment as
indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.4.2 Any structural, piping, electrical requirements, wiring, instrumentation and
controls, drawings, or other modifications required to accommodate
equipment offered other than that specified as the design standard and as
shown on the drawings shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.5 Warranty
1.5.1 In addition to the manufacturer’s standards guarantee, the contractor shall
include the services of a factory-trained serviceman to provide repair services
for the equipment for the period of 1 year commencing with the time the
equipment is placed in continuous permanent operation. This service shall
include the cost of all replacement parts required during the interval.
1.6 Below grade chemical tubing shall be routed through PVC conduit.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 All chemical feed equipment shall have manufacturer’s name, model number,
working pressure if pertinent and other technical information as required cast
in raised letters on body of equipment.
2.1.2 All bolts, nuts, studs, etc. on or required to connect chemical feed equipment to
bases, supports, walls, and other surfaces shall be of fiberglass reinforced
plastic (FRP).
2.1.3 Bolts and nuts shall have hexagon heads and nuts.
2.1.4 Gasket materials and installation shall conform to manufacturer’s
recommendations.
2.2 Piping Application
2.2.1 Chemical Solution Piping
2.2.1.1 MicroC1000 Carbon: Tygon Chemfluor FEP tubing 200 psi rating
2.2.1.2 Soda Ash Solution: Tygon Chemfluor FEP tubing, 200 psi rating
2.2.2 Water supply piping for soda ash make up water, PVC 200 psi rating. 2.2.3
Below grade chemical feed conduit: Solvent welded Schedule 80 PVC.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11600/3
2.2.4 Accessories: Provide chemically resistant flanges, quick disconnects,
connecting pieces, transition glands, transition sleeves, injectors , shut off
ball type valves, and other adapters and appurtenances as required for
complete and operable piping systems for service indicated.
2.3 Pipe
2.3.1 Chemical Tubing
2.3.1.1 Tubing for Soda Ash feed solution and MicroC1000 product shall be
Tygon Chemfluor FEP tubing, as manufactured by Norton Performance
Plastics Corporation, 150 Dey Road, Wayne, New Jersey 07470,
United States Plastics Corporation, Saint-Gobain Performance Plastics,
2664 Gilchrist Road, Akron, Ohio 44305, or approved equal. Inside
diameter shall be 1/4-inch; minimum wall thickness shall be 3/8-inch.
Tubing shall be rated for a maximum working pressure of 200 psig in
accordance with ASTM D1599. Fittings shall be molded Chemfluor
PFA Teflon, “Gorilla-Grip” compression type.
2.3.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping
2.1.3.1 Pipe, couplings, and fittings shall be Schedule 80 meeting the
requirements of ASTM D1785, manufactured of material meeting
the requirements of ASTM D1784, Type 1120. Provide ASTM
D2467 Schedule 80 fittings and ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.1.3.2 Provide screwed joints and flanges, couplings, nipples, sleeves, as
required to connect dissimilar pipe materials, valves, equipment and
appurtenances.
2.3.3 Tubing pipe supports shall be provided in accordance with Section 02735 –
Pipe Supports and Anchors.
2.4 Eyewash Station
2.4.1 Eyewash Station shall be a wall mounted using gravity to supply a continuous
flow of clear water for a full 15 minutes at a rate of 0.42 gpm. Unit shall be
FDA approved and meet the requirements of ANSI Z358.1.
2.4.2 Acceptable Manufacturer: Haws, Model 7500 Speakman or approved equal.
2.4.3 Preservative/Bacteriostatic Additive – provide supply for treating 100 gallons. 2.5
Soda Ash Feed System
2.5.1 General: The soda ash feed system shall consist of one chemical metering
pumps, one mechanical agitator, one wall shelf and one soda ash solution
storage tank. Mount pump on wall shelf and place pump in operation.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11600/4
2.5.2 Chemical Metering Pump: Pump shall be an LMI-Milton Roy Model Roytronic
Excel AD, or approved equal. Pump shall be positive displacement diaphragmtype, pump capable of pumping liquid soda ash at a rate of 0-0.20 GPH against
a backpressure of 100 psi. Pump shall be provided with a 4-function valve
assembly to aid in priming, prevent backflow, prevent loss of suction and
allow off-gassing/bleed-off. Pump shall be equipped with dual manual
controls, allowing adjustment of both stroke length and speed. Suction and
discharge 1/4” diameter tubing of sufficient length for the application as
intended and as shown on the drawings is to be provided. The suction tubing
shall be equipped with “tubing straightner” device to preclude entanglement
with the tank agitator. The suction tubing will be equipped with a foot valve to
facilitate maintenance of pump suction prime. Connectors shall be provided at
the pump head and ball cut-off valve to facilitate maintenance. Two spare
connectors shall be provided.
2.5.3 Storage Tank: The tank shall be constructed of polyethylene with 50-gallon
storage capacity (10-gallon gradations boldly marked). The tank shall have a
cover with a factory-drilled openings for the mechanical agitator, tubing and
appurtenances.
2.5.4 Mechanical Agitator: The agitator shall be an LMI Model No. 10590. Shaft
length shall be approximately 34 inches. Impeller construction shall be Type
303 stainless steel with epoxy chemical resistant coating. Agitator motor
shall be 1/20 HP, 1,600 RPM, with an electrical plug connection.
2.5.5 Electrical service for the soda ash feed system shall be wall receptacle.
2.6
MicroC1000 Feed Pumps
2.6.1 General: The MicroC1000 feed system shall consist of one chemical metering
pumps on one wall shelf.
2.6.2 Chemical Metering Pump: Pump shall be an LMI – Milton Roy Model Roytronic
Excel AD, or approved equal. Pump shall be positive displacement diaphragmtype, capable of pumping liquid sodium hypochlorite solution at a rate of 0-0.21
GPH against a back pressure of 100 psi. Pump shall be provided with a 4function valve assembly to aid in priming, prevent backflow, loss of suction
and allow off-gassing/bleedoff. Pump shall be equipped with dual manual
controls, allowing adjustment of both stroke and speed. Suction and discharge
1/4” diameter tubing of sufficient length for the application as intended and as
shown on the drawings is to be provided. The suction tubing will be equipped
with “tubing straightener” device to keep tubing straight and foot valve to
facilitate maintenance of suction prime. Connectors shall be provided at the
pump head and ball cut-off valve to facilitate maintenance. Two spare
connectors shall be provided.
2.6.3 Furnish and install complete LMI Metering Pump Wall Shelf 34643 with poly
propylene wall bracket assembly with mounting hardware to support two LMI
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11600/5
chemical metering pump. Mount pump on wall shelf and place pump in
operation.
2.6.4 Provide drum cover with openings for tubing and appurtenances.
2.6.5 Electrical service is a wall receptacle.
2.7 Chemical Supply: The Contractor shall provide the following chemicals:
2.7.1 MicroC1000 Carbon Product: (1) 55-gallon drum with 55 gallon Polyethylene
tank cover. Cover shall have appropriate penetrations to facilitate suction and
blow-off of product from the chemical metering pump and tubing straightener.
2.7.2 Soda ash: (5) 50 pound bags of soda ash.
2.8 Chemical Feed Pump Wall Mounted Shelves
2.8.1 Each chemical feed shelf shall be constructed of vinylester fiberglass shapes
and suitable for resistance to the chemicals that it may come in contact with.
2.8.2 Each shelf shall be sized to adequately accommodate the chemical feed pumps,
piping and all other appurtenances supported by the shelf.
2.8.3 Each shelf shall be provided by the chemical feed pump manufacturer and shall
be suitable for withstanding all static and dynamic loads imparted by the
chemical feed pumps and their appurtenances without vibration.
2.8.4 Quantity: Two (2).
2.9 Spill Containment Deck and Ramp
2.9.1 Furnish and install low profile type spill containment deck for each the soda
ash feed storage tank and the MicroC1000 feed drum and as shown on the
drawings.
2.9.2 Provide and install one containment deck ramp.
2.9.3 Containment deck and ramp shall be from the same manufacturer and are to be
compatible.
2.9.4 Containment deck shall be a polypropylene sump with deck, minimum volume
11 gallons and integral ramp.
2.9.5 Containment deck as manufactured by UltraTech International, Inc. or
approved equal.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11600/6
3 E XE C U T IO N
3.1 Installation: Install equipment as shown on the drawings and according to the written
instructions of the manufacturer. Provide all necessary interconnections, services,
and adjustments required for complete operating chemical feed systems.
3.2 Provide wall sleeves with mechanical link-seals for pipe penetrations.
3.3 Rough-in piping for make up water prior to pouring treatment building floor slab.
3.4 Performance Tests: Provide the services of the manufacturer’s experienced engineers
to perform testing of the chemical feed equipment as installed. During the tests, all
manufacturer’s integrated design equipment shall be tested under every condition of
operation, and all controls shall be tested to demonstrate performance of the required
function. All adjusting and balancing shall be completed to the satisfaction of WW
Associates. Warranty on adjustment of controls shall extend 1 year after the system is
put into operation. All defects in the work and equipment shall be corrected by the
Contractor at his own expense and the test repeated until proven satisfactory.
3.5 Startup: Follow the manufacturer’s recommended startup procedures and demonstrate
to the Owner that the equipment is performing as specified in this section.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11600/7
Section 11700
Drip Irrigation System
1 GENERAL
1.1 System Description
1.1.1 This work consists of furnishing and installing one compete wastewater drip
irrigation system with all necessary parts and equipment as described in the
following specifications and as shown on the drawings. Drip irrigation
system source of supply shall be effluent from the re-aeration unit from the
package wastewater treatment plant.
1.1.2 Principal items of equipment include all valves, piping, filters, hydraulic units,
meters, solenoid valves, controls, electrical supply and components, header
piping, pressure compensating drip tubing, air release/vacuum breaker valves
fittings, pumps, pump hoists, float switches supports and appurtenances
described, shown on the drawings and as needed to place the irrigation
system into operation.
1.2 Related Requirements: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this
section.
1.2.1 Section 02200 – Earthwork
1.2.2 Section 02500 – Surfacing and Incidental Construction
1.2.3 Section 02730 – Wastewater Piping Systems
1.2.4 Section 03450 – Precast Concrete Tanks
1.2.5 Section 11400 – Package Wastewater Treatment Plant
1.2.6 Section 16010 – Electrical General Provision
1.3 Quality Assurance
1.3.1 The drip irrigation system shall be provided as a package system as specified,
as indicated on the drawings, and as required to provide a complete
installation ready for and placed into operation.
1.3.2 The package system shall be provided by a single source supplier regularly
engaged in providing drip irrigation for wastewater as specified in this
section.
1.3.3 The drip irrigation system equipment manufacturer/supplier shall have unit
responsibility for equipment startup. Provide the services of an experienced,
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/1
manufacturer-trained technician for one site visit consisting of a total of five
8-hour working days on the site, to demonstrate satisfactory operation and to
provide training and instruction of the Owner’s personnel for equipment
operation.
1.3.4 Experience: The wastewater drip irrigation system equipment manufacturer
shall certify to not less than 5 years of experience in the design and
fabrication of wastewater drip irrigation system equipment.
The
manufacturer shall submit a list of not less than ten operating wastewater
drip irrigation system facilities installed in the last five years as evidence of
meeting the experience requirement.
1.3.5 The drawings and design of the wastewater drip irrigation system is based on
“Perc-Rite System Manufactured by American Manufacturing Company,
Inc. [Address: P.O. Box 97, Elkwood, Virginia 22718; Telephone: 1-8003453132; Email: [email protected]; Point of Contact: Bryan
Allen] as the design standard. Approved alternate is Geoflow, Inc. [Address:
506 Tamal Plaza, Corte Madera, California 94925; Telephone: 1-800-8243388]. Other manufacturer substitutions will not be permitted.
1.3.6 If the alternate system is used, the Contractor shall provide a similar
arrangement and revise the dimensional layout as necessary. The design of
the alternate wastewater drip irrigation system must be certified by a licensed
professional engineer and approved by WW Associates in the shop drawing
review phase of construction.
1.4 Submittals: Provide the following in a timely manner in accordance with the
approved submittals schedule as specified in Section 01400 – General
Requirements.
1.4.1 Detail shop drawings for mechanical and electrical equipment including
pumps, piping, float switches, controllers, valves, valve boxes, hydraulic
units, flow meters, filters, and appurtenances of the wastewater drip
irrigation system.
1.4.2 Product data, catalogue cut-sheets, certified pump curves for associated
equipment and accessories/appurtenances.
1.4.3 Electrical power supply equipment and instrumentation and controls data,
including equipment, point-to-point wiring diagrams, point-to-point
instrumentations, control panels, and sequence of operation.
1.5 Project Conditions
1.5.1 Equipment furnished in accordance with this section shall be installed at the
location and in the space allocated on the contract drawings.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/2
1.5.2 Material used in the manufacturing of the tankage and equipment shall be of
excellent quality used for the purpose in commercial practice. Material shall
be free from all defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability
of the finished product.
1.5.3 The equipment supplied under this specification shall be the standard product
of the specified manufacturer so that prompt and continuous service and
delivery of spare parts may be secured. The component parts of the unit shall
be supplied by one manufacturer.
1.5.4 Pump and motors shall be sized such that the motor does not overload at any
point on the operating curve. Pumps and motors shall be designed to perform
with a reasonable service life when operated continuously or intermittently.
Motors shall be designed with a minimum service factor of 1.15. Other
motor requirements shall be as specified in this section and as specified in
Division 16 – Electrical.
1.5.5 Electrical Motors, Controllers, Starters, and Disconnects: Furnish motors,
controllers, starters, and disconnects with their respective pieces of
equipment. Motors, controllers, starters, and disconnects shall conform to
and shall have electrical connections in accordance with the National
Electrical Code. Controllers and starters shall have a maximum of 120-volt
control circuits, and auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished.
1.5.6 Any structural, piping, electrical requirements, wiring, instrumentation and
controls, drawings, or other modifications required to accommodate
equipment offered shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Hydraulic Unit Effluent Pump and Filtration Controls
2.1.1 Provide complete pump and filter control system consisting of the pump
control panel, processor/controller panel, programmable logic controller and
applicable software, flow meter and field control devices such as differential
pressure switches, solenoid valves, float switches and American Mfg.
Company, Inc. Model ASD 15 - (15 gpm) hydraulic unit mounted on a 22” x
28” aluminum skid.
2.1.2 Control panel shall be located in the building. The system control panel(s)
shall be in a NEMA-4X enclosure. For those panels where “Hand-Off-Auto”
(HOA) switches for zones, pumps and master valve are not mounted on
backplate, those panels shall be provided with a hinged door. Duplex
alternating pumps are required. The panel(s) shall house the following:
2.1.2.1 Circuit breaker for each pump motor starter.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/3
2.1.2.2 Magnetic starter, sized for pump motor HP, with overload protection
in each phase.
2.1.2.3 “Hand-Off-Auto” selector switches, run indicating lights and
running time meter and cycle counters for each pump.
2.1.2.4 Provide an “Emergency Stop” quick pump shut-off switch on outside
of panel if requested.
2.1.2.5 Terminal blocks for field wiring.
2.1.2.6 Auxiliary contacts of starters for remote “run” indication.
2.1.2.7 Components shall be UL Listed.
2.1.2.8 Wires shall be color and number coded.
2.1.2.9 Schematic shall be provided with control.
2.1.2.10 Provide optional remote alarm.
2.1.2.11 Installation shall be in accordance with National Electrical Code.
2.1.3 The programmable logic controller shall be as manufactured by Allen Bradley
or Siemens. The PLC shall be housed inside of the NEMA-4X enclosure. All
input/output (I/O) cards and electrical control components shall be located in
the NEMA-4X enclosure. The controller shall include logic to do the
following:
2.1.3.1 Alternate pumps following each dose.
2.1.3.2 Dose drip zones either individually or two at a time.
2.1.3.3 Provide for automatic filter backflushes at the beginning of each
cycle.
2.1.3.4 Provide for automatic Forward Field Flushing based on a total
cycle.
2.1.3.5 Provide threshold monitoring for flow variances.
2.1.3.6 Dosing shall be controlled by a float switch enable time dosed
system.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/4
2.1.3.7 The system controller shall provide for a zone to be “rested” or taken
“out of service”. The controller shall have the capability to bypass
the zone(s) that have been taken out of service and dose the next
available zone with normal sequence continuation.
2.2 Flow Meter
2.2.1 The effluent flow meter shall be 1.0 inch diameter Multi-Jet Model # ACS100-R/1G AWWA Standard C with thread connections manufactured by
Accent Control Systems or approved equivalent.
2.2.2 Meter must be velocity-type meter with water evenly distributed by multiple
jet-nozzles. The meter’s register shall integrate velocity into totalized flow.
2.2.3 Meter shall have a magnetic drive with 1 contact closure per gallon.
2.2.4 Transmitter shall be two wire with pulse output proportional to flow. 2.3
Hydraulic Unit Effluent Pumps
2.3.1 Submersible Turbine Goulds Blaster Model 20EB05, 3.75”, 1/2HP, 4 stage, 11/4” NPT Discharge, 230V, 1 phase, rated for 15 gpm at 125’ TDH or
approved equal.
2.3.2 Pumps must be able to satisfy the three operating conditions: multiple zone
dose, individual zone forward flush, and filter backwash.
2.3.3 Pumps shall be UL Listed.
2.3.4 Pumps shall be hardwired in a watertight junction box per local code.
2.3.5 Each pump shall have individual breaker, contactor and capacitor.
2.3.6 Pumps shall have check valve, disconnect and shut-off valve on supply pipe
prior to hydraulic unit.
2.3.7 Pumps and motors shall be supplied as part of the Drip Irrigation System
package.
2.4 Float Switches
2.4.1 The drip system shall contain four (4) float switches (Off Level, Dose Enable,
Level Indicator, and High Level).
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/5
2.4.1.1 All floats to have two-conductor cords and be hardwired in a
watertight junction box.
2.4.1.2 All floats to be UL Listed.
2.4.1.3 All floats to have normally open contacts. 2.4.1.4
All floats to send signal to PLC when activated. 2.4.1.5
All float switches to be installed per local code.
2.4.2 The bottom two floats (Off Level & Dose Enable) shall be:
2.4.2.1
115 volt
2.4.2.2 Narrow angle pilot duty switch.
2.4.3 The top two floats (Level Indicator, High Level) shall be:
2.4.3.1
115 volt
2.4.3.2 Wide angle encapsulated differential switches.
2.5 Hydraulic Unit Filtration Rack
2.5.1 Automatic Filter Assembly
2.5.1.1 The automatic filter shall be a package assembly filter battery
consisting of two – 3/4 inch single filters.
2.5.1.2 Filters shall be controlled from the PLC controller by electrically
activated valves.
2.5.1.3 Filter battery shall have the following:
2.5.1.3.1 Inlet/outlet diameter: 3/4 inch MIP
2.5.1.3.2 Minimum backflush pressure: 5 0 psi
2.5.1.3.3 Maximum working pressure: 140 psi
2.5.1.3.4 Maximum recommended flow rate: 15 gpm
2.5.1.3.5 Filter surface area: 25 sq. in. per filter
2.5.1.3.6 Filtering volume: 5.8 cu. in.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/6
2.5.1.3.7 Length of flushing period: 10-15 seconds/filter
2.5.1.3.8 Amount of water used for flushing: 10 gallons
2.5.1.3.9 Filter rings: 140 mesh - 115 micron
2.5.1.3.10 Head loss: 5.0 psi at 15 gpm
2.5.1.4 Backflush procedure to operate as follows
2.5.1.4.1 Control calls for backflush to start.
2.5.1.4.2 Backflush initiated at beginning of each cycle.
2.5.1.4.3 Filtration rings separate on filter element
2.5.1.4.4 Hydraulic valves close discharge and open backflush
outlet on one bank at a time which takes that filter out
of service.
2.5.1.4.5 Water supply for backflush is provided through the filters
in service.
2.5.1.4.6 Backflushing takes place for 10-15 seconds per filter;
discharge of flush water is to wet well.
2.5.1.4.7 Remaining filters are sequentially backflushed until entire
battery has been cleaned.
2.5.1.5 Automatic Filter battery shall be by American Manufacturing Co.,
Inc. Model ASD-15 or approved equivalent.
2.6 Precast Reinforced Concrete Tanks – See Section 03450 – Precast Concrete Tanks
2.7 Valves
2.7.1 Pump Master Control Valve
2.7.1.1 Shall be hydraulic valve with integral diaphragm operated by
hydraulic pressure to control the irrigation pump discharge.
2.7.1.2 Valve body and cover shall be 1-1/2 inch diameter reinforced
nylon.
2.7.1.3 Springs shall be stainless steel.
2.7.1.4 Valve shall have threaded end connections.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/7
2.7.1.5 Inlet pressure range shall be 15-140 psi.
2.7.1.6 Valve shall have slow drip-tight closure to prevent water hammer.
2.7.1.7 Valve control shall be electrically from the computer controller.
2.7.1.8 Valve shall be DOROT “Gal” valve 1-1/2 inch diameter plastic
valve.
2.7.2 Field Control Valves
2.7.2.1 Shall be hydraulic valve with integral diaphragm operated by water
pressure to operate the drip system discharge in both the irrigation
mode and forward field flush mode.
2.7.2.2 Valve body shall be 1.0 inch diameter plastic.
2.7.2.3 Springs shall be stainless steel.
2.7.2.4 Valve shall have threaded end connections.
2.7.2.5 Inlet pressure range shall be 15-140 psi.
2.7.2.6 Valve shall have slow drip-tight closure to prevent water hammer.
2.7.2.7 Valve control shall be electrically from the computer controller.
2.7.2.8 Valve shall be Dorot “Gal” valve 1.0 inch diameter plastic valve or
equal.
2.7.3 Check Valves
2.7.3.1 Check valves smaller than 3 inches shall be iron body, bronze trim,
swing check valves, meeting requirements of MSS-SP-71. Flanged
valves shall conform to ANSI B 16.10 and B16.1 for Class 125.
2.7.3.2 Check valves shall be iron body, bronze mounted, swing check
valves, meeting requirements of AWWA C508. Check valves 3
through 12 inches shall be for 175-psi nonshock cold water
working pressure. Valves shall have outside weight and lever.
Manufacturer shall be American Darling Valve and Manufacturing
Company, Clow Valve, Kennedy Valve Manufacturing Company,
M&H Division of Dresser Industries, G-A Industries, Inc., or
approved equal.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/8
2.7.4 Gate Valves
2.7.4.1 Nonrising stem gate valves 3 inches and larger shall meet
requirements of AWWA C500 “AWWA Standard for Gate
Valves for Water and Sewerage Systems, or valves 3 inches
through 12 inches shall meet requirements of AWWA C509
“AWWA Standard for Resilient Seated Gate Valves for Water
and Sewerage Services.” Working pressure shall be at least 200
psi for valve sizes 3 though 12 inches or at the pressure rating
specified for adjacent piping, whichever is greater. Valve ends
shall be compatible with piping systems in which valves are
installed. Valve shall be cast iron body, bronze mounted. Valves
shall have 0-ring seals and shall open counterclockwise. Asbestos
packing will not be acceptable.
2.7.4.2 Exterior valves shall be suitable for underground service and have a
standard 2-inch square operating nut that extends within 12 inches
of the prevailing ground surface.
2.7.4.3 All gate valves shall be manufactured by Mueller Company,
American Darling, or Clow Valve.
2.7.5 Air Release Valves
2.7.5.1 Shall be placed on high point of each sub-zone supply and return
manifolds and at high point on common supply and return
manifolds as per design.
2.7.5.2 Shall be 1 inch diameter (or greater where required) combined air
release and vacuum breaker valve.
2.7.5.3 Shall operate to release or admit air from or into the line. 2.7.5.4
Shall be suitable for the designed working pressures in the line.
2.7.5.5 Valve body shall be high strength fiberglass reinforced plastic with
operating parts of non-corrosive materials.
2.7.5.6 Valves shall be API Air Released Vacuum Release Model VBK-1.
2.8 Effluent Piping/Wiring
2.8.1 Gravity Piping
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/9
2.8.1.1 Shall be Schedule 40 PVC DWV as a minimum.
2.8.1.2 Fittings shall be Schedule 40 PVC suitable for underground
installation, and meeting the requirements of ASTM D 1784, Type
1120, ASTM D 1785, and ASTM D 2467.
2.8.1.3 All joints shall be solvent welded in accordance with ASTM D 2855
with the use of purple primer and ASTM D 2564 PVC glue.
2.8.2 Non-Dripper Pressure Pipe, Including Supply and Return Piping
2.8.2.1 All non-dripper pressure pipe shall be Schedule 40 PVC pressure
rated.
2.8.2.2 Rigid piping shall be ASTM D 1784, Type 1120 for use with solvent
welded ASTM D2467 Schedule 40 fittings, and meeting the
requirements of ASTM D 1785.
2.8.2.3 All joints shall be solvent welded in accordance with ASTM D 2855
with the use of purple primer and ASTM D 2564 PVC glue.
2.8.2.4 All flexible PVC shall be Schedule 40 PVC and shall be readily
assembled using Schedule 40 PVC fittings and flexible PVC to
rigid PVC adhesive. The flexible PVC shall be solvent welded in
accordance with ASTM D 2855 with the use of purple primer and
ASTM D2564 PVC glue.
2.8.2.5 Top feed Supply and Return Manifolds shall be used on sites with
drainfield slopes of greater than 10% or as required by
manufacturer. Top Feed manifolds shall be constructed of Schedule
40 PVC pipe and fittings.
2.8.3 Drip Tubing
2.8.3.1 All dripper tubing shall have the following characteristics:
2.8.3.1.1 Dripperline shall be 1/2 inch diameter nominal O.D.
Polyethylene tubing with a pressure compensating
mechanism allowing a constant discharge rate from
each dripper opening. Inside diameter shall not be less
than 0.57 inch.
2.8.3.1.2 Dripperline discharge rate per orifice shall be 0.61
gallons per hour. Orifice spacing shall be 2 foot on
center.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/10
2.8.3.1.3 Dripper pressure compensating mechanism shall
maintain a uniform dripper flow rate over a pressure
range of 5-60 psi. Dripper mechanism shall be
activated at 5 psi.
2.8.3.1.4 Dripper diaphragm shall be constructed of synthetic
elastomer to withstand effects of chemicals, fertilizers
and acids (to a pH of 2)
2.8.3.1.5 Diaphragm shall have a continuous self-cleaning feature
which continuously measures the actual flow rate.
Particle that could clog the dripper create back pressure
and push back the diaphragm to continuously clean and
flush particles from the regulating chamber of the
diaphragm.
2.8.3.1.6 Irrigation dripperline shall be equal to Netafim
Irrigation, Inc. BIOLINE pressure compensating
dripperline for wastewater as distributed by American
Manufacturing Company, Inc.
2.8.3.1.7 Drip tubing shall be installed where indicated on design
drawings.
2.8.3.2 The dripper lines are to be automatically scoured (forward flushed) at
a minimum of one time per month or once every prescribed
number of cycles with a minimum scouring velocity of 2 feet per
second at the distal end of each lateral.
2.8.3.3 The drip tubing manufacturer shall provide a head loss chart for
various drip tubing lateral lengths to provide for a minimum
scouring velocity of 2 feet per second at the distal end of each
lateral.
2.8.3.4 Dripperline shall be installed along contour and in accordance to
manufacture’s requirements.
2.8.3.5 Drip tubing shall be connected to header lines with special
connectors provided by manufacturer to provided water tight
connection.
2.8.3.6 Drip tubing is NOT to be glued but rather connected to PVC with the
barbed-typed fittings approved by the manufacturer.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/11
2.8.4 Field Wiring
2.8.4.1 All electrical wiring from the computer/controller to the field control
valves shall be furnished and installed by system installer.
2.8.4.2 All field wiring shall be appropriately sized by an electrician
according to local code.
2.8.4.3 All electrical cables shall be U.L. Listed suitable for direct burial.
2.8.4.4 Field wire splices shall be installed in suitable wire splice pull boxes
with waterproof connections for access to splice connections. The
boxes shall be well marked (not with metal posts or rods) and have
structural capacity for in-ground installation and light vehicular
yard care traffic. At-grade access is preferred.
2.8.5 Lightning Protection: Provide lightning protection for field wiring, hydraulic
unit building and control panel in accordance with the Nation Electric Code
and as approved by WW Associates.
2.9 System Operation
2.9.1 Time Dosing
2.9.1.1 The drip dispersal system shall utilize a time dosing technique via the
automatic controller specified herein.
2.9.1.2 System shall utilize level sensing devices (standard mechanical
differential float switches) located in a dosing tank downstream
from the pretreatment process.
2.9.1.3 When activated by the rising level of effluent in the dosing tank, the
controller shall enable the disposal cycle, and as dictated by the
controller, pump the effluent through 115 micron disc filters and
then to final drip dispersal.
2.9.1.4 The pump control panel shall be equipped with four float switches to
control the timed doses to be discharged.
2.9.1.5 The four float switches, "Redundant Off", "Standard Dose Enable",
“Peak/Level Indicator” and "High Level" shall function as follows:
2.9.1.5.1 Redundant Off - The water level must be high enough to
overcome the "Redundant Off" (first and bottom)
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/12
float in order for the pump to be permitted to run in
automatic mode.
2.9.1.5.2 Standard Dose Enable - When the water level rises high
enough to overcome the "Standard Dose Enable"
(second) float and the time clock has timed out the
preset time delay (rest time between dosing cycles), the
pump will activate and the lead zone(s) is dosed. The
pump will continue to run for the length of time
required to disperse of the specified dose volume and
then shut off. The pump will remain off until the
internal time clock again times out the preset time delay
which the pump will activate (as long as the "Standard
Dose Enable" float is still up) and will run again until
the specified volume is pumped. This process will
repeat until the water level drops below the "Standard
Dose Enable" float and the pump run timer has timed
out.
2.9.1.5.3 Peak / Level Indicator - Used to indicate level of effluent
in final pump tank.
2.9.1.5.4 High Level - If the water level rises enough to overcome
the "High Level" (fourth) float, the audiovisual alarm
will activate (if applicable). The audio portion of the
alarm may be silenced by pressing the Test-NormalSilence switch to the silence position.
2.9.2 Automatic Disc Filtration and Backflush
2.9.2.1 Submersible pumps (duplex) shall deliver unfiltered effluent to each
of the disc filters during the normal forward filtration process.
2.9.2.2 Each filter shall automatically go through a backflush cycle to clean
all of the disc filters at the beginning of the cycle.
2.9.2.3 Backflushing shall proceed as follows:
2.9.2.3.1 One filter valve shall close, thus blocking the flow of
unfiltered effluent to that filter.
2.9.2.3.2 After a short delay, the other flushing valves shall open.
2.9.2.3.3 The clean effluent from the forward filtration filters shall
be directed to the outlet manifold.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/13
2.9.2.3.4 Filtered effluent from the outlet manifold shall then flow
in reverse direction (in through the spine) of the filter to
be backflushed and into the backflush nozzles, spinning
the loosened discs and flushing the captured debris out
the drain manifold.
2.9.2.3.5 The accumulated impurities shall discharge back into the
backwash unit.
2.9.2.3.6 The backflush procedure shall last approximately fifteen
to thirty seconds (or longer if necessary) then the back
flushing valve shall close.
2.9.2.3.7 Only after the first filter has completed its backflushing
cycle, will the next filter begin its cycle of backflushing
in the same manner as the first until all the filters have
been backflushed.
2.9.2.3.8 Effluent shall then be pumped through clean disc filters,
then through the flow meter and finally through the
outlet manifold to the drip field supply line.
2.9.3 Forward Field Flush
2.9.3.1 Each drip zone shall automatically undergo a periodic “Forward Field
Flush” every fifty cycles or 15 days (whichever occurs first) to
scour the inside of the dripper tubing.
2.9.3.2 Forward Field Flush to be accomplished by automatically opening a
Zone Return valve to allow effluent to return to the head of the
system after passing through the drip field.
2.9.3.3 1.6 gpm per distal lateral connection shall be provided to maintain
minimum scouring velocity of 2 feet per second at the distal end of
each lateral.
2.9.3.4 Zones shall Forward Field Flush individually.
2.9.3.5 Flushing volume to be a minimum of three times the volume of the
drip tubing.
3 E XE C U T IO N
3.1 Installation and Construction
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/14
3.1.1 System Installation
3.1.1.1 Pumps, filtration rack, hydraulic unit enclosure with heating element,
controls, floats and valves shall be installed according to plans and
in accordance with appropriate regulations.
3.1.1.2 Non-dripper piping and electrical connections shall be made in
accordance with all appropriate codes and regulations.
3.1.1.3 Hydraulic unit enclosure shall be heated with thermostatically
controlled heater, 225 watt, 120 volt powered through the
controller to include wiring and conduit.
3.1.1.4 Drip Tubing Installation (See “Construction Notes” specified
herein):
3.1.1.4.1 No wet weather installation.
3.1.1.4.2 Prepare field location for installation.
3.1.1.4.3 Dig header ditch for field manifold.
3.1.1.4.4 Install dripper tubing.
3.1.1.4.4.1 Install all drip tubing along contour.
3.1.1.4.4.2 Install at depth specified on plans.
3.1.1.4.4.3 Install drip tubing with either standard
trencher (i.e., Ditch Witch) or by hand.
3.1.1.4.4.4 See construction notes for addition
installation techniques.
3.1.1.4.5 Install loops (flex tubing).
3.1.1.4.6 Dig ditches for conveyance lines.
3.1.1.4.7 Dry fit pressure lines and field manifolds.
3.1.1.4.8 Glue all fittings and place valve boxes.
3.1.1.4.9 Install electrical and phone line.
3.1.1.4.10 Check power supply and power up unit.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/15
3.1.1.4.11 Provide one day volume of clean water for startup.
3.1.1.4.12 Pressure check all fittings and lines
3.1.1.4.13 Inspection of field and loops.
3.1.1.4.14 Flush all fields through the air release valves.
3.1.1.4.15 Set run time for Central Unit.
3.1.1.4.16 Check setup values against calculated values.
3.1.1.4.17 Find leaks and repair.
3.1.1.4.18 Backfill once lines and fields are determined to have no
leaks. Back filling is to be controlled to prevent the
damaging of pipes or fittings
3.1.1.4.19 Grade and seed site.
3.1.2 Supervisory and Technical Support
3.1.2.1 Drip irrigation manufacturer shall provide supervisory services and
technical support during installation of the drip effluent disposal
system.
3.1.2.2 Services to be provided are as follows:
3.1.2.2.1 Supervise/inspect installation of filtration system, float
switches and pumping systems.
3.1.2.2.2 Technical support for installation of the control panels.
3.1.2.2.3 Supervise/inspect installation of subsurface pressure
compensating drip irrigation tubing.
3.1.2.2.4 Supervise/inspect installations and hookups of automatic
valves.
3.1.2.2.5 Supervise/inspect installation of connections of drip
tubing to supply and return manifolds.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/16
3.1.3 Drip Dispersal Field Construction Notes
3.1.3.1 All installation and construction techniques shall conform to state and
county codes pertaining to on-site sewage systems and the permit
for this site.
3.1.3.2 The installation of this system shall be in accordance with
specifications and procedures as supplied by the Manufacturer of
the equipment.
3.1.3.3 The drip tubing shall be installed using a trencher or by hand.
3.1.3.4 All PVC pipe and fittings shall be Schedule 40 Type 1 rated for
pressure applications. All glued joints shall be cleaned and primed
with purple (dyed) PVC primer prior to being glued.
3.1.3.5 All cutting of PVC pipe, flexible PVC and dripper tubing of size 1
1/2” or smaller shall be accomplished with pipe cutters approved
by American Manufacturing Company, Inc. No sawing of PVC,
flexible PVC or dripper tubing of size 1 1/2” or smaller allowed.
3.1.3.6 All PVC pipe, flexible PVC and dripper tubing in the work area shall
have the ends covered with duct tape to prevent construction debris
from entering the pipe. Prior to gluing, all joints shall be inspected
for and cleared of any construction debris.
3.1.3.7 All automatic valves (zone valves & field flush return valves) shall
be installed with isolation valves, bypass valves, and disconnects
(i.e. unions, flanges) for manual field operation during field
maintenance events. All valves must be provided with at-grade
access.
3.1.3.8 Drainfield supply and return lines and manifolds to be installed at
adequate depth to prevent freezing. Horizontal spacing between the
dripper lines and the installation depth to be as specified.
3.1.3.9 No activity on drainfield area other than minimum required to install
system. Do not park equipment, drive large equipment over or
store materials on drainfield area.
3.1.3.10 No wet weather installation is permitted.
3.1.3.11 The contractor shall be certified by the drip irrigation manufacturer
to install this type of system and shall hold a pre-construction
meeting with the individuals responsible for soil evaluation,
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/17
permitting and inspections prior to site work beginning to insure
protection of the site conditions and to ensure the system is
installed according to design.
3.1.3.12 If site conditions are determined to require the installation of the
system to deviate from these plans, all work shall stop immediately
and WW Associates shall be notified. Any ongoing work shall be
at the sole responsibility of the contractor.
3.1.3.13 All force mains shall be tested for leaks prior to drip tubing
installation and prior to system startup. Uncovered force mains
shall be visibly inspected for leaks. If a leak is suspected in
covered force mains then the force main shall be re-tested at a
minimum pressure of at least percent above the design operating
pressure, for at least 30 minutes. There shall be no discernible
leakage.
3.1.4 System Startup
3.1.4.1 A representative from the manufacturer shall be on hand for system
startup.
3.1.4.2 Three (3) days of training shall be provided by the factory trained
representative supplying the drip irrigation system equipment.
3.2 Drip System Warranty
3.2.1 For one year (12 months) after the date of purchase, drip system manufacturer
will repair or replace any product or portion thereof which proves to be
defective due to materials or workmanship.
3.3 Service and Maintenance
3.3.1 Contractor shall provide a one year maintenance warranty beginning at the
expiration manufacturer's original one year warranty (see above “Drip
System Warranty”).
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
11700/18
Section 13100
Precast Concrete Building System
1 GENERAL
1.1 Description: The Contractor shall furnish precast concrete building system for chemical
feed equipment. The building shall be delivered and field erected by the manufacturer
on the Contractor’s poured-in-place floor slab as indicated on the contract drawings.
The precast concrete building shall be EASI-SET brand Model 1012 as manufactured
by Smith-Midland Corporation, or equal by the Clear Flow Company, Rotondo
Precast, or other manufacturer as approved by WW Associates. The manufacturer
shall provide the building with all necessary openings as indicated on the drawings in
conformance with the manufacturer’s structural requirements.
1.2 References: The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1.2.1 ACI-318-93, “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.”
1.2.2 Concrete Reinforcing Institute, “Manual of Standard Practice.”
1.2.3 ANSI/ASCE 7-93 “Building Code Requirements for Minimum Design Loads
in Buildings and Other Structures.”
1.2.4 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
1.2.5 1996 BOCA.
1.2.6 UL-752 Test Method Level 4 for bullet resistance certified by an independent
structural engineer.
1.2.7 Building fabricator must be producer member of National Precast Concrete
Association (NPCA) and participate in its plant certification program. In
addition, building fabricator must have a minimum of 5 years experience
manufacturing and setting transportable precast concrete buildings.
1.3 Quality Assurance
1.3.1 Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to erect the pre-engineered
precast concrete building who has specialized in the erection and installation of
types of precast concrete building systems similar to that required for this project
and who is certified in writing by the precast concrete building system
manufacturer as qualified for erection of the manufacturer’s products.
1.3.2 Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain the precast concrete building system
components, including precast concrete wall and gabled roof panels, and
accessory components, from one source from a single manufacturer.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
13100/1
1.4 Design Criteria
1.4.1 Dimensions
1.4.1.1 Exterior: 10’ wide x 12’ long x 10’ – 7 1/2” high.
1.4.1.2 Interior: 9’-6” wide x 11’-6” long x 7’ – 6” high.
1.4.2 Design Loads
1.4.2.1 Seismic Load Performance Category “C,” Exposure Group III.
1.4.2.2 Standard Live Roof Load: 60 psf.
1.4.2.3 Standard Floor Load: 250 psf.
1.4.2.4 Standard Wind Loading: 130 mph.
1.4.2.5 Allowable Soil Bearing Capacity: 2,500 psf (assumed).
1.4.3 Roof
1.4.3.1 Gabled roof panel shall have a peak in center of 10-foot direction and
shall slope 12 horizontal and 3.713 vertical to each side. The roof
shall extend a minimum of 6 inches beyond the wall panel on each
side.
1.4.4 Gabled roof and wall panels must each be produced as single component
monolithic panels. No roof or vertical wall joints will be allowed, except at
corners. Wall panels shall be set on top of the cast-in-place concrete floor slab.
1.5 Submittals: Provide the following submittals to WW Associates in a timely manner for
approval:
1.5.1 Shop drawings and product data consisting of precast concrete building system
manufacturer’s product information for building components and accessories.
1.5.2 Shop drawings for precast concrete roof and wall panels, and other precast
concrete building system components and accessories that are not fully
detailed or dimensioned in manufacturer’s product data.
1.5.3 Shop drawings and product data for mechanical heating and ventilation
equipment.
1.5.4 Building engineering calculations prepared by or under supervision of a
professional engineer legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where
the project is located.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
13100/2
1.5.5 Manufacturer’s color charts showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns
available for precast wall panels with factory-applied finishes.
1.5.6 Professional engineer’s certificate prepared and signed by a professional
engineer, legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where the project is
located, verifying that the precast concrete building system meets indicated
loading requirements and codes of authorities having jurisdictions.
1.6 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
1.6.1 Deliver prefabricated components, panels, and other manufactured items so
they will not be damaged or deformed. Package wall and roof panels for
protection against transportation damage.
1.6.2 Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting wall, roof, and floor
panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
1.6.3 Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable
weathertight ventilated covering. Store precast concrete wall and roof panels so
that water accumulations will drain freely. Do not store panels in contact with
other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Concrete: ASTM C 260, steel-reinforced, 5,000-psi minimum 28-day
compressive strength, air entrained for precast concrete panels. Reinforced
concrete for the floor slab shall be as specified in Section 03300 – Cast-inPlace Concrete. Precast concrete roof panels shall be 4-inch minimum
thickness. Precast concrete wall panels shall be 3-inch minimum thickness.
2.1.2 Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
2.1.3 Post-tensioning Strand: Post-tensioning cable shall be 41K Polystrand CP50, 1/2inch, 270 ksi, 7-wire strand, ASTM A 416, greased plastic sheath. The roof and
floor slab shall each be post-tensioned by a single, continuous tendon. The
tendon shall form a substantially rectangular configuration having gently
curving corners and a corner where the tendon members are anchored. Tendons
shall be greased and enclosed within a sheath.
2.1.4 Caulking: All joints between panels shall be caulked on the exterior and
interior surface of the joints. Caulking shall be Sikaflex-1A elastic sealant.
Exterior caulk joint shall be 3/8-inch square so that sides of joint are parallel
for correct caulk adhesion. Back of joint shall be taped with bond breaking
tape to ensure adhesion of caulk to parallel sides of joint and not the back.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
13100/3
2.1.5 Openings: 13” x 13” for exhaust fan as shown on drawings.
2.1.6 Panel Connections: All panels shall be securely fastened together with 1/4-inch
thick steel brackets. Steel shall be structural quality, hot-rolled carbon
complying with ASTM A 283, Grade C, and hot-dipped galvanized after
fabrication. All fasteners shall be 1/2-inch diameter bolts complying with ASTM
A 307 for low carbon steel bolts. Cast-in anchors used for panel connections
shall be Dayton-Superior No. F-63. All inserts for corner connections must be
bolted directly to form before casting panels. No floating-in of connection
inserts shall be allowed. The manufacturer shall connect wall panels to floor slab
with 4-inch expansion anchors.
2.2 Accessories
2.2.1 Doors and Frames: Doors and frames shall comply with Steel Door Institute
“Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” (SDI100), and as herein specified. The buildings shall be equipped with double 3’0” x 6’-8” x 13/4”, 18-gauge galvanized/insulated CECO Imperial right hand
reverse metal doors with 16-gauge galvanized frames. Doors and frames shall
be bonderized and painted with one coat of rust inhibitive primer and one
finish coat of enamel paint selected by the Owner from the manufacturer’s
color charts.
2.2.2 Door Hardware
2.2.2.1 Handle: Lindstrom stainless steel, 81/2 inches x 2 inches.
2.2.2.2 Hinges: Hager 920P (primed with non-removable hinge pins), three
hinges per door.
2.2.2.3 Lock Set: Easy-Set 200KD (Bigon No. 26 finish).
2.2.2.4 Surface Bolt, Upper: CECO 4031-US2C (Cadmium plated finish).
2.2.2.5 Surface Bolt, Lower: CECO 4032-US2C (Cadmium plated finish).
2.2.2.6 Astragal: A4441/68R.
2.2.2.7 Threshold: CECO No. 897 V-raised interior, extruded aluminum
threshold with neoprene seal and shall be ADA compliant.
2.2.2.8 Door Holder: Yale H940V26D, overhead slide type surface mounted
door holder with safety release.
2.2.2.9 Drip Cap: National Guard 15D72.
2.2.2.10 Door Stop: Ives 445B26D.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
13100/4
2.2.3 Mechanical Heating and Ventilation Equipment/Accessories: Provide unit
heater, intake louvers, and exhaust fan as indicated on the drawings.
2.3 Finishes
2.3.1 Interior of Building: Smooth steel form finish on all interior panel surfaces.
2.3.2 Exterior of Building: Exterior finish shall be EASI-Brick.
2.3.3 Doors shall be finished as selected by the owner.
3 E XE C U T IO N
3.1 Site Preparation
3.1.1 Provide cast-in-place reinforced concrete floor slab as indicated on the
drawings. The slab shall be sloped in both directions as indicated on the
drawings and capable of supporting loads imposed by the structure.
3.1.2 The floor slab for the building shall bear fully on a crushed stone base that is at
least 1 foot larger than the length and width of the building.
3.1.3 Stone layer beneath the building floor slab shall be a minimum of 6 inches
thick. The vertical soil capacity under stone shall be compacted to have a
minimum bearing capacity of 1,500 psf. Stone shall be VDOT No. 57 coarse
aggregate fill. Stone shall be placed within a perimeter form to 1-inch above
highest point of area where the building will be placed.
3.1.4 The crushed stone base shall be kept within the confines of the soil or
perimeter form. Do not allow the stone base to become unconfined so that it
may wash, erode, or otherwise be undermined.
3.1.5 Provide positive drainage for the concrete floor slab as indicated on the
drawings.
3.2 Site Access
3.2.1 The Contractor must provide a level, unobstructed area large enough for a
crane and tractor-trailer to park adjacent to the floor slab. Crane must be able
to place outriggers within 5 feet of edge of the slab, and truck and crane must
be able to get side-by-side under their own power. No overhead lines may be
within 75-foot radius of center of the slab.
3.3 Install mechanical heating and ventilation equipment in accordance with the
manufacturer’s written recommendations.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
13100/5
Section 15000
Floor Drain Equipment, Piping and Fittings
1 GENERAL
1.1 Description:
1.1.1 Floor drain system shall consist of, but not be limited to all piping, fittings,
fixtures associated with the treatment building floor drain, outfall floor drain
pipe.
1.1.2 The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, fittings, appurtenances,
trenching, backfilling and compaction for the installation of the floor drain
system as shown on the drawings.
1.2 Reference Specifications:
1.2.1 Sections 02200 Earthwork.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PVC pipe and fittings Schedule 40, Grade PVC 2116: ASTM D 1785 and ASTM D
2241 outside building footprint.
2.2 Piping under building shall be cast iron soil pipe.
2.3 Floor drains shall be coated cast iron with double drainage flange, weep holes, bottom
outlet and round strainer in an adjustable clamping collar.
2.3.1 Drains shall be as manufactured by Josam, Model 30900-9AD Series or
approved equal.
3 E XE C U T IO N
3.1 Inspection and Preparation
3.1.1 Prior to all piping work, carefully inspect the installed work or excavation by
other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where the
piping may be installed in accordance with these documents.
3.1.2 Follow the drawings in laying out work and check drawings of other trades to
verify sufficient space to install piping.
3.1.3 Coordinate with other trades to permit the work of all trades to be installed.
3.1.4 Offsets, fittings, and extra pipe necessary to avoid interference shall be
furnished and installed without additional expense to the Owner.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
15000/1
3.1.5 If the piping is installed without coordinating with other trades and so as to
cause interference with work of other trades, the necessary changes shall be
made at no extra charge.
3.2 Installation
3.2.1 Rough in piping below treatment building floor slab and install floor drain in
treatment building concrete floor slab in accordance with manufacturers
requirements.
3.2.2 Provide water seal trap. (“p” trap).
3.2.3 Make up pipe joints and install pipe to lines and grades as shown on the
drawings to include outfall structure.
3.2.4 Test pipe/system to insure no leakage prior to backfilling trench or pouring
treatment building concrete flooring.
3.2.5 Backfill and compact trench per Section 02200 – Earthwork of these
specifications.
3.2.6 Clean floor drain system and flush piping. Piping and floor drain to be smooth
and entirely free from obstructions to flow.
3.2.7 Protect system from entrance of foreign matter during construction.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
15000/2
Section 16010
Electrical General Provisions
1 GENERAL
1.1 The contract documents apply to this section.
1.2 Provide necessary items for a complete installation of electrically operated equipment
specified in specifications and as shown on Contract Drawings.
1.3 Arrange equipment substantially as shown on the drawings. Make deviations only
where necessary to avoid interference. Check equipment size against available space
prior to shipment to avoid interference.
1.4 Material, equipment and installation shall meet requirements of applicable codes and
standards listed below. Electrical material and equipment shall bear the UL label
except where UL does not label such types of material and equipment.
1.4.1 Reference standards are referred to by abbreviation:
International Building Code ....................................................................... IBC
Certified Ballast ........................................................................................CMB
Electrical Testing Lab ................................................................................ ETL
National Fire Protection Association...................................................... NFPA
National Electrical Code ........................................................................... NEC
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. ................................................................ UL
National Electrical Manufacturers Association. .................................... NEMA
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering. ................................... IEEE
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association ...................................... IPCEA
National Electrical Safety Code ............................................................. NESC
Illuminating Engineering Society ............................................................... IES
Edison Electric Institute.............................................................................. EEI
Electronic Industries Association ............................................................... EIA
American National Standards Institute .................................................... ANSI
American Society for Testing and Materials ......................................... ASTM
1.5 Submit shop drawings for the following:
1.5.1 Panelboards
1.5.2 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
1.5.3 Fused Disconnect Switches
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16010/1
1.5.4 Lighting Fixtures
1.5.5 Devices
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Nameplates
2.2 General - Furnish and mount on each new and modified panelboard, starter, safety
switch, and all similar controls, a nameplate descriptive of the equipment or
equipment controlled and circuit or device controlled from.
2.3 Provide black and white nameplates constructed from laminated phonemic with a
white center core. Letters shall be engraved in the phonemic to form white letters 3/8inch high. Fasten nameplates with screws or a non-adhesive type fastener.
2.4 Supporting material shall be complete with hangers, connectors, bolts, clamps, and
necessary accessories to make a complete installation. Products by Binkley, Steel
City, Kindorf, Raco, Unistrut, or Erico will be acceptable.
2.5 Stainless steel enclosures for electrical equipment shall be Type 304 stainless steel.
3 E XE C U T IO N
3.1 Provide equipment connections complete with motor controls, switches, wiring
devices, control devices, protective devices, wiring, conduit and other accessories.
All equipment and connections shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and as
indicated on drawings and specified in specifications.
3.2 Install control and alarm wiring for all equipment in accordance with Division 16
Specification Sections. Before installing control circuits, ensure that controls and
wiring diagrams are in accordance with those furnished with the equipment. Make
any changes required due to different equipment, more up-to-date controls or safety
devices, so that the equipment operates as required. Control voltage shall not exceed
120 volts unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.
3.3 When equipment is supplied with electrical requirements other than those specified or
shown on the drawings, associated electrical devices and circuitry of the current
sizes and ratings shall be provided.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16010/2
Section 16040
Testing and Placing in Service
1 GENERAL
1.1 Description: Provide all material, equipment, labor, and supervision to perform
electrical tests in accordance with the requirements of this specification. Notify the
Owner at least 3 working days in advance of tests.
1.2
Quality Assurance: Final acceptance will depend upon meeting requirements of
specified tests.
1.2.1 Perform all tests in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Should
manufacturer's recommendations conflict with these specifications, contact
the owner for instructions.
1.2.2 Material or equipment failing tests shall be repaired or replaced at the
Contractor's expense.
1.2.3 Record all test results and incorporate into a legible report. Four bound copies
of all test reports shall be delivered to the owner at the end of test period.
2 P R O D UC T S
2.1
The contractor shall employ appropriate testing devices and personnel trained in their
use.
3 EXEC UT ION
3.1
System Tests
3.1.1 Perform equipment tests as required in equipment sections of this
specification.
3.1.2 Upon completion of equipment tests, function test each Division 16 electrical
system specified to verify total system operation.
3.1.3 Test all interlocks, safety devices, and fail safe functions in addition to design
function.
3.1.4 Tests shall include the following in addition to test requirements of individual
sections of Division 16
3.1.4.1 Measure the load on each phase of the service panel.
3.1.4.2 Measure the no load and full load voltages (phase to phase and phase
to ground for each phase) of each service.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16040/1
3.1.4.3 Measure the ground resistance of the main service grounding
electrode.
3.1.4.4 Make insulation resistance tests on all power circuitry and motors.
3.2
Instruct Owner personnel in proper operation and maintenance of equipment.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16040/2
Section 16110
Raceways
1 GENERAL
1.1 The contract documents apply to this section.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Rigid Steel Conduit: Low carbon, hot-dipped galvanized inside and outside, with
threaded ends, minimum size 3/4-inch. Fittings: Cast iron or alloy steel, galvanized.
2.2 Liquid tight flexible metal conduit - Sealtite Type U.A. by Anaconda, Type U.L. and
CSA by International Metal Hose Co., Sealflex-U by Universal Metal Hose Co., or
approved equal.
2.3 Polyvinyl chloride conduit: Schedule 80, with threaded ends, minimum size 3/4-inch.
Fittings shall be threaded.
2.4 Schedule 40 electrical plastic conduit: Designed for underground installation without
concrete encasement and normal duty application above ground and made of
polyvinyl chloride (EPC-40-PVC for type II and III applications.)
2.5 Sealing fittings or bushings - Crouse-Hines Series EYS, EZD or EZS or equal by Pyle
National, Appleton, or approved equal.
2.6 Insulated Bushings - Type B or SBT, as applicable, by O-Z or Series B1900 or Series
TC700, as applicable, by Steel City.
3 E XE C U T IO N
3.1 Install Galvanized Rigid Steel conduit for all above grade, exposed interior and
exterior conduit.
3.2 Install non-metallic schedule 40 conduit for all below grade conduit unless indicated
otherwise.
3.3 Space groups of conduit uniformly.
3.4 For bends and offsets, use an approved Hickey or Bending machine.
3.5 Cut all conduits with hacksaw or approved cutting machine and ream after threading
to remove all burrs.
3.6 Fasten conduit securely to outlets, junctions and pull boxes to ensure firm electrical
contact. Join conduit with approved couplings. No running threads will be allowed.
3.7 Provide insulated bushings and double locknuts on conduits entering or leaving outlet,
junction, or pull boxes, and cabinets.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16110/1
3.8 Avoid condensation pockets in installations. Keep conduit, fittings and boxes free
from foreign matter, before, during and after installation.
3.9
All buried conduits outside of buildings shall have a minimum of thirty (30) inches
of cover.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16110/2
Section 16120
Wire, Cable and Wiring (600 Volt Max.)
1 GENERAL
1.1 The contract documents apply to this section.
1.2 Standards - NEMA Publications WC3, WCS, and WCZ, as applicable.
1.3 Conductor Coding 1.3.1 Color code insulated grounding conductors in accordance with NEC.
1.3.2 Color code current carrying conductors, except control and instrumentation
conductors, as scheduled on the drawings.
1.3.3 No. 12 and No. 10 conductors shall have continuous insulation color.
1.3.3.1 Color code conductors larger than no. 10 which do not have
continuous insulation, color by application of at least two laps of
colored tape on each conductor at all points of access.
1.3.3.2 Number code all control and instrumentation wiring at all points of
access.
1.4 Conductor sizes are based on copper unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Conductors
2.1.1 Conductors shall have moisture resistant, flame retarding, thermoplastic
insulation, type "THHN/THWN", rated for 600 volts unless.
2.1.2 Conductors shall be stranded, soft annealed copper.
2.1.3 Underground outdoor conductors shall be alloy coated, type “Use” insulated
and rated for 600 volts.
2.1.4 Provide No. 12 conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
2.1.5 Control conductors shall be No. 14 minimum for NEC Class I and No. 16 for
NEC Class II.
3 E X E C U T IO N
3.1 Install wiring in conduit.
3.2 Install splice-free conductors within ducts, conduits or earth.
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16120/1
3.3 Connect No. 10 and smaller wires with constant pressure expandable spring type
connectors, "Scotchlok" by 3M, or approved equal.
3.4 Connect No. 8 and larger wires with compression connectors or splices as
manufactured by Burndy, T & B, or approved equal.
3.5 Insulate mechanical splicing connectors to at least 200 PCT. of wire insulation using
pre-stretched tubing connector insulators, 3/M PST for No. 2 and larger conductors.
3.6 Use terminal strips to interconnect and splice control cables.
3.7 Pull conductors using recognized methods and equipment leaving ample lengths of
wire at junctions for connections.
3.7.1 Use soapstone or UL approved compound as required to facilitate pulling.
3.7.2 Complete and cleanout conduit system before pulling wire.
3.8 Form and tie all wiring in panelboards and control panels.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16120/2
Section 16130
Switch and Outlet Boxes
1 GENERAL
1.1 The contract documents apply to this section.
1.2 Provide boxes, complete with cover or device plate for switches, receptacles, or other
similar devices, or where required for pulling or joining branch circuit wiring.
1.3 Conduit bodies may be used on exposed conduit work instead of outlet boxes.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Cast boxes, zinc-cadmium finish malleable iron. Cast boxes shall be series FD by
Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or approved equal.
2.2 Box sizes (minimum) shall be four (4) inches wide, four (4) inches long and 2-1/2
inches deep.
2.3 Cover plates for exterior areas - Corrosion resistant cast aluminum, gasketed,
weatherproof, Crouse-Hinds = DS701G for duplex receptacles and - DS185 for
switches, or approved equal.
2.4 Provide covers and gaskets with conduit bodies, of a design suitable for the
application. Provide watertight conduit bodies in damp and wet locations. Conduit
bodies will be cast ferrous alloy, galvanized, as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds,
Appleton, or approved equal.
3 E XE C U T IO N
3.1 Support all boxes to maintain alignment and rigidity.
3.2 All interior and exterior device boxes shall be cast type.
3.3 Clean boxes of all foreign matter prior to installation or wiring or devices.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16130/1
Section 16140
Wiring Devices
1 GENERAL
1.1 The contract documents apply to this section.
1.2 Standards, NEMA Publications No. WD-1, No. WD-2, No. WD-3, No. WD-5.
1.3 Wiring device color shall be gray except where otherwise indicated.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 A.C. General-Use snap switches
2.1.1 Provide totally enclosed, 20 ampere, 120/277 volt, quiet A.C. General-Use
snap switches.
2.1.2 Switches shall be single pole.
2.1.3 Switches shall be specification grade. Bryant 4900 series, Hubbell 1220 series,
P&S 20AC series, G.E. 5950 series.
2.2 Duplex convenience receptacles
2.2.1 Provide NEMA configuration 5-20R duplex 125 volt grounding type
receptacles rated for 20 amperes unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
2.2.2 Receptacles shall be specification grade. Bryant 5362, Hubbell 5362, P&S
6300, G.E. 4108.
3 E X E C U T IO N
3.1 Install A.C. General-Use snap switches for switching lighting or other branch circuit
loads as indicated on the drawings.
3.1.1 Locate approximately 4 foot, 6 inches above finished grade unless other
indicated.
3.2 Install receptacles as indicated on drawings.
3.2.1 Locate approximately where indicated on drawings.
3.3 All wiring devices indoors and exterior shall have a weatherproof ‘in-use” cover.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16140/1
Section 16150
Motors
1 GENERAL
1.1 The contract documents apply to this section.
1.2 Standards, NEMA Publications MG-1, MG-2, MG-13.
1.3 Motors shall be furnished as part of the equipment which they drive. Their
characteristics shall be such as to provide proper operation of the driven equipment
without exceeding motor ratings. Motor enclosures shall be appropriate for the
location and provide physical protection from external sources of motor damage.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, the following features and
ratings apply.
2.1.1 Motor winding insulation shall be Class "B".
2.1.2 Motor frequency shall be 60 HZ.
2.1.3 Motors shall be designed to operate on either 200 or 110 Volt.
2.2 Motor enclosures, types, and features specifically indicated on drawings or in other
portions of specifications shall be provided.
2.3 Motor shall be suitable for starting by type of starters indicated.
2.4 Phase and voltage ratings shall be NEMA standard ratings indicated on electrical
drawings.
2.5 All 3-phase motors shall have low voltage protection and be protected from short
circuits and overloads on all three phases.
3 E XE C U T IO N
3.1 Not applicable.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16150/1
Section 16190
Supporting Devices
1 GENERAL
1.1 The contract documents apply to this section.
1.2 References: Reference standards are referred to by abbreviation as follows:

ASTM A47 Malleable Iron Castings

ASTM A48 Gray Iron Castings

ASTM A108 Steel Bard, Carbon, Cold-Finished, standard quality

ASTM A123 Zinc (hot galvanized) coatings on products fabricated from rolled,
pressed, and forged steel shapes, plates, bars, and strip

ASTM A153 zinc coating (hot dip) on iron and steel hardware

ASTM A164 Electrodeposited coatings of zinc on steel (type RS) for zinc

ASTM A165 Electrodeposited coatings of cadmium on steel (type TS) for
cadmium

ASTM A167 stainless and heat-resisting chromium-nickel steel plate, sheet and
strip

ASTM A307 carbon steel externally and internally threaded standard fasteners

ASTM A525 steel sheet, zinc coated (galvanized) by the hot-dip process,
general requirements

ASTM A366 steel, carbon, cold-rolled sheet, commercial quality

ASTM A386 zinc coating (hot dip) on assembled steel products

ASTM A526 steel sheet, zinc coated (galvanized) by the hot-dip process,
commercial quality

ASTM A569 steel, carbon (0.15 maximum percent), hot rolled sheet and strip,
commercial quality

ASTM A570 hot-rolled carbon steel sheet and strip, structural quality

ASTM A575 merchant quality hot-rolled carbon steel bars

ASTM A576 steel bars, carbon, hot-rolled, specialty quality

ASTM A611 steel, cold-rolled sheet, carbon, structural

ASTM A635 hot-rolled carbon sheet and strip, commercial quality, heavythickness coils (formerly plate)

ASTM B26 aluminum alloy sand castings

ASTM B85 aluminum alloy die castings
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16190/1

ASTM B209 aluminum alloy die castings

ASTM B221 aluminum alloy extruded bars, rods, wires, shapes, and tubes

ASTM B316 aluminum-alloy extruded bar, rod, pipe, and structural shapes for
electrical purposes (bus conductors)

ASTM B633 electrodeposited coatings of zinc on iron and steel
1.3 Materials shall conform to the following standards.
1.4 Channel

Steel for hot-dip galvanizing; grade 33 12 gage & 14 gage ..........................A570

Steel for hot-dip galvanizing, Grace C 14 gage & 18 gage ...........................A611

Aluminum, alloy 6061 or 6063 ..................................................................... B308

Stainless steel, Type 304 ...............................................................................A167
1.5 Nuts

S Steel, electroplated or A108 .......................................................................A567

Aluminum or 6061 ....................................................................................... Alloy

Stainless steel, Type 304 ...............................................................................A167
1.6 Threaded Fasteners

Steel bolts, nuts, washers ...............................................................................A307

Aluminum or B316 ........................................................................................ B221

Stainless Steel, type 304 ................................................................................A157
1.7 General Fittings

Steel, plated; made from 1-5/8 bar 1/4” and thicker .......................................A576

Steel, plated; made from 1-5/8 bar 1/4” and thicker .......................................A569

Steel, plated; made from flat plates 1/4” and thicker....................... A569 or A635

Iron Castings............................................................................. A47-68 and 48-74

Aluminum castings ................................................................. B26-74 and B85-73

Aluminum............................................................................................ Alloy 3003

Stainless Steel .............................................................................. A167, Type 304
1.8 Pipe Clamps and Straps

Steel .................................... A570 Grade 33, A575, A611 Grade C as Applicable

Aluminum............................................................................................ Alloy 3003

Stainless Steel .............................................................................. A167, Type 304
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16190/2
1.9 Plates (4”x4”x1/4” thick and larger)

Galvanized ..........................................................................................A525, A123

Aluminum ..................................................................................B209, Alloy 3003

Stainless Steel .............................................................................. A167, Type 304
1.10 Finishes

Hot-Dip Galvanized (Iron & Steel Hardware) ............................................. A153

Hot-Dip Galvanized (Assembled Steel Prod.).............................................. A386

Mill Galvanized (Sheet Steel & Coils) ..................................................A525 G90

Electrodeposited Zinc ................................................................... A164 and B633

Electrodeposited Cadmium ............................................................. 165, Type TS
1.11 Supporting Material shall be complete with hangers, connectors, bolts, clamps, and
necessary accessories to make a complete installation.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Outdoors: Threaded materials shall be stainless steel. All other materials shall be
aluminum, stainless steel, or both.
2.2 Acceptable factory fabricated channel support system manufacturers:

B-Line Systems, Inc.

Midland-Rose Corporation, Electrical Products Division (Kindorf)

Unistrut
3 E XE C U T IO N
3.1 Support all equipment which is not inherently self-supporting in such a manner as to
effect a rigid and permanent installation. Use factory-fabricated channel, support
systems, and as appropriate, other structural shapes such as angles, “C” Channels,
pipe, and the like.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16190/3
Section 16420
Electric Service
1 GENERAL
1.1 The contract documents apply to this section.
1.2 Electrical characteristics of service will be:
1.3 208/120 Volts, 3 phase, 4 wire.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Specified in other Sections.
3 E XE C U T IO N
3.1 Contractor is responsible for contacting Appalachian Electric Power Company and
satisfying all requirements for the new electric service connection.
3.2 Metering provisions shall meet requirements of the power company.
3.3 Install meter bases furnished by the power company.
3.4 Provide overhead electric service conduit, weather head, drip loop and point of
attachment. Coordinate installation with the power company to make the project a
complete and useable facility.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16420/1
Section 16450
Grounding
1 GENERAL
1.1 The contract documents apply to this section.
1.2 Provide grounding in accordance with NEC as a minimum. Additional grounding
requirements shall be as specified or indicated on drawings.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Ground rods shall be copper clad steel, 10 feet in length and 3/4-inch in diameter.
2.2 Grounding electrode conductors shall be bare copper sized in accordance with NEC
Table 250-94, or as shown on the contract drawings.
2.3 Equipment grounding conductors in raceways shall be copper with green insulation,
sized in accordance with NEC 250-95. Bare copper grounding conductors will be
acceptable in underground outside raceways.
2.4 Ground connections shall be exothermic type Cadweld or Thermoweld, when direct
buried.
3 E XE C U T IO N
3.1 Install equipment grounding conductors in all raceways containing conductors having
100 volts or more to ground.
3.2 If earth resistance of the service grounding electrode is more than required, install one
additional ground rod a minimum of sixteen (16) feet from other electrodes.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16450/1
Section 16470
Panelboards
1 GENERAL
1.1 The contract documents apply to this section.
1.2 Standards - NEMA Publication No. P8-1.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Panelboards shall be enclosed dead-front safety type with features and ratings as
scheduled on the drawings.
2.2 Panelboards shall be as manufactured by Square D, General Electric, Siemens, or
approved equal. Other manufacturer substitutions will not be allowed.
2.2.1 Panels known as “Load Centers” are unacceptable.
2.2.2 208 volt panels shall be “NQOB” type.
2.3 Molded case circuit breakers shall be as required for intended use and specified in this
Division.
2.4 Bus Bars shall be rectangular solid copper.
2.5 Panelboard enclosures shall be NEMA 1 rated. Provide locks with four (4) master
keys to fit all panels, plastic covered directory holders and cards.
2.6 Space where shown in panel schedules designates space for future protective devices
and shall include bus and support components.
3 E XE C U T IO N
3.1 Bolt all connections to bus bars through highly conductive metal.
3.2 Install cabinets so that center of top breaker or switch does not exceed six (6) feet,
six (6) inches above finished floor.
3.3 Circuits shall be arranged and numbered so as to provide balance of all phases and/or
legs.
3.4 Provide stainless steel 1/4-inch spacers between all panel enclosures and masonry
walls.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16470/1
Section 16475
Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)
1 GENERAL
1.1 References: NEMA Publication AB 1 molded case circuit breakers.
1.2 This section applies to all MCCB whether individually enclosed, group mounted, or
part of other equipment.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 General
2.1.1 MCCB shall be bolt-on type with ratings and special features as scheduled.
2.1.2 Trips
 Trips shall be thermal magnetic with inverse time delay and instantaneous
time-current characteristics.
 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) having magnetic only trips shall be
provided where indicated. MCP’s used with high efficiency motors shall
be capable of carrying the transient inrush current without having to be set
at more than 13 times full load current.
2.2 208/120 volt MCCB shall be commercial grade NQOB.
2.3 Manufacturer shall be Square D, General Electric, Siemens, or approved equal.
3 E X E C U T IO N
3.1 Not used.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16475/1
Section 16510
Lighting
1 GENERAL
1.1
Related Documents: Documents affecting work of this section include, but are not
necessarily limited to, General Conditions, and Sections of Division 1 of these
Specifications.
1.2 Work Included
1.2.1 Furnish, assemble, hang, and connect all lighting fixtures for fixture outlets
shown by symbols on the drawings.
1.2.2 All fixtures shall be furnished complete with sockets, internal wiring, leads,
trim, plaster rings and frames, hangers, supports, ballasts, etc., as applicable
and required for a complete and workmanlike installation.
2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers
2.1.1 Products of certain manufacturers are specified, equal and similar products of
other manufacturers will be acceptable.
2.2 Light Fixtures
2.2.1 Lighting fixtures shall be as indicated on the contract drawings with applicable
design features specified in this section.
3 E X E C U T IO N
3.1 Supports
3.1.1 Support light fixtures directly from the building structure.
3.2 Alignment: Align all fixtures and fixture rows and clean all fixtures and diffusers
prior to final acceptance.
End of Section
WW Associates Project No. 213003.05
16510/1